This is a modern-English version of Hunting for hidden gold, originally written by Dixon, Franklin W.. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.


THE HARDY BOYS

The Hardy Boys

HUNTING FOR HIDDEN GOLD

By FRANKLIN W. DIXON

By Franklin W. Dixon

Author of
The Hardy Boys: The Tower Treasure
The Hardy Boys: The Secret of the Old Mill
The Hardy Boys: The Missing Chums

Author of
The Hardy Boys: The Tower Treasure
The Hardy Boys: The Mystery of the Old Mill
The Hardy Boys: The Missing Friends

ILLUSTRATED BY
Walter S. Rogers

ILLUSTRATED BY
Walter S. Rogers

NEW YORK
GROSSET & DUNLAP
PUBLISHERS

NEW YORK GROSSET & DUNLAP PUBLISHERS

Made in the United States of America

Made in the U.S.

Copyright, 1928, by
GROSSET & DUNLAP, Inc.

Copyright, 1928, by
GROSSET & DUNLAP, Inc.

All Rights Reserved

All rights reserved


"THANK GOODNESS I SAW THE FLAMES!" HE GASPED.

"THANK GOODNESS I SAW THE FLAMES!" HE EXCLAIMED.


CONTENTS

I. In the Storm
II. A Request for Help
III. Jadbury Wilson
IV. A Story from the West
V. Con Riley in the spotlight
VI. A Message from Montana
VII. In Chicago
VIII. The Second Stranger
IX. The Great Escape
X. On Alert
XI. Fenton Hardy's Tale
XII. The Cave-In
XIII. In the Earth's Depths
XIV. Attacked by the Bandits
XV. The Trap
XVI. Info
XVII. The Outlaw's Journal
XVIII. The Blizzard
XIX. The Solo Tree
XX. Down the Chute
XXI. Below ground
XXII. Black Pepper
XXIII. The Capture
XXIV. Bart Dawson Explains It All

THE HARDY BOYS: HUNTING FOR HIDDEN GOLD


CHAPTER I

In the Storm

In the Storm

"A fortune in hidden gold! That certainly sounds mighty interesting."

"A fortune in hidden gold! That definitely sounds really interesting."

Frank Hardy folded up the letter he had just been reading aloud to his brother.

Frank Hardy folded the letter he had just read out loud to his brother.

"Dad has all the luck," replied Joe. "I'd give anything to be working with him on a case like that."

"Dad has all the luck," Joe said. "I'd do anything to be working with him on a case like that."

"Me, too. This case is a bit out of the ordinary."

"Me too. This case is somewhat unusual."

"Where was the letter postmarked?"

"Where was the letter sent from?"

"Somewhere in Montana. A gold-mining camp called Lucky Bottom."

"Somewhere in Montana. A gold mining camp named Lucky Bottom."

"Montana! Gee, but I wish he could have taken us with him. We've never been more than two hundred miles from home."

"Montana! Wow, I really wish he could have brought us along. We've never been more than two hundred miles away from home."

"And I've never seen a mine in my life, much less a real mining camp."

"And I've never seen a mine in my life, let alone a real mining camp."

The Hardy boys looked at one another regretfully. They had just received a letter from their father, Fenton Hardy, an internationally famous detective, who had been called West but a fortnight previous on a mysterious mission. The letter gave the boys their first inkling of the nature of the case that had summoned their father from Bayport, on the Atlantic coast, to the mining country of Montana.

The Hardy boys looked at each other with regret. They had just received a letter from their dad, Fenton Hardy, a well-known detective, who had been called out West just two weeks earlier for a mysterious mission. The letter gave the boys their first hint about the case that had taken their father from Bayport on the Atlantic coast to the mining areas of Montana.

"A fortune in hidden gold," repeated Frank. "I hope he finds it all right."

"A fortune in hidden gold," Frank said again. "I hope he finds it."

"It was stolen from one of the big companies, wasn't it?"

"It was taken from one of the big companies, right?"

"Yes. He says that an entire shipment of bullion was stolen before it left the camp, so they believe it must have been hidden somewhere in the neighborhood."

"Yes. He says that a whole shipment of gold was stolen before it left the camp, so they think it must be hidden somewhere nearby."

"And his job is to find it."

"And his job is to find it."

"If he can. And the thieves as well."

"If he can. And the thieves too."

Joe sighed. "I sure would like to be out there right now. We might be able to help him."

Joe sighed. "I really wish I could be out there right now. We might be able to help him."

"Well, we've helped him in other cases, but I guess we're out of luck this time. Montana is too far away."

"Well, we’ve helped him in other cases, but I guess we’re out of luck this time. Montana is too far away."

"Yes, and we have to keep on going to school. I'll be glad when we're through school and can be regular detectives like dad."

"Yeah, and we have to keep going to school. I'll be happy when we're done with school and can be real detectives like Dad."

Frank grinned. "No use grouching about it," he said cheerfully. "Our time will come some day."

Frank grinned. "No point in complaining about it," he said cheerfully. "Our time will come someday."

"Yes, but it seems a long time coming," replied Joe, smiling ruefully.

"Yeah, but it feels like it's taking forever," Joe replied with a wry smile.

"Oh, in a few more years we'll be going all over the country just like dad, solving robberies and murders and having all sorts of excitement. We haven't done too badly so far, anyway."

"Oh, in just a few more years, we'll be traveling all over the country like Dad, solving robberies and murders and having all kinds of adventures. We haven't done too badly so far, anyway."

"Yes, we had the fun of discovering the tower treasure."

"Yeah, we had a great time finding the tower treasure."

"And running down the counterfeiters."

"And tracking down the fraudsters."

"Yes; and solving the mystery of the house on the cliff and finding out about Blacksnake Island."

"Yes; and figuring out the mystery of the house on the cliff and learning about Blacksnake Island."

The boys were referring to previous cases in which they had been involved and in which their ability had been proved. But it had been several months since any adventure or excitement had come their way and they were feeling restless, the more so now that they knew their father was at that moment in the remote mining camp in the West engaged on a mystery that seized their imagination.

The boys were talking about past cases they had worked on where they had showcased their skills. However, it had been quite a while since anything exciting had happened, and they were feeling restless, especially now that they knew their dad was currently in a remote mining camp out West working on a mystery that captured their imagination.

"Hidden gold!" said Joe, half to himself. "That would be a case worth working on."

"Hidden gold!" Joe said, mostly to himself. "That would be a case worth working on."

"Forget it," laughed his brother. "There's no use making yourself miserable wishing we were out there, because we're not and it doesn't look as if there's much chance that we shall be. Perhaps his old case isn't so exciting, anyway. You're not going to spend all Saturday wishing for something you can't have. Don't forget we're to go out with Chet and Jerry this afternoon."

"Forget it," laughed his brother. "There's no point in making yourself miserable wishing we were out there, because we're not, and it doesn't look like we will be anytime soon. Maybe his old case isn't that exciting, anyway. You're not going to spend all Saturday wanting something you can't have. Don't forget we're going out with Chet and Jerry this afternoon."

"That's right," declared Joe. "I'd almost forgotten. We were to go skating, weren't we?"

"That's right," Joe said. "I almost forgot. We were going skating, weren't we?"

"Yes; and it's about time we started or the others will be going without us."

"Yeah, and it's about time we got started or the others will be leaving without us."

This possibility moved Joe to action and in a few moments the Hardy boys had dismissed their father's letter from their minds and were rummaging in a cupboard beneath the stairs for their skates. They had planned to meet their chums at the mouth of Willow River, a stream that ran from the mountains down through the farm lands to Barmet Bay, on which Bayport was located. It was a brisk, clear winter afternoon, ideal for an outing, and their Saturday holiday from Bayport high school was much too precious to be spent indoors.

This idea motivated Joe to take action, and in no time, the Hardy boys had pushed their dad's letter out of their minds and were digging through a cupboard under the stairs for their skates. They had arranged to meet their friends at the mouth of Willow River, a stream that flowed from the mountains through the farmland to Barmet Bay, where Bayport was situated. It was a chilly, clear winter afternoon, perfect for a day outside, and their Saturday off from Bayport High School was way too valuable to waste indoors.

Their Aunt Gertrude, an elderly, crotchety maiden lady of certain temper and uncertain years, eyed them suspiciously as they came into the hallway with their skates and began donning sweaters and warm gloves.

Their Aunt Gertrude, an elderly, grumpy spinster with a definite attitude and an unclear age, looked at them warily as they entered the hallway with their skates and started putting on sweaters and warm gloves.

"Skating, hey?" she sniffed. "You'll go through the ice, I'll be bound."

"Skating, huh?" she said, wrinkling her nose. "You're definitely going to fall through the ice."

The boys knew from experience that it was always best to placate Aunt Gertrude.

The boys knew from experience that it was always best to keep Aunt Gertrude happy.

"We'll try not to, Aunt Gertrude," Frank assured her.

"We'll do our best, Aunt Gertrude," Frank promised her.

"You'll try not to! A lot of good that will do. If the ice isn't strong, all the trying in the world won't keep you from going through it. And the ice isn't strong. I'm sure it isn't. It can't be."

"You'll try not to! Like that's going to help. If the ice isn't strong, no amount of trying will stop you from falling through it. And the ice isn't strong. I’m sure it isn't. It can’t be."

"The fellows have been skating on Willow River for more than a week now."

"The guys have been skating on Willow River for over a week now."

"Maybe so. Maybe so. They've been lucky, that's all I can say. You mark my words, that ice will break one of these fine days. I only hope you boys aren't on it when it does."

"Maybe that's true. Maybe it is. They've just been lucky, that's all I can say. Mark my words, that ice will crack one of these days. I just hope you guys aren’t on it when it does."

"I hope so too," laughed Frank, drawing on his gloves.

"I hope so too," laughed Frank, putting on his gloves.

"It's no laughing matter," persisted Aunt Gertrude gloomily. "Well, I suppose if you will court death and destruction, an old lady like me can't do anything to stop you. Although you'd be better off at home studying. Run along. Run along."

"It's not a joke," Aunt Gertrude said solemnly. "I guess if you're intent on bringing danger to yourself, there's not much an old lady like me can do to stop you. But you’d be better off studying at home. Now go on. Go on."

"Good-bye, Aunt Gertrude."

"Goodbye, Aunt Gertrude."

"Run along. Be home early. Don't skate too far out. Don't get lost. Don't get caught in a snowstorm. I'm sure there's one coming up. I know the signs. My lumbago is troubling me again to-day. Don't forget to come back in time for tea."

"Run along. Be home early. Don't skate too far out. Don't get lost. Don't get caught in a snowstorm. I’m sure one is on the way. I know the signs. My lower back is bothering me again today. Don't forget to come back in time for tea."

Aunt Gertrude's favorite word was "don't" and she persisted in treating her nephews as though they were but a grade advanced from kindergarten. Mrs. Hardy was out for the afternoon and in her absence the worthy spinster rejoiced in her opportunity to exercise her authority. When she had exhausted her store of admonitions, the boys departed, and she watched them from the door with gloomy forebodings as to the ultimate outcome of their skating trip. Aunt Gertrude was a pessimist of the first water.

Aunt Gertrude's favorite word was "don't," and she kept treating her nephews as if they were only a step up from kindergarten. Mrs. Hardy was out for the afternoon, and while she was gone, the well-meaning spinster happily took the chance to assert her authority. After she had run out of warnings, the boys left, and she watched them from the door, feeling anxious about what would happen during their skating trip. Aunt Gertrude was a real pessimist.

When the Hardy boys reached the foot of the street they found Chet Morton, rotund and jovial, and Jerry Gilroy, tall and red-cheeked, awaiting them.

When the Hardy boys got to the bottom of the street, they saw Chet Morton, plump and cheerful, and Jerry Gilroy, tall and blushing, waiting for them.

"Just going to start without you," declared Chet, swinging his skates.

"Just going to start without you," Chet said, swinging his skates.

"We had a letter from dad and we were so interested in reading it that we mighty near forgot about the trip," confessed Frank.

"We got a letter from Dad, and we were so eager to read it that we almost forgot about the trip," Frank admitted.

"Where is he?"

"Where's he?"

"Out in Montana, in a mining camp, working on a case."

"Out in Montana, at a mining camp, working on a case."

"Gosh, he's lucky!" said Jerry enviously.

"Wow, he's so lucky!" said Jerry with envy.

"I'll say he is," agreed Frank. "Joe and I have just been wishing we could be out there with him."

"I'll say he is," Frank agreed. "Joe and I have just been hoping we could be out there with him."

"Well, we can't have everything," Chet said cheerfully. "Come on—I'll race you to Willow River."

"Well, we can't have it all," Chet said with a smile. "Come on—I'll race you to Willow River."

He dashed off down the snow-covered street, the others in close pursuit. The race was of short duration, for Willow River was some distance away, and the boys soon slowed down to a walk. At a more reasonable gait they continued their journey, and within half an hour had reached the river, now covered with a gleaming sheet of ice. In a few minutes the lads had donned their skates and were skimming off over the smooth surface.

He raced down the snow-covered street, the others right behind him. The sprint didn’t last long since Willow River was a good distance away, and the boys soon slowed to a walk. At a more comfortable pace, they continued their journey and within half an hour, they arrived at the river, now blanketed in a shiny layer of ice. In just a few minutes, the guys had put on their skates and were gliding across the smooth surface.

The banks of the river were covered with snow and the trees along the shore were bare and black. Above the hills the sky was of a slaty gray.

The riverbanks were blanketed with snow, and the trees lining the shore were bare and dark. Above the hills, the sky was a slate gray.

"Looks like snow," Frank commented, as they skated on up the river.

"Looks like snow," Frank said as they skated up the river.

"Oh, it'll blow over," answered Chet carelessly. "Let's go on up to Shallow Lake."

"Oh, it'll blow over," Chet replied casually. "Let’s head up to Shallow Lake."

"We don't want to be away too long. It'll be dark before we get back."

"We shouldn't be gone too long. It'll be dark by the time we return."

"We can skate up there and back in a couple of hours. Come on."

"We can skate up there and back in a couple of hours. Let’s go."

It was a brisk, cold afternoon and the boys did not need much urging. Shallow Lake was back in the hills, but the boys made such good time over the glassy surface of the river that it was not long before they left the farm lands behind.

It was a chilly, brisk afternoon, and the boys didn’t need much convincing. Shallow Lake was further back in the hills, but the boys moved so quickly over the smooth surface of the river that it wasn't long before they left the farmlands behind.

Frank Hardy cast an anxious glance at the sky every little while. He knew the signs of brooding storm and the peculiar haziness above the horizon indicated an approaching snowstorm. However, he said nothing, in the hope that they would be able to reach the mouth of the river again before the storm broke.

Frank Hardy kept stealing worried glances at the sky. He recognized the signs of an impending storm, and the strange haziness above the horizon hinted at a coming snowstorm. Still, he kept quiet, hoping they could make it back to the mouth of the river before the storm hit.

It was four o'clock before the Hardy boys and their chums reached Shallow Lake. It was a picturesque little body of water and the ice shone with a blue glare, smooth as glass and free of snow. It was a natural skating rink, and Chet Morton gave a whoop of delight as he went skimming out upon it.

It was four o'clock when the Hardy boys and their friends arrived at Shallow Lake. It was a beautiful little lake, and the ice sparkled with a blue shine, smooth like glass and without any snow. It was a natural skating rink, and Chet Morton let out a yell of excitement as he glided out onto it.

The boys enjoyed skating on the lake so greatly that they scarcely noticed the first few flakes of snow that drifted down from the slaty sky, and it was not until the snowfall became so heavy that it almost blotted out the opposite hillsides that they thought of going back.

The boys loved skating on the lake so much that they hardly noticed the first few snowflakes falling from the gray sky, and it wasn’t until the snowfall got so heavy that it nearly obscured the hills across the way that they considered heading back.

"Looks as if it's settling down for the night," Joe remarked. "We'd better start back before we get lost."

"Looks like it's getting dark," Joe said. "We should head back before we get lost."

"Might as well," agreed Chet Morton, with a sigh. "I wish we'd come out here this morning. I'd like to skate here all day."

"Might as well," Chet Morton agreed with a sigh. "I wish we had come out here this morning. I’d love to skate here all day."

With Frank Hardy in the lead, the boys began to make their way toward Willow River, where it left the lake. They were about half a mile out on the open expanse of ice and the snow was now falling heavily. At first the soft white flakes had merely drifted down. Now they came scudding across the ice, whipped by a rising wind.

With Frank Hardy leading the way, the boys started heading towards Willow River, where it flowed out of the lake. They were about half a mile out on the wide expanse of ice and the snow was now falling heavily. At first, the soft white flakes had just been drifting down. Now they were racing across the ice, blown by an increasing wind.

"It'll be harder getting back," Frank said. "The wind is against us."

"It'll be tougher to get back," Frank said. "The wind is against us."

The wind was indeed against them and it was rising in volume. It came in quick, violent gusts, storming sheets of snow down upon them, snow that stung their faces and erased the scene before them in a white cloud. Then it blew steadily, with increasing force. The storm moaned and whistled about them. They could scarcely see one another, save as dark, shadowy figures skating steadily on toward the gloomy line of hills that rose from the haze of storm.

The wind was definitely against them and it was getting stronger. It hit them in quick, violent bursts, sending sheets of snow crashing down, snow that stung their faces and blurred everything around them in a white cloud. Then it picked up, blowing steadily and with more force. The storm howled and whistled around them. They could barely see each other, only as dark, shadowy shapes skating steadily toward the dark line of hills that loomed in the storm's haze.

"Why, this is a regular blizzard!" Chet Morton shouted.

"Wow, this is a total blizzard!" Chet Morton shouted.

As though in emphasis, the wind shrieked down upon them with redoubled fury. The snow was swirling across the flat surface of the lake in great white sheets. The cold became more intense. It became apparent that in a few minutes even the near-by shores would be blotted from view.

As if to emphasize, the wind howled down on them with even more rage. The snow was swirling across the flat surface of the lake in huge white sheets. The cold was becoming more intense. It was clear that in just a few minutes, even the nearby shores would be completely out of sight.

"Let's make for the shore!" called out Frank. "We'll wait until it blows over."

"Let's head to the shore!" Frank shouted. "We'll wait until it passes."

There was a high cliff not far away, and Frank judged that it would provide shelter from the brunt of the storm until they should be able to continue their journey. Clearly, it was inadvisable to go on, for the wind was against them and they were making little headway. Also, in the fury of the sweeping snow it was possible that they might become separated. So they turned toward the cliff, that they could see dimly through the gray gloom.

There was a tall cliff nearby, and Frank thought it would protect them from the worst of the storm until they could continue their journey. Clearly, it was not a good idea to push on, since the wind was against them and they were barely making any progress. Also, with the blowing snow, they could easily get separated. So they headed toward the cliff, which they could barely see through the gray haze.

The wind shrieked. The snow beat against them. The sharp flakes stung their faces, swept into their eyes. The hurricane seemed like a mighty wall, forcing them back. Doggedly, they skated on, into the face of the blizzard that seemed to be sapping their strength.

The wind howled. The snow battered them. The icy flakes hurt their faces, blowing into their eyes. The hurricane felt like an enormous wall, pushing them back. Relentlessly, they skated on, into the blizzard that seemed to be draining their energy.

Chet Morton already was lagging behind. The snow was collecting on the ice in little heaps and banks that clogged their skates and made progress even more difficult.

Chet Morton was already falling behind. Snow was piling up on the ice in little heaps and banks that clogged their skates and made moving forward even harder.

The face of the cliff seemed a long distance away. And, with redoubled fury, the wind came howling down over the hills.

The cliff's face felt far away. And with even more rage, the wind howled down from the hills.

Frank was almost exhausted by the constant battle against the wind and snow, and he knew that the others, too, were tiring quickly. It would be death for them if they faltered now. They must reach the shelter of the cliff!

Frank was nearly worn out from the ongoing fight against the wind and snow, and he realized that the others were getting tired quickly as well. It would mean disaster for them if they gave up now. They had to make it to the shelter of the cliff!


CHAPTER II

A Call for Help

A Request for Help

Doggedly, the boys fought their way on through the blizzard.

Doggedly, the boys pushed their way through the blizzard.

Once Joe Hardy stumbled and fell prone in the snow. He was up again in a moment, but the incident testified to the difficulty of their progress. The cliff seemed no nearer. To add to their peril twilight was gathering and the gloom of the blizzard was intensified.

Once Joe Hardy tripped and fell face-first in the snow. He got back up quickly, but the incident showed how tough their journey was. The cliff didn’t seem any closer. To make things worse, twilight was setting in, and the darkness of the blizzard was growing stronger.

"We've got to make it," Frank muttered, gritting his teeth.

"We've got to make it," Frank muttered, grinding his teeth.

The boys were strung out in single file, Chet Morton in the rear. All were tiring. Frank skated more slowly to give the others an opportunity of catching up. When they were together again he waved his arm toward the gray mass that loomed through the storm ahead.

The boys were lined up in a single file, with Chet Morton at the back. Everyone was getting tired. Frank skated more slowly to let the others catch up. Once they were back together, he waved his arm towards the gray shape that loomed in the storm ahead.

"Almost there!"

"Almost there!"

His words gave all of them new courage, and they redoubled their efforts. In a short while the force of the wind seemed to be decreasing. They were now gaining the shelter of the cliff. The snow had not collected so heavily on the surface of the ice, and they made better progress. In a few minutes they had skated into an area of comparative calm. They could still hear the screaming of the wind, and when they looked back the entire lake was an inferno of swirling snow, but in the shelter of the steep rocks they were protected from the full fury of the blizzard.

His words inspired all of them with new courage, and they intensified their efforts. Soon, the wind seemed to be dying down. They were now reaching the shelter of the cliff. The snow hadn't piled up as much on the ice, so they made better progress. In just a few minutes, they skated into a relatively calm area. They could still hear the howling wind, and when they looked back, the entire lake was a chaotic storm of swirling snow, but in the protection of the steep rocks, they were shielded from the full force of the blizzard.

"Some storm!" grunted Chet, as he skated slowly to the base of the cliff and sat down on a frost-encrusted boulder.

"What a storm!" Chet grunted as he skated slowly to the bottom of the cliff and sat down on a boulder covered in frost.

"I'll say it is," agreed Jerry Gilroy, following Chet's example.

"I'll say it is," Jerry Gilroy agreed, following Chet's lead.

The Hardy boys leaned against the rocks. They were safe enough in this shelter unless the wind changed completely about, which was unlikely. With the approach of darkness it was growing colder, but all the boys were warmly clad and they had few fears on that score. Their chief worry was lest the storm should not die down in time to permit of their return to Bayport that night, because they knew their people would be worrying about them.

The Hardy boys leaned against the rocks. They were safe enough in this shelter unless the wind completely changed direction, which was unlikely. As darkness approached, it was getting colder, but all the boys were dressed warmly, so they didn't have many concerns about that. Their main worry was that the storm wouldn’t calm down in time for them to return to Bayport that night, because they knew their families would be worried about them.

"I see where mother won't let me go skating again," declared Chet. "She's always afraid I'll get drowned or lost or something, and now she'll get such a scare that I'll never get out again."

"I get why Mom won't let me go skating anymore," Chet said. "She's always worried I'll drown or get lost or something, and now she'll freak out so much that I'll never be allowed to go out again."

"Aunt Gertrude will crow over this for a month," Joe put in. "She said before we started that we'd be sure to get into some kind of a mess."

"Aunt Gertrude is going to gloat about this for a month," Joe added. "She mentioned before we began that we were definitely going to get ourselves into some kind of trouble."

"Well, we'll just have to wait here until the storm blows over, that's all," said Frank philosophically. "Even if it does get dark we can follow the river all right and get home easily enough. Perhaps the storm won't last very long."

"Well, we'll just have to wait here until the storm passes, that's all," Frank said thoughtfully. "Even if it gets dark, we can still follow the river and get home without any trouble. Maybe the storm won't last too long."

The boys settled themselves down to wait in the lee of the high black rocks until the fury of the blizzard should have diminished. There seemed to be no indication that the storm was dying down and they resigned themselves to a wait of at least an hour. Frank scouted around in search of firewood, planning to light a blaze, but any wood there may have been along the shore had long since been snowed under and he had to give up the attempt.

The boys got comfortable in the shelter of the tall black rocks, waiting for the blizzard to calm down. There was no sign that the storm was letting up, so they prepared for at least an hour of waiting. Frank looked around for firewood, hoping to start a fire, but any wood that might have been on the shore was buried under snow, and he had to abandon the effort.

While the boys are thus marooned by the storm in the shelter of the cliff it might be best to introduce them to new readers of this series.

While the boys are stuck by the storm in the shelter of the cliff, it might be a good time to introduce them to new readers of this series.

Frank and Joe Hardy, sixteen and fifteen years old respectively, were the sons of Fenton Hardy, an internationally famous private detective, living in Bayport, on the Atlantic Coast. Although still in high school, both boys had inherited many of their father's deductive tendencies and his ability in his chosen profession and it was their ambition to some day become detectives themselves.

Frank and Joe Hardy, sixteen and fifteen years old, were the sons of Fenton Hardy, a well-known private detective living in Bayport on the Atlantic Coast. Even though they were still in high school, both boys had inherited many of their father's sleuthing skills and talent for his profession, and they dreamed of becoming detectives themselves one day.

Their father had made an enviable name for himself. For many years he was with the New York Police Department, but had resigned to accept cases on his own account. He was known as one of the most astute detectives in the country and had solved many mysteries that had baffled city police and detective forces.

Their father had built a remarkable reputation. For many years, he served with the New York Police Department, but he resigned to take on cases independently. He was recognized as one of the sharpest detectives in the country and had cracked many mysteries that had puzzled city police and detective agencies.

In the first volume of this series, "The Hardy Boys: The Tower Treasure," Frank and Joe Hardy solved their first mystery, tracing down a mysterious theft of jewels and bonds from a mansion on the outskirts of Bayport after their father had been called in on the case and had been forced to admit himself checkmated. The boys had received a substantial reward for their efforts and had convinced their parents that they had marked abilities in the work they desired to follow.

In the first volume of this series, "The Hardy Boys: The Tower Treasure," Frank and Joe Hardy solved their first mystery by tracking down a mysterious theft of jewels and bonds from a mansion on the outskirts of Bayport after their father was brought in on the case and had to admit that he was outsmarted. The boys received a nice reward for their efforts and convinced their parents that they had notable skills for the work they wanted to pursue.

The second volume, "The Hardy Boys: The House on the Cliff," recounted the adventures of the boys in running down a criminal gang operating in Barmet Bay, and in the third volume, "The Hardy Boys: The Secret of the Old Mill," they aided their father materially in rounding up another gang.

The second volume, "The Hardy Boys: The House on the Cliff," told the story of the boys as they chased down a criminal gang operating in Barmet Bay, and in the third volume, "The Hardy Boys: The Secret of the Old Mill," they helped their dad significantly in capturing another gang.

The volume just previous to the present volume, "The Hardy Boys: The Missing Chums," told how they sought their chums, Chet Morton and Biff Hooper, who had been kidnapped by a gang of crooks and taken to a sinister island off the coast.

The book before this one, "The Hardy Boys: The Missing Chums," described how they searched for their friends, Chet Morton and Biff Hooper, who had been kidnapped by a gang of criminals and taken to a creepy island off the coast.

As the boys waited in the shelter of the rocks they talked of some of the adventures they had undergone.

As the boys hung out in the shelter of the rocks, they chatted about some of the adventures they had experienced.

"This is the first bit of excitement we've had since we left Blacksnake Island," declared Chet. "I thought we were never going to have any adventures again."

"This is the first bit of excitement we've had since we left Blacksnake Island," said Chet. "I thought we were never going to have any adventures again."

"This isn't much of an adventure," Frank said, smiling, "but perhaps it's better than nothing. Although I must say it's a mighty cold and uncomfortable one," he added. "I wonder if we'll ever have any adventures like the ones we've gone through already."

"This isn't much of an adventure," Frank said with a smile, "but maybe it’s better than nothing. Still, I have to say it's incredibly cold and uncomfortable," he added. "I wonder if we'll ever have any adventures like the ones we've experienced before."

"I think you've had your fill," grumbled Jerry Gilroy. "You've had more excitement than any other two fellows in Bayport."

"I think you've had enough," grumbled Jerry Gilroy. "You've experienced more excitement than any other two guys in Bayport."

"I suppose we have. Like the time the smugglers caught dad and kept him in the cave in the cliff and then caught us when we went to rescue him."

"I guess we have. Like that time the smugglers caught Dad and held him in the cave in the cliff, and then they caught us when we went to rescue him."

"And the time we got into the old mill and found the gang at work," added Joe.

"And the time we went into the old mill and found the crew at work," added Joe.

"Or the fight on Blacksnake Island when you came after Biff Hooper and me," Chet Morton put in. "You've had enough adventure to last you a lifetime. What are you kicking about?"

"Or the fight on Blacksnake Island when you came after Biff Hooper and me," Chet Morton added. "You've had enough adventure to last you a lifetime. What are you complaining about?"

"I'm not kicking. Just wondering if we'll ever have anything else happen to us."

"I'm not complaining. Just wondering if anything else will ever happen to us."

"If this blizzard keeps up all night you can chalk down another adventure in your little red book," declared Jerry. "That is, if we don't freeze to death."

"If this blizzard keeps going all night, you can add another adventure to your little red book," Jerry said. "That is, if we don’t freeze to death."

"Cheerful!"

"Happy!"

"It doesn't look as if the wind is dying down, anyway."

"It doesn’t seem like the wind is letting up, anyway."

They looked out into the swirling screen of snow. The wind, instead of diminishing, seemed to be increasing in fury and the snow was even sweeping in little gusts and eddies into their refuge at the base of the rocks. The swirling snow hid the opposite shore of the lake completely and the howling of the wind was rising in volume.

They looked out at the swirling snowstorm. The wind, instead of dying down, seemed to grow fiercer, and the snow was sweeping in little gusts and eddies into their shelter at the base of the rocks. The swirling snow completely obscured the opposite shore of the lake, and the howling of the wind grew louder.

Suddenly they heard a strange crashing noise that came from directly overhead.

Suddenly, they heard a weird crashing sound coming from right above them.

All looked up, startled.

Everyone looked up, startled.

"What was that?" asked Chet.

"What was that?" Chet asked.

The crashing noise continued for a moment or so, then died away, drowned out by the roar of the wind and the sweep of the snow.

The crashing noise went on for a moment, then faded, overwhelmed by the howling wind and the swirl of the snow.

"Perhaps it was a tree blown over," suggested Jerry.

"Maybe it was a tree that got knocked over," Jerry suggested.

"A tree wouldn't make that much noise," Frank objected. For the crash had been unusually loud and prolonged and it had seemed to be accompanied by the snapping of timbers.

"A tree wouldn't make that much noise," Frank argued. The crash had been unusually loud and lasted a long time, and it seemed to be followed by the sound of snapping wood.

The boys waited, listening, but the sound had died away.

The boys waited, listening, but the sound had faded.

"It was right above us," Joe said.

"It was right over us," Joe said.

Hardly had he spoken the words than there came a second crash, louder than the first, and then, with a rush and a roar, a great avalanche of snow came hurtling down upon the boys from the side of the cliff. The snow engulfed them, swept over them, almost buried them as they struggled to avoid it. Then, in all the uproar, they heard another thundering crash close at hand.

Hardly had he finished speaking when there was a second crash, even louder than the first, and then, with a rush and a roar, a massive avalanche of snow came crashing down on the boys from the side of the cliff. The snow overwhelmed them, swept over them, and nearly buried them as they tried to escape it. Then, amidst all the chaos, they heard another thunderous crash nearby.

Spluttering and struggling to extricate themselves from the avalanche of snow that had swept down from above, the boys could scarcely realize what had happened. As for the origin of the crashing sound they had heard, it was still a mystery.

Spluttering and struggling to free themselves from the avalanche of snow that had come crashing down from above, the boys could hardly grasp what had just happened. The source of the loud noise they had heard was still a mystery.

Then, above the clamor of the gale that seemed to rage in redoubled volume, they heard a faint cry. It came from the fog of swirling snow close by. Then the shrieking wind drowned the sound out, but the boys knew that it had been a cry for help.

Then, above the noise of the storm that seemed to grow louder, they heard a faint cry. It came from the fog of swirling snow nearby. Then the howling wind drowned it out, but the boys knew it had been a cry for help.

Frank struggled free and lent Joe a helping hand until they were both clear of the great heap of snow and ice. Chet Morton and Jerry Gilroy also fought their way clear without difficulty, for the snow was soft and the avalanche had not been of great proportions.

Frank broke free and gave Joe a hand until they were both out from the big pile of snow and ice. Chet Morton and Jerry Gilroy also managed to get free easily, since the snow was soft and the avalanche wasn't very big.

"I heard some one call," Frank shouted. "Listen."

"I heard someone call," Frank shouted. "Listen."

Shivering with cold, the boys stood knee-deep in snow and listened intently.

Shivering from the cold, the boys stood knee-deep in snow and listened closely.

There came a lull in the gale.

There was a break in the storm.

Then, faintly, they heard the shout again.

Then, they faintly heard the shout again.

"Help!" came the cry. "Help! Help!"

"Help!" came the shout. "Help! Help!"

It came from somewhere immediately before them, and as the wind shifted just then Frank caught sight of a dark object against the surface of the snow.

It came from somewhere right in front of them, and as the wind changed at that moment, Frank noticed a dark shape against the snow.

"Come on!" he shouted to the others, and began plunging through the snow over to the object he had spied.

"Come on!" he yelled to the others, and started pushing through the snow toward the object he had spotted.

The boys reached it in a few minutes. To their unbounded astonishment they found that they were confronted by the side of a small cottage!

The boys got there in a few minutes. To their complete surprise, they found themselves facing the side of a small cottage!


CHAPTER III

Jadbury Wilson

Jadbury Wilson

In amazement, the Hardy boys and their chums stared at the cottage that had so strangely appeared in the snow.

In awe, the Hardy boys and their friends stared at the cottage that had mysteriously appeared in the snow.

"How did that get here?" shouted Chet Morton.

"How did that get here?" shouted Chet Morton.

Frank waved his hand toward the top of the cliff.

Frank waved his hand toward the edge of the cliff.

"There was a little cottage up there," he told them. "It must have been blown off by the wind."

"There was a small cottage up there," he told them. "It must have been blown away by the wind."

This, indeed, had been the case. Sheltered by the cliff, the boys had no adequate realization of the immense force of the hurricane. The little cottage at the top of the cliff had received the full brunt of the wind and had finally succumbed to the gale and to the force of a sudden avalanche of snow from farther up on the hillside. It had no foundation, and it had been swept away bodily.

This was exactly what happened. Protected by the cliff, the boys didn’t fully understand the immense power of the hurricane. The small cottage at the top of the cliff took the full force of the wind and eventually gave in to the storm and a sudden avalanche of snow from higher up the hill. It had no foundation, and it was completely swept away.

The boys fought their way through the deep snow and inspected the little house. It had come through the terrific ordeal with surprisingly small damage. One side had crumpled under the force of the impact and the building was canted over at a precarious angle. But the roof and the other three sides were unbroken, thanks to the soft snow which had lessened the shock of the fall.

The boys struggled through the deep snow and checked out the little house. It had survived the brutal ordeal with surprisingly little damage. One side had caved in from the impact, and the building was leaning at a risky angle. But the roof and the other three sides were intact, thanks to the soft snow that had absorbed some of the shock from the fall.

"There must be some one inside," Joe said. "Some one was shouting for help."

"There has to be someone inside," Joe said. "Someone was calling for help."

Frank found the door of the cottage and tried to open it, but it was jammed, as the house was not standing upright. Then he discovered a window, the glass of which was shattered, and with assistance from the others he made his way inside.

Frank found the cottage door and tried to open it, but it was stuck since the house wasn't standing straight. Then he noticed a window with shattered glass, and with help from the others, he managed to get inside.

The interior of the place was wrecked. In the dim light Frank could see the broken boards and shattered timbers, the broken glass, the upturned stove, the smashed furniture—but there was no sign of any human being.

The inside of the place was a mess. In the low light, Frank could see the broken boards and shattered beams, the shattered glass, the overturned stove, the wrecked furniture—but there was no sign of anyone.

"Doesn't seem to be any one here," he called out to the others.

"Doesn't seem to be anyone here," he called out to the others.

Just then he heard a sigh. It came from beneath an upturned cot at one side of the room. He investigated and saw a hand emerging from beneath the cot. In a few minutes he had raised the small bed and found an old man lying face downward on the floor.

Just then, he heard a sigh. It came from under an upturned cot on one side of the room. He checked it out and saw a hand sticking out from beneath the cot. In a few minutes, he lifted the small bed and discovered an old man lying face down on the floor.

"Help me out!" muttered the old man feebly.

"Help me out!" the old man said weakly.

Frank called to the others, and one by one they came scrambling through the window. Together, they raised the old man to his feet and set him down on the cot, which they turned to an upright position again. Painfully, the old fellow rubbed his aching joints.

Frank called out to the others, and one by one they came rushing through the window. Together, they lifted the old man to his feet and placed him back on the cot, which they straightened to an upright position again. Slowly, the old man rubbed his sore joints.

"No bones broken," he said, at last. "I'm lucky I wasn't killed."

"No bones are broken," he said finally. "I'm lucky to be alive."

"You might have been crushed to death," Frank interposed.

"You could have been crushed to death," Frank interjected.

"It's lucky you boys were near," he said. "I'd have frozen to death if I'd been left pinned under that cot. I mightn't have been found for days. But it takes a lot to kill Jadbury Wilson. I guess my time ain't come yet."

"It's lucky you guys were close," he said. "I would have frozen to death if I had been stuck under that cot. I might not have been found for days. But it takes a lot to take down Jadbury Wilson. I guess my time hasn't come yet."

The old man looked around and smiled feebly at the lads. He was small but sturdy of frame, with kindly blue eyes and a gray beard.

The old man looked around and smiled weakly at the boys. He was short but solidly built, with warm blue eyes and a gray beard.

"I've often thought it was dangerous to live in a place at the top of a cliff like that," he said. "There've been times when the wind was so strong I was afraid it would pick up my house and lift it clean out into the lake. But, somehow, it always stood up until to-day. It all came so suddenly I hardly knew what was happenin'. Mighty good thing the house landed right side up. How did you lads come to be near by?"

"I've often thought it’s risky to live in a place at the top of a cliff like that," he said. "There have been times when the wind was so strong I was afraid it would pick my house up and toss it right into the lake. But somehow, it always stayed standing until today. It all happened so suddenly I barely knew what was going on. Really lucky the house landed on its feet. How did you guys end up nearby?"

"We were on a skating trip and we got caught in the storm," Frank told him. "We took refuge at the foot of the cliff and we were standing there when we heard the crash. Then we heard some one call."

"We were on a skating trip and got caught in the storm," Frank told him. "We took shelter at the base of the cliff and were standing there when we heard the crash. Then we heard someone call."

"That was me. I didn't think there was any use of hollerin', but I hollered just the same, although I didn't think there was a human soul within three miles."

"That was me. I didn't think there was any point in shouting, but I shouted anyway, even though I figured there wasn't a single person within three miles."

Jadbury Wilson got up off the cot, but subsided back with a groan of pain.

Jadbury Wilson got up from the cot, but sank back down with a groan of pain.

"I got banged and bumped around too much," he said. "Thought I'd get busy and try to straighten things up around here."

"I got thrown around way too much," he said. "I thought I’d get to work and try to tidy things up around here."

"We'll do that," said Jerry Gilroy promptly.

"We'll do that," Jerry Gilroy replied immediately.

"Everythin's pretty well smashed up," observed the old man. "But you could mebbe fix up the stove so it would work again. Looks as if we're all here to stay until the storm blows over."

"Everything's pretty much broken," the old man said. "But maybe you could fix the stove so it works again. It seems like we're all stuck here until the storm passes."

The boys made Jadbury Wilson comfortable on his cot and then they set to work to restore some semblance of order to the interior of the little cabin. They managed to patch up openings in the walls through which the snow was drifting, and although one side of the cottage had collapsed completely there was still sufficient room in which to move about. They nailed a tarpaulin over the broken window, righted the table and chairs and picked up the tin dishes that were scattered about on the floor. The stove gave them most trouble, but they were able to set the stovepipe up again and light a fire so that before long a comfortable warmth began to pervade the interior of their shelter.

The boys made Jadbury Wilson comfortable on his cot and then got to work restoring some order to the inside of the little cabin. They managed to patch up openings in the walls where the snow was blowing in, and even though one side of the cottage had completely collapsed, there was still enough room to move around. They nailed a tarpaulin over the broken window, set the table and chairs upright, and picked up the tin dishes that were scattered on the floor. The stove gave them the most trouble, but they were able to reattach the stovepipe and start a fire, so before long a cozy warmth filled their shelter.

Jadbury Wilson, lying on the cot, approved of their efforts.

Jadbury Wilson, lying on the cot, approved of what they were doing.

"We're in out of the storm, anyway," he said. "That's the main thing. And from the sound of that wind, it ain't as yet dyin' down any."

"We're out of the storm, at least," he said. "That's the main thing. And from the sound of that wind, it isn't dying down anytime soon."

Frank Hardy drew aside the tarpaulin and looked out. It was dark now, and with nightfall the blizzard seemed to have increased in volume. The wind beat against the sides of the cabin, the snow swished madly against the roof.

Frank Hardy pulled back the tarp and peered outside. It was dark now, and with the night, the blizzard seemed to have intensified. The wind slammed against the sides of the cabin, and the snow whipped chaotically against the roof.

"We're marooned here for the night," he told his chums.

"We're stuck here for the night," he told his friends.

"It could be worse," remarked Joe. "We're lucky to be under cover."

"It could be worse," Joe said. "We're lucky to be sheltered."

"I'll say we are," declared Chet. "Might as well make the best of it."

"I'll say we are," Chet declared. "We might as well make the most of it."

"How about eating?" demanded Jerry.

"How about grabbing a bite?" demanded Jerry.

"You'll find tea and bread and bacon in the cupboard," said Jadbury Wilson. "I'm feelin' sort of hungry myself."

"You'll find tea, bread, and bacon in the cupboard," said Jadbury Wilson. "I'm feeling kind of hungry myself."

The boys rummaged about in the cupboard, which was undamaged, and found provisions. The water had been spilled, but Frank melted some snow on the stove and after a while had the kettle boiling. The fragrant smell of frying bacon pervaded the cabin and in due time supper was served, all doing full justice to the meal. Afterward, they washed the dishes and set about making themselves comfortable for the night.

The boys searched through the cupboard, which was still intact, and found some food. The water had been spilled, but Frank melted some snow on the stove and eventually got the kettle boiling. The delicious smell of frying bacon filled the cabin, and soon dinner was served, with everyone enjoying the meal. Afterward, they washed the dishes and got ready to make themselves comfortable for the night.

Jadbury Wilson possessed but the one narrow cot, so the boys saw they would be obliged to sleep on the floor of the cabin. However, the old man had plenty of blankets, and it was decided to have each lad stand watch for two hours in order to keep the fire going. In spite of the fact that the bitter wind swept through chinks and crannies in the cabin walls, the place was comfortably warm, the fire radiating a good heat in the confined space.

Jadbury Wilson had only one narrow cot, so the boys realized they would have to sleep on the cabin floor. However, the old man had plenty of blankets, and they decided that each boy would take turns standing watch for two hours to keep the fire going. Despite the cold wind howling through the cracks in the cabin walls, the place was cozy, with the fire giving off a lot of heat in the small space.

Jadbury Wilson was disconsolate.

Jadbury Wilson was heartbroken.

"Troubles never seem to come one at a time," he groaned, lying on the cot. "This is the finishin' touch."

"Problems never seem to come one at a time," he sighed, lying on the cot. "This is the final straw."

"Have you been having bad luck, Mr. Wilson?" asked Frank, sympathetically.

"Are you having a rough time, Mr. Wilson?" Frank asked with sympathy.

"I've had nothin' but bad luck for more'n a year past now. This is the worst blow yet. I'll never be able to put this house back on the cliff again."

"I've had nothing but bad luck for more than a year now. This is the worst setback yet. I'll never be able to put this house back on the cliff again."

"Oh, perhaps it isn't as bad as that," said Joe cheerfully. "You might have been badly hurt. There's that to be thankful for."

"Oh, maybe it's not that bad," Joe said cheerfully. "You could have been seriously hurt. That's something to be grateful for."

"I suppose you're right, lad. I suppose you're right. I ought to be glad I'm still alive. But when you're gettin' old and poor and you ain't able to work like you've been used to and everythin' seems to be goin' against you, it ain't so easy to keep cheerful."

"I guess you’re right, kid. I guess you’re right. I should be thankful I’m still alive. But when you’re getting old and broke and can’t work like you used to and everything feels like it’s against you, it’s not so easy to stay positive."

The old man seemed so down-hearted that the boys did their best to console him, but this final disaster to his humble cottage had proved a hard blow. He lacked the resiliency and optimism of youth.

The old man looked so sad that the boys tried their best to cheer him up, but this latest disaster to his modest cottage had hit him hard. He didn’t have the toughness and hopefulness of youth.

"There was a time when I should have been worth lots of money," he told the boys. "And if I had my rights I ought to be worth lots of money to-day. But here I am, with not many years ahead of me, livin' away out here alone in a little two-by-twice cabin, and now the wind has to come along and blow it into the lake. It don't seem fair, somehow."

"There was a time when I should have been worth a lot of money," he told the boys. "And if things were right, I should be worth a lot of money today. But here I am, with not many years left, living out here alone in a tiny cabin, and now the wind has to come along and blow it into the lake. It just doesn't seem fair, somehow."

"What do you do for a living, Mr. Wilson?" asked Chet Morton.

"What do you do for a living, Mr. Wilson?" Chet Morton asked.

"I've been doin' a bit of trappin' and huntin' lately," the old man replied. "Most of my life I've been a miner. I've traveled all over the country."

"I've been doing a bit of trapping and hunting lately," the old man replied. "Most of my life, I've been a miner. I've traveled all over the country."

The boys were at once interested.

The guys were immediately interested.

"A miner, were you?"

"Were you a miner?"

"Yep. I've been in Montana and Nevada in the early days."

"Yeah. I've been to Montana and Nevada in the early days."

At mention of Montana the Hardy boys glanced at one another. Jadbury Wilson did not seem to notice.

At the mention of Montana, the Hardy boys looked at each other. Jadbury Wilson didn't seem to notice.

"I've been in the Klondike in the rush of ninety-eight and I've been up in Cobalt and the Porcupine, too. Made a little money here and there, but somehow somethin' always happened to keep me out of the big winnin's. If I had my rights I ought to be worth plenty. But it's too late now," he sighed. "It's too late for me to start out on the trails again. I ain't young enough now."

"I've been in the Klondike during the rush of '98, and I've also been in Cobalt and the Porcupine. I made a little money here and there, but somehow something always happened to stop me from hitting it big. If I had my fair share, I should be worth a lot. But it's too late now," he sighed. "It's too late for me to hit the trails again. I'm not young enough anymore."

The boys were sorry for the old man, but after a while he was quiet and soon his heavy breathing indicated that he had fallen asleep.

The boys felt sorry for the old man, but after a bit, he was quiet, and soon his heavy breathing showed that he had fallen asleep.

"I hope Aunt Gertrude and mother aren't worrying too much," said Frank, as he prepared to undertake first watch.

"I hope Aunt Gertrude and Mom aren't worrying too much," Frank said as he got ready to take the first watch.

"It can't be helped," said Joe, wrapping his blanket around him. "We'll be able to get back to-morrow."

"It can't be helped," said Joe, wrapping his blanket around him. "We'll be able to get back tomorrow."

"We might take the old man with us," Chet suggested sleepily. "He is pretty well bruised and battered, and he won't be able to live here until the cabin is fixed up again."

"We could take the old man with us," Chet suggested drowsily. "He’s pretty banged up, and he won’t be able to stay here until the cabin gets repaired."

"That's a good idea." Frank put another stick of wood in the stove. "You have next watch, Chet. May as well get all the sleep you can."

"That’s a great idea." Frank added another log to the stove. "You have the next watch, Chet. Might as well get as much sleep as you can."

In a few minutes there was scarcely a sound in the cottage save the crackling of the fire. The timbers of the building creaked and groaned as the night wind hurled itself against the fragile shelter. Snow slashed against the roof. Frank Hardy shivered. He was glad they had obtained even this refuge from the blizzard.

In a few minutes, there was hardly any sound in the cottage except for the crackling of the fire. The wooden beams of the building creaked and groaned as the night wind slammed against the fragile shelter. Snow whipped against the roof. Frank Hardy shivered. He was grateful they had found even this shelter from the blizzard.


CHAPTER IV

A Tale of the West

A Story of the West

Next morning the storm still raged, and although its fury had somewhat abated the snow was still falling so heavily and the wind was still blowing with such intensity that the boys decided to wait in the shelter of the wrecked cabin in the hope that the blizzard would die down. They were comfortable enough where they were and, after they had eaten breakfast, they even began to enjoy their predicament as an adventure which their school chums would envy.

Next morning, the storm was still going strong, and even though it had eased up a bit, the snow was still falling heavily and the wind was still blowing hard. The boys decided to stay in the shelter of the wrecked cabin, hoping the blizzard would let up. They were comfortable enough there, and after having breakfast, they even started to see their situation as an adventure that their school friends would envy.

"The worst of it is," commented Chet, "that to-day is Sunday and we're not getting out of one day of school. Unless," he added, hopefully, "the storm keeps up for another couple of days."

"The worst part is," Chet said, "that today is Sunday and we're still not getting out of a day of school. Unless," he added, hopefully, "the storm lasts for another couple of days."

"I don't think it'll be that bad," Frank laughed.

"I don't think it'll be that bad," Frank laughed.

Jadbury Wilson was feeling somewhat more cheerful, although it developed that his bruises and injuries sustained when his house was blown off the cliff were more serious than had been at first apparent. No bones were broken, but he was black and blue in many spots and unable to rise from his cot without pain. However, he was philosophic enough to regard the mishap as part of his lot in life and it was easily seen that the company of the boys cheered him up immensely.

Jadbury Wilson was feeling a bit happier, even though it turned out that the bruises and injuries he got when his house was blown off the cliff were worse than initially thought. No bones were broken, but he was covered in bruises and could barely get out of his cot without pain. Still, he was philosophical enough to see the mishap as just part of his life, and it was clear that being around the boys lifted his spirits a lot.

"I've had so much bad luck already," he told them, "that it don't seem like much worse could ever happen to me."

"I've had so much bad luck already," he told them, "that it doesn't seem like anything worse could ever happen to me."

"What kind of bad luck?" asked Joe, scenting a story.

"What kind of bad luck?" Joe asked, sensing a story.

"All kinds of it," the old man replied. "When I was out in the West in the early days it looked at one time as if I'd be a regular millionaire. And then my bad luck set in and it's follered me ever since."

"All kinds of it," the old man said. "When I was out West in the early days, it looked like I was going to be a regular millionaire. Then my bad luck kicked in, and it's followed me ever since."

"Did you find any mines?" asked Frank.

"Did you find any mines?" Frank asked.

"In Nevada, we did. Me and my two partners—brothers they were, by the name of Coulson—prospected about for nigh on a year without findin' anything. Then, one day, just when our grub was runnin' low and it looked as if we'd have to give up, while I was cuttin' some firewood for the mornin' my axe-handle broke and the blade of it went flyin' about a dozen yards away. When I went over to pick it up I found it had gone smash against a rock and chipped some of the surface away."

"In Nevada, we did. My two partners—who were brothers named Coulson—and I spent nearly a year looking for gold without finding anything. Then one day, just when our food supply was running low and it seemed like we’d have to quit, I was chopping some firewood for the morning when the handle of my axe broke and the blade went flying about ten yards away. When I went over to pick it up, I found that it had smashed against a rock and chipped off some of the surface."

"And you found gold?" asked Joe eagerly.

"And you found gold?" Joe asked eagerly.

"That there little accident uncovered a fine vein of gold. So we started to work it and we staked our property and was gettin' along fine when some smooth strangers heard about it and come out to see what we had. Well, with half an eye they could see we'd made a real find. We was so joyful about it that we didn't try to hide it much. And that's where we made our mistake. You can't trust nobody where gold is concerned."

"That little accident revealed a great vein of gold. So we started working it, staked our claim, and were doing well when some smooth outsiders heard about it and came to check what we had. Well, with just a glance, they could see we had made a real discovery. We were so excited about it that we didn’t try to hide it much. And that’s where we messed up. You can’t trust anyone when it comes to gold."

"What happened?"

"What's going on?"

"Those smooth chaps went back to town and got a slick lawyer to work with them and one night they come out and jumped our claims. Of course we laughed at 'em, for we knew we'd been there first, but we soon found out what we was up against. That lawyer made out that we hadn't registered our claims right, and he dragged out the case until all our money was gone and we couldn't afford to fight it any longer. And the judge gave a decision against us and we lost our mine."

"Those smooth guys went back to town and got a slick lawyer to help them, and one night they came out and took over our claims. Of course, we laughed at them because we knew we had been there first, but we soon realized what we were up against. That lawyer argued that we hadn't registered our claims correctly, and he dragged the case out until all our money was gone and we couldn't afford to keep fighting. Then the judge ruled against us, and we lost our mine."

"Gosh, that was crooked!" remarked Jerry audibly.

"Gosh, that was crooked!" Jerry said loudly.

"Of course it was crooked! But what could we do? We had to pack up and get out. That there mine was later worth millions, although the joke was on the crooks after all, for their lawyer horned in on the property and worked it so that he got most of it in the long run."

"Of course it was shady! But what could we do? We had to pack up and leave. That mine ended up being worth millions, although the joke was on the con artists after all, because their lawyer meddled with the property and ended up getting most of it in the end."

"What did you and the Coulsons do then?"

"What did you and the Coulsons do after that?"

"We was pretty well discouraged. We just hung around town for a while, but later on we packed up and got clean out of Nevada. We didn't want to be near anythin' that'd remind us of how near we'd been to bein' rich. So we went to Montana."

"We were pretty discouraged. We just stuck around town for a while, but later we packed up and left Nevada completely. We didn't want to be near anything that would remind us of how close we had come to being rich. So we went to Montana."

"Prospecting?"

"Searching for opportunities?"

"Prospectin'. And there we went through all the disappointments of huntin' for gold all over again. We managed to get a fellow to grubstake us and we went out into the mountains and spent almost a whole autumn searchin' high and low for some good ground, but nary a trace of gold did we find. But just as we was about to give up again, Bill Coulson struck it and we figgered that this time we would be able to hold on to it. We had a good block of claims and off one of them I got a nugget that prospectors told me was one of the biggest ever seen in that part of the country."

"Prospecting. And there we went through all the disappointments of searching for gold all over again. We managed to find someone to fund us, and we headed out into the mountains, spending almost an entire autumn searching high and low for some good land, but we found not a trace of gold. Just when we were about to give up again, Bill Coulson struck it rich, and we figured that this time we would be able to keep it. We had a solid block of claims, and from one of them, I got a nugget that prospectors told me was one of the biggest ever seen in that part of the country."

"Well," continued Wilson, "we took mighty good care that we registered our claims right that time, and we stayed there all winter and in the spring got down to business. We mined the place ourselves, the three of us. There was a syndicate made us an offer but it didn't seem high enough. A fellow named Dawson, who had been prospectin' with us for a while in Nevada, showed up at the camp one day, down and out. He had been havin' hard luck too and he was broke, so we took him in with us, for he was a good fellow and he had stood by us when things wasn't goin' well in Nevada."

"Well," Wilson continued, "we made sure to register our claims correctly that time, and we stuck around all winter, getting down to business in the spring. The three of us mined the place ourselves. A syndicate made us an offer, but it didn't seem high enough. One day, a guy named Dawson, who had been prospecting with us in Nevada for a while, showed up at the camp, down on his luck. He had been struggling too and was broke, so we took him in with us because he was a good guy and had supported us when things weren’t going well in Nevada."

"Our little mine was all right for a while, but after a time it began to peter out. We had four bags of gold by that time, some of it in big nuggets, but we didn't know whether to cash in and use the money to buy new machinery and sink a deep shaft or not. We were in our camp one night talkin' things over and wonderin' just what to do about it when we heard some one prowlin' around among the rocks.

"Our small mine was doing okay for a while, but eventually, it started to run out. By then, we had four bags of gold, some in big nuggets, but we weren’t sure if we should cash in and use the money to buy new equipment and dig a deep shaft or not. One night, we were at our camp discussing our options and wondering what to do when we heard someone creeping around among the rocks."

"I went to the door and opened it, and just then I saw a flash in the dark and then I heard a gun go off. I jumped back into the cabin quick and I could hear the bullet go plunk into the wood at the side of the door. Next minute there was a regular gunfight under way. A gang of toughs from town had heard about our gold and had come up to rob us.

"I went to the door and opened it, and just then I saw a flash in the dark and then I heard a gun go off. I jumped back into the cabin quickly, and I could hear the bullet hit the wood at the side of the door. In the next moment, there was a full-on gunfight happening. A gang of tough guys from town had heard about our gold and came up to rob us."

"Well, sir, they surrounded our camp half the night and it looked as if we was out of luck. There was the four bags of gold, everythin' we had in the world, and there was them bandits outside, ready to shoot us if we showed our noses out the door. And our ammunition was givin' out too. We knew we didn't have much chance.

"Well, sir, they surrounded our camp for half the night, and it seemed like we were out of luck. There were four bags of gold, everything we had in the world, and those bandits outside were ready to shoot us if we stuck our heads out the door. Plus, our ammunition was running low. We knew we didn't have much of a chance."

"Finally, Dawson said the only thing to do was for one of us to try and get outside and hide the gold. There was no use hidin' it in the cabin, for they'd be sure to find it. He volunteered to try and reach the mine and hide it underground somewhere. So we figgered it out and decided that was our only chance. Mebbe the bandits might catch him and get the gold, but if we kept it in the cabin they'd be sure to get it anyway, so we figgered we'd better risk it.

"Finally, Dawson said the only thing we could do was for one of us to try to get outside and hide the gold. There was no point in hiding it in the cabin since they would definitely find it. He volunteered to try to reach the mine and hide it underground somewhere. So we figured it out and decided that was our only chance. Maybe the bandits would catch him and get the gold, but if we kept it in the cabin, they would definitely get it anyway, so we figured it was better to take the risk."

"Dawson had lots of nerve. That's one thing I'll say for him although I'll never forgive him for what he done afterward. He had nerve, and somehow I could never believe he really meant to double-cross us at the time. We waited until the shootin' had died down, and along about three o'clock in the mornin', when everythin' was mighty dark, Dawson let himself out the back window. He got out all right, and nobody saw him, and how he ever got through the ring of bandits around the place I never could tell. He had the four bags of gold with him, and mighty heavy they were too. The last we knew, he was creepin' across the rocks toward the shaft. And that was the last we ever saw or heard of him."

"Dawson had a lot of guts. That's one thing I’ll give him credit for, even though I’ll never forgive him for what he did afterward. He had guts, and at the time, I could never really believe he intended to betray us. We waited until the shooting had stopped, and around three o'clock in the morning, when everything was pitch black, Dawson slipped out the back window. He made it out okay, and nobody saw him, and I could never figure out how he got past the group of bandits surrounding the place. He had the four bags of gold with him, and they were pretty heavy too. The last we knew, he was sneaking across the rocks toward the mine shaft. And that was the last we ever saw or heard from him."

"He ran away?" exclaimed the boys.

"He ran away?" the boys exclaimed.

"He just cleared out. And he was a fellow any of us would have trusted right to the last. But it only goes to show you can't trust nobody when there's forty or fifty thousand dollars' worth of gold in his hands. We never heard of him again."

"He just took off. And he was someone any of us would have trusted until the end. But it just shows you can't trust anyone when there's forty or fifty thousand dollars' worth of gold in his hands. We never heard from him again."

"But what about the bandits?"

"But what about the thieves?"

"After we thought Dawson must have hidden the gold all right, we waited till mornin' and then hung a white handkerchief out the window and gave ourselves up. The bandits came swarmin' in—there was about ten of 'em. One of them was only a young chap, "Black Pepper" they called him, for his real name was Pepperill. He was only a young chap, but a tougher and more cold-blooded fellow I never hope to meet. When they searched the cabin and found that Dawson was gone and the gold with him they was as mad as a nest of hornets. They raved and turned the whole cabin upside down huntin' for that gold, but it didn't do them no good. The gold was gone. So finally they went away, and we set out to hunt for Dawson. But he was gone.

"After we figured Dawson must have hidden the gold for sure, we waited until morning and then hung a white handkerchief out the window and turned ourselves in. The bandits came swarming in—there were about ten of them. One of them was just a kid, they called him "Black Pepper" because his real name was Pepperill. He was young, but I’ve never met anyone tougher or more heartless. When they searched the cabin and found that Dawson was gone along with the gold, they were furious. They raged and turned the whole cabin upside down looking for that gold, but it didn’t do them any good. The gold was gone. So eventually, they left, and we set out to look for Dawson. But he was missing.

"He wasn't in the mine, although we found footprints down on one of the levels that looked like his, but we couldn't find him anywhere. And there was no gold. Well, even then we couldn't imagine he'd cleared out on us and we waited around there for nearly a week tryin' to find him and hopin' he'd show up sometime. But he never showed up. He had just cleared out."

"He wasn't in the mine, even though we found footprints on one of the levels that looked like his, but we couldn't find him anywhere. And there was no gold. At that point, we couldn’t believe he’d just left us, so we stuck around there for almost a week trying to find him and hoping he’d show up eventually. But he never did. He had just left."

"That was a dirty trick!" exclaimed Joe indignantly.

"That was a sneaky move!" Joe exclaimed, feeling upset.

"We didn't mind losin' the gold so much. It was thinkin' we'd trusted him so much. He was the last man on earth I'd have thought would do a thing like that. Bill and Jack Coulson, my pardners, they just wouldn't believe it of him. But after a while we knew we'd never see him, and although we tried to trace him it was no use. We heard from a prospector a few weeks later that he'd seen Dawson in a minin' camp up North, but that was the last we ever heard of him. He'd gone up and called him by name, but Dawson just looked at him kind o' funny and said he must be mistaken and that his name wasn't Dawson at all. So I guess that sort of proved he was crooked."

"We didn't really care about losing the gold so much. It was the fact that we had trusted him so much that hurt. He was the last person I would have thought would pull something like that. Bill and Jack Coulson, my partners, just couldn't believe it either. But after a while, we accepted that we’d never see him again, and even though we tried to track him down, it was pointless. A few weeks later, we heard from a prospector who said he had seen Dawson in a mining camp up North, but that was the last we ever heard of him. He went up and called out to him by name, but Dawson just looked at him oddly and insisted that he must be mistaken and that his name wasn’t Dawson at all. So I guess that pretty much confirmed he was shady."

"And the mine?" asked Frank.

"And the mine?" Frank asked.

"It wasn't no good after that. We worked it a few months longer, but it had petered out and the syndicate wouldn't take a chance on it and we didn't have any money to work it any more. So we abandoned it and went away. We had to split up partnership. I prospected around Montana five or six years more but didn't make any more lucky strikes.

"It wasn’t good after that. We worked it for a few more months, but it had run dry, and the syndicate wasn’t willing to take a chance on it. We didn’t have any money left to keep working it, so we abandoned it and left. We had to end our partnership. I explored around Montana for another five or six years but didn’t hit any lucky strikes."

"The last I heard of Jack Coulson he was supposed to be dead, and as for Bill he sort of gave up prospectin' and left the mining camps for good. I've never seen either of them since. I went up on a couple of gold rushes in other parts, but I was always too late. I guess it was just my bad luck. I've never had any good luck since. So finally I come East and I've been livin' up here for the last few months, just makin' a living as best I could. And now look—" he gestured to the interior of the wrecked cabin. "Bad luck's still follerin' me."

"The last I heard about Jack Coulson, he was said to be dead, and as for Bill, he pretty much gave up prospecting and left the mining camps for good. I haven't seen either of them since. I went on a couple of gold rushes in other areas, but I was always too late. I guess it was just my bad luck. I haven't had any good luck since then. So I finally came East and I've been living up here for the last few months, just making a living as best as I could. And now look—" he gestured to the inside of the wrecked cabin. "Bad luck is still following me."

The boys gazed at the old man in silence. His story of misfortune had made a profound impression upon them. Ill-luck had certainly pursued him relentlessly.

The boys stared at the old man in silence. His story of bad luck had a deep impact on them. Misfortune had definitely followed him without a break.

"The storm's dyin' down," said Jadbury Wilson at last. "You'll be goin' back to the city, I guess."

"The storm is calming down," said Jadbury Wilson at last. "You’ll be heading back to the city, I suppose."

"But how about you?" asked Frank.

"But what about you?" Frank asked.

"I'll just have to stay here and make the best of it. I can build a new cabin, but I'm not goin' to build it on top of the cliff this time. I'll build it back in the wood where the worst that can happen is havin' a tree fall on it."

"I'll just have to stick around and make the most of this. I can put up a new cabin, but I’m not putting it on the cliff again this time. I’ll build it back in the woods where the worst thing that can happen is a tree falling on it."

"But you won't be able to work for a few days yet," Joe pointed out.

"But you won't be able to work for a few days," Joe pointed out.

"That's true," admitted the old man. "I can't even get up off this cot right now."

"That's true," the old man admitted. "I can't even get up off this cot right now."

"You'll have to come to town with us. Have you got a sled here that we could draw you in on?"

"You'll have to come to town with us. Do you have a sled here that we can pull you on?"

"I got a sled all right. But what's the use? There's no place for me to go when I do get into town. I ain't got no money."

"I got a sled, sure. But what's the point? There's nowhere for me to go when I actually get into town. I don't have any money."

"You can stay at our place," declared Frank. "I know mother won't mind. You can stay there until you get on your feet again."

"You can stay at our place," Frank said. "I know my mom won't mind. You can stay there until you get back on your feet."

"I'm sure it's mighty good of you," said Wilson gratefully. "But I don't like to be intrudin' on people."

"I'm really grateful to you," Wilson said. "But I don't want to be a bother to anyone."

The old man's simple independence won the boys' admiration. But Frank and Joe knew it would be impossible to leave him alone in the wrecked cabin in his present condition. It was unthinkable.

The old man's straightforward independence earned the boys' respect. But Frank and Joe understood that it would be impossible to leave him by himself in the damaged cabin in his current state. It was out of the question.

"You'll come with us," Frank said, with determination. "Let's get the sled ready, fellows."

"You'll come with us," Frank said firmly. "Let's get the sled ready, guys."


CHAPTER V

Con Riley Under Fire

Con Riley in Hot Water

The blizzard died down as suddenly as it began, and when the Hardy boys and their chums left the cabin they found that the snow had ceased falling and that the sun was shining brightly.

The blizzard stopped as suddenly as it started, and when the Hardy boys and their friends left the cabin, they found that the snow had stopped falling and the sun was shining brightly.

They found Jadbury Wilson's long sled tied to the outside of one of the cabin walls. It had been unharmed, and it did not take the boys long to place blankets upon it and make the old man comfortable. They had to assist him out of the cabin, so greatly did his injuries pain him. He had two pair of snowshoes, and Chet Morton and Jerry Gilroy donned them, the Hardy boys being content to trudge along in the deep snow of the lake.

They found Jadbury Wilson's long sled tied to the outside of one of the cabin walls. It was unharmed, and the boys quickly put blankets on it to make the old man comfortable. They had to help him out of the cabin because his injuries were so painful. He had two pairs of snowshoes, and Chet Morton and Jerry Gilroy put them on, while the Hardy boys were fine with trudging through the deep snow by the lake.

In a short time they had left the cabin and were making their way toward Willow River, pausing frequently to rest because the deep snow soon wearied them. However, when they reached the river they found that they made better progress because the stream was protected by high wooded banks and the snow had not drifted as deeply as on the lake. But it was mid-afternoon before they reached the road leading into Bayport.

In a little while, they had left the cabin and were heading toward Willow River, stopping often to rest because the deep snow quickly wore them out. However, when they got to the river, they found they could move faster since the stream was shielded by high wooded banks and the snow wasn’t as deep as it was on the lake. But it was mid-afternoon by the time they reached the road leading to Bayport.

From there on their progress was easy, and, dragging the sled with Jadbury Wilson wrapped in his blankets, they at length reached the Hardy home on High Street. Here they were all welcomed by Mrs. Hardy and Aunt Gertrude, who had been frantic with anxiety concerning the boys' whereabouts.

From that point on, their journey was smooth, and while pulling the sled with Jadbury Wilson wrapped in his blankets, they finally arrived at the Hardy home on High Street. There, they were warmly greeted by Mrs. Hardy and Aunt Gertrude, who had been extremely worried about the boys' whereabouts.

"We were going to send out a searching party for you!" exclaimed Mrs. Hardy, as she kissed her sons and sent Chet and Jerry in to telephone to their parents the news of their arrival.

"We were about to send out a search party for you!" exclaimed Mrs. Hardy, as she kissed her sons and sent Chet and Jerry in to call their parents with the news of their arrival.

"I knew they'd get lost. I told them so!" declared Aunt Gertrude vigorously. But if she had a scolding in store for them she soon forgot it in her immediate concern over Jadbury Wilson, whom Chet and Jerry brought into the house.

"I knew they would get lost. I told them!" Aunt Gertrude declared enthusiastically. But if she had a reprimand ready for them, she quickly forgot it in her urgent worry for Jadbury Wilson, whom Chet and Jerry brought into the house.

When the Hardy boys explained the situation and told of their adventures and the reason for their delay, Mrs. Hardy was insistent that Jadbury Wilson should make his home with them until he could be on his feet again.

When the Hardy boys described what had happened and shared their adventures and the reason for their delay, Mrs. Hardy insisted that Jadbury Wilson should stay with them until he could get back on his feet.

"You'll certainly have to stay with us!" she said. "There's plenty of room."

"You definitely have to stay with us!" she said. "There's lots of room."

"I'm sure I'm most thankful to you, ma'am," said the old prospector humbly.

"I'm really grateful to you, ma'am," said the old prospector humbly.

As for Aunt Gertrude, she was already scurrying about the kitchen making hot ginger for the new guest and when it was ready she stood over Jadbury Wilson until he had drunk the last drop.

As for Aunt Gertrude, she was already rushing around the kitchen making hot ginger for the new guest, and when it was ready, she hovered over Jadbury Wilson until he finished every last drop.

Then the boys put him to bed, and as the old man relaxed into the warm blankets he sighed and remarked that it was the first time in five years that he had experienced the comforts of a soft mattress.

Then the boys tucked him into bed, and as the old man settled into the cozy blankets, he sighed and said that it was the first time in five years that he had felt the comfort of a soft mattress.

Jerry and Chet hastened home, wondering a little what would be said to them. But their people were so relieved at seeing them again that they forbore to lecture the lads, and, all in all, they came through the ordeal better than they had expected.

Jerry and Chet hurried home, curious about what they would be told. But their families were so relieved to see them again that they held off on lecturing the boys, and overall, they came out of the situation better than they had anticipated.

"Back to school to-morrow!" grumbled Joe, at supper that night.

"Back to school tomorrow!" Joe grumbled at dinner that night.

"Oh, didn't I tell you?" said Mrs. Hardy.

"Oh, didn't I mention that?" said Mrs. Hardy.

"Tell us what?"

"Tell us what now?"

"There won't be any school to-morrow."

"There won't be any school tomorrow."

"What?" shouted the boys incredulously.

"What?" the boys shouted in disbelief.

"You should say, 'I beg your pardon?'" corrected Aunt Gertrude acidly.

"You should say, 'Excuse me?'" corrected Aunt Gertrude sharply.

Mrs. Hardy smiled.

Mrs. Hardy smiled.

"I thought you'd be surprised," she said. "And I suppose you'll be almost heartbroken. No, there's to be no school to-morrow. Last night's blizzard was one of the worst in the history of Bayport. The wind was so strong that it wrecked the high school roof."

"I thought you'd be surprised," she said. "And I guess you'll be pretty heartbroken. Nope, there won't be any school tomorrow. The blizzard last night was one of the worst in Bayport's history. The wind was so powerful that it damaged the high school roof."

Joe gave a whoop of delight and danced around his chair.

Joe let out a shout of joy and danced around his chair.

"There's nothing to cheer about that I can see," sniffed Aunt Gertrude. "They say the property damage was very bad and it will take about two weeks before the roof is fixed."

"There's nothing to be excited about that I can see," sniffed Aunt Gertrude. "They say the property damage was really bad and it will take about two weeks before the roof is repaired."

The news proved too much for the Hardy boys. Like most youths of their age, the unexpected prospect of a winter holiday filled them with delight. Mrs. Hardy smiled at them indulgently, for she had not forgotten her own schooldays.

The news was overwhelming for the Hardy boys. Like most kids their age, the surprise of a winter break excited them. Mrs. Hardy looked at them with a smile, remembering her own school days.

Aunt Gertrude began laying down the law to the effect that the boys must pursue their studies at home quite as ardently as though the school had been undamaged, and on the following day she actually did insist that they do two hours' studying before they got out in the morning.

Aunt Gertrude started setting some strict rules, saying that the boys needed to focus on their studies at home just as much as if school had never been interrupted. The next day, she even insisted that they study for two hours before they could go outside in the morning.

When the boys finally made their escape and raced to the nearest hillside with their bobsleds they found most of the students of the Bayport high school already there. Tony Prito, Phil Cohen, Biff Hooper, Chet Morton and Jerry Gilroy were on hand, as well as many of the girls.

When the guys finally broke free and raced to the closest hillside with their bobsleds, they discovered that most of the students from Bayport High School were already there. Tony Prito, Phil Cohen, Biff Hooper, Chet Morton, and Jerry Gilroy were present, along with many of the girls.

Callie Shaw, of whom Frank Hardy was an ardent admirer, and Iola Morton, sister of Chet and the only girl who had ever won an approving glance from Joe Hardy, were hilariously bobsledding and looking unusually pretty in gaily colored sweaters and woollen toques, their eyes sparkling and their cheeks flushed with the cold.

Callie Shaw, who Frank Hardy admired greatly, and Iola Morton, Chet's sister and the only girl who had ever caught Joe Hardy's attention, were joyfully bobsledding and looking especially pretty in vibrant sweaters and knitted hats, their eyes sparkling and cheeks rosy from the cold.

For half an hour or more the sliding continued, the boys having the time of their lives, and then Nemesis appeared on the scene in the person of Officer Con Riley.

For half an hour or more, the sliding went on, and the boys were having the time of their lives, until Officer Con Riley showed up to change things.

Now, as old readers know, Riley was the sworn enemy of the youth of Bayport. A stolid, thick-set individual with more dignity and self-importance than brains, he took the responsibilities of his position on the Bayport police force very seriously. He had the view, too common to the type of elderly people who have forgotten that they once were young, that all enjoyment is sinful and that all young people are continually up to mischief.

Now, as old readers know, Riley was the sworn enemy of the youth of Bayport. A solid, heavyset guy with more dignity and self-importance than common sense, he took the responsibilities of his position on the Bayport police force very seriously. He also had the mindset, which is too common among older folks who have forgotten they were young once, that all enjoyment is sinful and that all young people are always up to no good.

So, when Con Riley saw the merry party on the hillside he recollected an ancient and obsolete city ordinance forbidding bobsledding elsewhere than in the parks. This ordinance had originally been passed to prevent youngsters sliding down hills adjacent to the trolley tracks and thereby endangering their lives. The fact that there were no trolley tracks near this particular hill mattered nothing to Officer Riley.

So, when Con Riley saw the cheerful group on the hillside, he remembered an old city law that said bobsledding was only allowed in the parks. This law was originally created to stop kids from sliding down hills next to the trolley tracks, which put their lives at risk. The absence of trolley tracks near this specific hill didn’t matter to Officer Riley.

Majestically he stood at the bottom of the hill and held up his hand. Sled after sled pulled to a stop and Officer Riley, the personification of the majesty of the law, ordered the fun to cease.

Majestically, he stood at the bottom of the hill and raised his hand. Sled after sled came to a stop, and Officer Riley, the embodiment of the law’s authority, commanded the fun to end.

There was nothing to be done. Officer Riley had the authority, and he knew it.

There was nothing that could be done. Officer Riley had the power, and he was aware of it.

"Well," said Chet Morton grimly, "we'll just have to have our fun some other way. Let's have a snowball fight."

"Well," Chet Morton said with a

Officer Riley looked dubious and produced a little notebook which he perused earnestly. He knew Chet Morton and his mischievous proclivities of old. But although he looked through the rules and regulations hopefully he could find nothing to prohibit snowballing. However, he withdrew to the street and paced slowly up and down in the faint hope that perhaps a stray snowball might break a near-by window, in which case he would have a delicious opportunity to interfere once more with the sport.

Officer Riley looked skeptical and pulled out a small notebook that he examined intently. He was already familiar with Chet Morton and his mischievous tendencies. Even though he scanned the rules and regulations with some hope, he couldn’t find anything that banned snowball fights. Still, he stepped out onto the street and walked slowly back and forth, holding onto the faint hope that maybe a wayward snowball would hit a nearby window, giving him a perfect chance to disrupt the fun again.

Chet gathered his cohorts and talked earnestly for a few minutes. Then, with many giggles, his followers set to work building two snow forts directly opposite one another. The forts were merely rude snow embankments, just sufficient to provide protection for the opposing sides. Then the young people began rolling snowballs.

Chet gathered his friends and spoke seriously for a few minutes. Then, amidst lots of giggles, his followers started building two snow forts right across from each other. The forts were just rough snow banks, enough to offer some protection for both sides. Then the kids began rolling snowballs.

So far, so good. Officer Riley was unable to detect anything wrong in this. Still, the fight had not started. There was still the hope of a shattered window pane.

So far, so good. Officer Riley couldn't find anything wrong with this. Still, the fight hadn't started. There was still hope for a shattered window pane.

Majestically, he paced to and fro, keeping a wary eye on the snow forts and the gaily clad figures behind the banks. Then, to his surprise, he saw Chet Morton walking slowly toward him.

Majestically, he walked back and forth, keeping a watchful eye on the snow forts and the brightly dressed figures behind the banks. Then, to his surprise, he saw Chet Morton slowly approaching him.

Officer Riley eyed Chet suspiciously. The fact did not escape him that Chet had one hand behind his back.

Officer Riley looked at Chet with suspicion. He noticed that Chet had one hand behind his back.

"Aha!" he muttered. "A snowball."

"Aha!" he muttered. "A snowball."

He was right.

He was correct.

Hardly had the suspicion crossed his mind than it became a frigid reality.

Hardly had the suspicion entered his mind when it turned into a cold reality.

Chet seemed to aim at one of the forts. But his foot appeared to slip and the snowball smacked Con Riley's helmet with deadly accuracy, knocking it off into the snow.

Chet seemed to target one of the forts. But his foot slipped, and the snowball hit Con Riley's helmet with perfect aim, knocking it off into the snow.

Riley emitted a roar of rage and astonishment. Snow was trickling down his neck. He stooped merely long enough to pick up his helmet and thrust it back on his head, where it rested at a ridiculous and rather precarious angle.

Riley let out a furious and shocked roar. Snow was dripping down his neck. He bent down just long enough to grab his helmet and shoved it back on his head, where it sat at a silly and somewhat unstable angle.

Then he gave chase to the rash youth who had thus tempted his wrath.

Then he chased after the reckless young man who had provoked his anger.

Chet went ploughing through the snow, directly in between the forts. Con Riley plunged recklessly in pursuit. Even yet he did not suspect the trick, did not suspect that Chet was merely luring him on to destruction.

Chet marched through the snow, right between the forts. Con Riley chased after him without thinking. He still didn’t realize the trap, didn’t see that Chet was just leading him straight to danger.

Not until a second snowball whizzed past his head, not until a third smacked wetly against his ear, did he realize that he had plunged neatly into a trap.

Not until a second snowball zipped past his head, not until a third one hit him hard against his ear, did he realize that he had walked straight into a trap.

He floundered about in snow up to his knees, and from either side came a volley of snowballs. They squashed against his helmet, knocking it off again, they thumped against his uniform on every side. No matter which way he turned, flying snowballs met him. And the boys took good care to keep their faces out of sight.

He struggled in snow that was up to his knees, and snowballs flew at him from both sides. They hit his helmet, knocking it off again, and thudded against his uniform from every direction. No matter how he turned, he was met with snowballs coming at him. And the boys made sure to hide their faces.

"Stop it!" he roared.

"Cut it out!" he roared.

But the merciless bombardment continued.

But the relentless bombardment continued.

He made a frantic rush toward one of the forts, but the snow was too deep to permit of rapid progress and the air seemed full of white missiles. One snowball caught him in the eye and stopped his rush momentarily. He wavered. More snowballs caught him in the rear. He turned around and a concerted bombardment opened up from each fort. Officer Riley decided that discretion was the better part of valor and he ignominiously retreated.

He rushed frantically toward one of the forts, but the snow was too deep to move quickly, and the air was filled with white projectiles. One snowball hit him in the eye and momentarily halted his advance. He hesitated. More snowballs struck him from behind. He turned around, and a coordinated attack began from each fort. Officer Riley decided that it was wiser to back off and shamefully retreated.

As for Chet Morton, he was safely ensconced behind a particularly heavy snowbank, laughing until the tears came to his eyes. When next he peeped out he saw that Officer Riley, having retrieved his precious helmet, was making great speed back toward the comparative safety of the sidewalk. With the greatest dignity that he could command under the circumstances, he brushed the snow off his uniform. Then, sadly, he resumed his beat, and headed toward the downtown part of Bayport, where citizens were more law-abiding and where snowballs were unknown.

As for Chet Morton, he was comfortably settled behind a big snowbank, laughing so hard that tears filled his eyes. When he peeked out again, he saw Officer Riley, having recovered his precious helmet, hurrying back toward the relative safety of the sidewalk. With as much dignity as he could muster under the circumstances, he brushed the snow off his uniform. Then, looking a bit defeated, he continued his patrol and headed toward the downtown area of Bayport, where people were more law-abiding and snowball fights didn’t happen.

The Hardy boys and their chums saw their enemy disappear around the block, and then Chet rose to the top of the ramparts and gave a cheer of victory.

The Hardy boys and their friends watched their enemy vanish around the corner, and then Chet climbed to the top of the ramparts and cheered in triumph.

"'We have met the enemy and they are ours!'" he quoted.

"'We have met the enemy, and they are ours!'" he quoted.

A snowball from the opposite fort struck him on the ear and he sat down abruptly.

A snowball from the other fort hit him on the ear and he sat down suddenly.

Then the fight began in earnest. It was not until Chet had personally led his warriors out of their fortress and across the no man's land between to win a glorious victory over the other army and had personally washed the face of the marksman who had ruined his triumphant cheers that peace was restored. Then, the forts having been demolished, the bobsleds were pressed into service again, and the hill rang with shouts and laughter until nightfall. For Officer Con Riley made it his business to attend to duties downtown for the rest of the day.

Then the fight really kicked off. It wasn't until Chet had personally taken his warriors out of their fortress and crossed the no man's land to achieve a glorious victory over the other army, and had personally dealt with the marksman who had spoiled his triumphant cheers, that peace was restored. After the forts were demolished, the bobsleds were put back into action, and the hill echoed with shouts and laughter until nightfall. Officer Con Riley made it a point to handle his duties downtown for the rest of the day.


CHAPTER VI

A Message from Montana

A Message from Montana

When the Hardy boys returned home that night after their afternoon's fun and sat down to an ample hot dinner of steak and onions, with mashed potatoes, thick gravy "and all the trimmings," as Jadbury Wilson expressed it, they found that the old miner had won a firm place in the household. He was able to be up and around again, although he hobbled painfully about, but his tales of the early days in the mining country of the West had won the interest of the women.

When the Hardy boys got home that night after their afternoon of fun and sat down to a hearty dinner of steak and onions, with mashed potatoes, thick gravy, "and all the trimmings," as Jadbury Wilson put it, they discovered that the old miner had become a valued part of the household. He was able to move around again, even though he walked with difficulty, but his stories about the early days in the Western mining country had captivated the women.

Mrs. Hardy was particularly interested when he talked of Montana, because of the fact that her husband was in that particular state at the time.

Mrs. Hardy was especially interested when he talked about Montana, since her husband was in that state at the time.

As for Aunt Gertrude, she was in a constant condition of solicitous excitement seeing that the old man was comfortable. And comfortable he was. It was a treat to see him relax in an easy chair after dinner, puffing contentedly at the pipe that he never allowed out of his sight.

As for Aunt Gertrude, she was always anxiously making sure the old man was comfortable. And he definitely was. It was a delight to watch him unwind in an easy chair after dinner, happily puffing on the pipe that he never let out of his sight.

In the evening Frank and Joe besought him to tell again the story of how he had been so basely cheated of his fortune in the West, and the women listened entranced to the strange tale.

In the evening, Frank and Joe urged him to share again the story of how he'd been so badly cheated out of his fortune in the West, and the women listened, captivated by the strange tale.

"Do you mean to tell me that that wicked man actually ran away with all the gold you had worked for so hard?" exclaimed Aunt Gertrude indignantly.

"Are you seriously telling me that that despicable guy actually took off with all the gold you worked so hard for?" Aunt Gertrude exclaimed angrily.

"Looks that way, ma'am!"

"Seems that way, ma'am!"

"The scoundrel! I just wish I had him here for a minute. I'd tell him a few things!"

"The jerk! I just wish I could see him for a minute. I'd have a lot to say to him!"

"I'd tell him a few things myself," said Wilson mildly. "Still, it was a great many years ago and there's no use thinkin' about it now. The gold's gone and I'm an old man."

"I'd tell him a few things myself," Wilson said calmly. "Still, it was so many years ago and there's no point in thinking about it now. The gold's gone and I'm an old man."

"It's a shame!" said Mrs. Hardy.

"It's such a shame!" said Mrs. Hardy.

"I guess I couldn't have been much use as a prospector, or I'd have been able to hold on to what I got," observed Wilson. "I've come to the conclusion that a man gets pretty much what he deserves in this world. If he ain't smart enough to hold on to what he's got, he deserves to lose it."

"I guess I wouldn't have been much good as a prospector, or I would have been able to keep what I got," Wilson said. "I've come to realize that a person generally gets what they deserve in this world. If they're not smart enough to keep what they have, then they deserve to lose it."

"Didn't you make anything out of your mining days at all?" put in Frank.

"Didn’t you get anything out of your mining days?" Frank asked.

"Oh—a few dollars here and a few dollars there. Enough to keep me in grub and with a place to sleep. Once in a while I'd make some extra money, but it never lasted long somehow. I got a claim out in Montana yet, so far as that goes."

"Oh—a few bucks here and a few bucks there. Enough to keep me fed and with a roof over my head. Every now and then, I’d make some extra cash, but it never seemed to stick around for long. I still have a claim out in Montana, so there’s that."

"Is it worth anything?"

"Is it worth anything?"

Jadbury Wilson shrugged and stroked his beard.

Jadbury Wilson shrugged and stroked his beard.

"Maybe worth much—maybe worth nothing," he said.

"Could be worth a lot—could be worth nothing," he said.

"Can't you find out?"

"Can’t you check?"

"I haven't got enough money to work the property. It's the only claim I've been able to pay my dues on, all these years. But I kept payin' 'em, sort of hoping somethin' would turn up some day. I've always thought it should be a good claim. It's in a good location. But I've never had enough money ahead to do any more work on it."

"I don’t have enough money to work the property. It’s the only claim I’ve been able to pay my fees on all these years. But I kept paying them, kind of hoping something would come up someday. I’ve always thought it should be a good claim. It’s in a great location. But I’ve never had enough money saved up to do any more work on it."

"Can't you get any one to finance you?" asked Joe.

"Can't you find anyone to back you financially?" Joe asked.

"Not me," sighed the old man. "All through Montana I got the reputation of bein' too unlucky. They're afraid to take a chance on me any more. They say, 'Why, that's Jad Wilson's claim. Even if it is good, he's always been so all-fired unlucky that we'll be bound to lose our money!' So they pass it up."

"Not me," sighed the old man. "All through Montana, I've built a reputation for being too unlucky. People are hesitant to take a chance on me anymore. They say, 'That's Jad Wilson's claim. Even if it is good, he's always been so incredibly unlucky that we'll definitely lose our money!' So they skip it."

"Never mind. Perhaps you'll come into your own some day," said Mrs. Hardy comfortingly.

"Don't worry about it. Maybe you'll find your way someday," said Mrs. Hardy reassuringly.

"It'll have to come mighty soon, then," replied the old man, with a wry smile. "I've waited so long now that it seems I'll be dead and gone before my luck starts to turn."

"It'll have to come really soon, then," replied the old man, with a wry smile. "I've waited so long now that it feels like I'll be dead and gone before my luck finally changes."

However, under the influence of the warm fire and the cheerful company his natural optimism manifested itself and he was soon entertaining his new-found friends with stories both humorous and tragic of his adventures in the early days of the rough-and-ready mining camps of the West.

However, with the warm fire and the friendly company around him, his natural optimism shone through, and he quickly began entertaining his new friends with both funny and tragic stories from his adventures in the early days of the rugged mining camps of the West.

"I'd love to go out there!" said Joe wistfully.

"I really want to go out there!" Joe said with a hint of longing.

"It ain't all beer and skittles," said Jadbury Wilson. "There's quite a bit of adventure, but there's a lot of rough livin' and mighty skimpy eatin' at times. I've often seen the day when all my flour and beans would be gone and the grocer wouldn't trust me for another nickel's worth. And, of course, the West has changed a lot nowadays. It's got mighty civilized, they tell me."

"It’s not all fun and games," said Jadbury Wilson. "There’s a fair amount of adventure, but there’s also a lot of tough living and pretty sparse eating at times. I’ve often faced days when all my flour and beans were gone, and the grocer wouldn't trust me for even a nickel's worth. And, of course, the West has changed a lot these days. They say it’s become pretty civilized."

"Our father is out in Montana now," Frank remarked.

"Our dad is out in Montana right now," Frank said.

"You don't say! And whereabouts in Montana is he?"

"You've got to be kidding! And where in Montana is he?"

"He's at a mining camp. It's a queer-sounding place called Lucky Bottom."

"He's at a mining camp. It's an odd-sounding place called Lucky Bottom."

Jad Wilson's eyes widened.

Jad Wilson's eyes grew wide.

"Lucky Bottom!" he exclaimed. "Can you beat that?"

"Lucky Bottom!" he exclaimed. "Can you believe that?"

"Why?"

"Why?"

"Lucky Bottom is right near the place where Bart Dawson run away with all our gold."

"Lucky Bottom is right next to where Bart Dawson ran off with all our gold."

"Isn't that a strange coincidence!" ejaculated Mrs. Hardy.

"Isn't that a weird coincidence!" exclaimed Mrs. Hardy.

"It shore is," agreed Jad Wilson. "Mighty strange. To think that he should be in the very place where we lost our fortune. It's a small world, ain't it?"

"It sure is," agreed Jad Wilson. "Really strange. To think that he’s in the exact place where we lost our fortune. It’s a small world, isn’t it?"

"What kind of place is Lucky Bottom?" asked Frank.

"What kind of place is Lucky Bottom?" Frank asked.

"It ain't very big. In the old days it was a real rough-and-ready minin' camp, with dance-halls and saloons. Then, as the mines got worked out and the miners went on up into the copper fields, the town sort of dwindled away. It's a sort of ghost camp nowadays, I guess. Nobody there but a couple of store-keepers and a few miners who keep pluggin' away still hopin' to find some gold that somebody else has missed."

"It’s not very big. Back in the day, it was a real rough-and-tumble mining camp, with dance halls and saloons. But as the mines ran dry and the miners moved on to the copper fields, the town kind of faded away. It's sort of a ghost town nowadays, I guess. There are only a couple of storekeepers and a few miners still plugging away, hoping to find some gold that someone else missed."

Jadbury Wilson rubbed his eyes and smothered a yawn.

Jadbury Wilson rubbed his eyes and stifled a yawn.

"You'll have to pardon me, ma'am," he said to Mrs. Hardy, "but I've always been used to goin' to bed at dark and it ain't often I sit up so late jawin'. If you don't mind, I think I'll turn in."

"You'll have to forgive me, ma'am," he said to Mrs. Hardy, "but I'm used to going to bed when it gets dark, and it’s not often I stay up this late talking. If you don’t mind, I think I’ll head to bed."

"'Early to bed and early to rise—,'" quoted Aunt Gertrude, with approval.

"'Going to bed early and waking up early—,'" quoted Aunt Gertrude, with approval.

"'Makes a man healthy and wealthy and wise,'" finished Jadbury Wilson, with a wry smile. "Well, I been gettin' up early and goin' to bed early all my life and it's never made me wealthy and I'm mighty sure I ain't very wise. About all it's done is to make me healthy. You couldn't kill me if you belted me over the head with a church."

"'Makes a person healthy, wealthy, and wise,'" Jadbury Wilson concluded with a wry smile. "Well, I’ve been waking up early and going to bed early my whole life, and it hasn’t made me wealthy, and I’m pretty sure I’m not very wise. All it’s done is keep me healthy. You couldn’t kill me even if you hit me over the head with a church."

He bade them good-night and went upstairs to bed. Aunt Gertrude remarked that the Hardy boys would be well-advised to follow the old man's example in the matter of early retirement, but they sat up for almost an hour before the fire, talking over some of the yarns the old miner had recounted.

He said goodnight and went upstairs to bed. Aunt Gertrude noted that the Hardy boys should take a cue from the old man's habit of going to bed early, but they stayed up for nearly an hour by the fire, discussing some of the stories the old miner had shared.

"He sure had some great experiences," said Frank, before they went to sleep that night.

"He really had some amazing experiences," Frank said before they went to sleep that night.

"You bet he did. I wish we could get out there for a while."

"You bet he did. I wish we could go out there for a bit."

"It probably wouldn't be the same now. He said the country has got pretty tame."

"It probably wouldn't be the same now. He said the country has become pretty dull."

"It can't be so tame when they have to call dad out there in their gold-stealing cases. There must be some excitement left."

"It can't be that boring when they have to call dad out there for their gold-stealing cases. There has to be some excitement left."

"Oh, well, there's not much chance of us getting out that far to find out. Go to sleep."

"Oh, well, there's not much chance we'll get out that far to find out. Just go to sleep."

But in the morning a surprise awaited them. When they came down to breakfast they found Mrs. Hardy already at the table, perusing a yellow sheet of paper.

But in the morning, a surprise greeted them. When they came down for breakfast, they found Mrs. Hardy already at the table, looking over a yellow sheet of paper.

"Telegram?" said Frank.

"Is that a Telegram?" said Frank.

Mrs. Hardy nodded.

Mrs. Hardy agreed.

"It's from your father."

"It's from your dad."

"Is he coming back?"

"Is he coming back?"

"Not yet. As a matter of fact, he wants you boys to go out to him at once."

"Not yet. Actually, he wants you guys to head out to him right away."

Frank and Joe looked at one another incredulously. The news seemed too good to be true. Mrs. Hardy handed over the telegram.

Frank and Joe looked at each other in disbelief. The news sounded too good to be real. Mrs. Hardy handed them the telegram.

It read:

It read:

"Please let Frank and Joe come to me at once. Will send special word and instructions to Majestic Hotel, Chicago.

"Please have Frank and Joe come to me right away. I will send special messages and instructions to the Majestic Hotel in Chicago."

"Fenton Hardy."

"Fenton Hardy."

"What on earth can this call mean?" exclaimed Frank, in complete amazement.

"What on earth could this call mean?" Frank exclaimed, completely amazed.

"I can't understand it at all," admitted their mother. She was frankly worried.

"I can't understand it at all," their mother admitted. She was honestly worried.

"I don't care whether I understand it or not," said Joe. "It means he wants us to go out West, and that's enough for me. When can we start?"

"I don't care if I get it or not," said Joe. "It means he wants us to head out West, and that's good enough for me. When can we leave?"

"The telegram says 'at once,'" Mrs. Hardy remarked. "It seems very strange. And so sudden, too. I wonder what on earth he can want you for?"

"The telegram says 'right away,'" Mrs. Hardy noted. "It feels really odd. And so abrupt, too. I’m curious about what in the world he needs you for?"

"Perhaps he needs our help on that case he's working on," Frank suggested.

"Maybe he needs our help with that case he's working on," Frank suggested.

Aunt Gertrude, who had hitherto taken no part in the discussion, sniffed audibly.

Aunt Gertrude, who had not previously joined in the conversation, sniffed loudly.

The Hardy boys were so excited that they could hardly eat their breakfast. All through the meal they jubilantly discussed details of the proposed trip and when Mrs. Hardy, although admittedly worried at the prospect of letting them go so far by themselves, agreed that they might go immediately, as the telegram suggested, they flung themselves into a feverish orgy of packing.

The Hardy boys were so excited that they could barely eat their breakfast. Throughout the meal, they enthusiastically talked about details of the planned trip, and when Mrs. Hardy, although obviously worried about letting them go so far on their own, agreed that they could leave right away, as the telegram suggested, they dove into a frantic packing spree.

Jadbury Wilson was highly interested and gave them a number of excellent suggestions as to what they should take with them on the trip.

Jadbury Wilson was very interested and offered them several great suggestions about what they should bring on the trip.

"Lots of good, heavy underclothes and plenty of woolen socks," he said. "You'll find it plenty colder out there than it is here."

"Make sure you have a lot of warm, heavy clothes and plenty of wool socks," he said. "It'll be way colder out there than it is here."

The boys got their reservations on a train that would leave for Chicago late that afternoon. Their packing occupied more time than they had expected because they did not want to be burdened by too much luggage and had a difficult time eliminating the nonessentials. At last, however, they were ready. Aunt Gertrude, who had kept up a running fire of instructions and admonitions concerning their conduct on the journey, and who freely predicted disaster in the shape of train wrecks and robbers, gave them her final instructions. Mrs. Hardy, who merely kissed them good-bye and told them to write to her as soon as they reached Chicago, called a taxi to take them to the station, and Jadbury Wilson, warning them to be on the lookout for "them city slickers in Chicago" and advising them not to talk to strangers, told them not to worry inasmuch as he would look after their mother and Aunt Gertrude.

The boys made their reservations for a train that would leave for Chicago later that afternoon. Packing took longer than they expected because they didn’t want to carry too much luggage and struggled to get rid of the nonessentials. Finally, though, they were set to go. Aunt Gertrude, who had been non-stop with instructions and warnings about how they should behave during the trip, and who constantly predicted disaster in the form of train wrecks and robbers, gave them her final tips. Mrs. Hardy, who simply kissed them goodbye and told them to write to her as soon as they got to Chicago, called a taxi to take them to the station. Jadbury Wilson, reminding them to watch out for "those city slickers in Chicago" and advising them not to talk to strangers, reassured them that he would take care of their mother and Aunt Gertrude.

The taxi arrived. The luggage was tossed in. The boys scrambled into the back seat. Aunt Gertrude shrieked "Good-bye" a dozen times and sobbed audibly. Their mother waved a handkerchief. Jadbury Wilson brandished his cane. Then, with a roar, the taxi sped down the street and headed toward the station. Already the boys could hear the long-drawn whistle of the train.

The taxi pulled up. The bags were thrown in. The boys rushed into the back seat. Aunt Gertrude shouted "Goodbye" over and over and cried loudly. Their mom waved a handkerchief. Jadbury Wilson waved his cane. Then, with a roar, the taxi took off down the street toward the station. Already, the boys could hear the long whistle of the train.

"Off for Montana!" exclaimed Frank.

"Heading to Montana!" exclaimed Frank.

"I'm afraid of only one thing," remarked his brother.

"I'm only afraid of one thing," his brother said.

"What's that?"

"What's that?"

"I'm afraid I'll wake up and find I've been dreaming."

"I'm worried I'll wake up and realize it was all a dream."


CHAPTER VII

In the Windy City

In Chicago

The Hardy boys had never been on a long train journey before, and the trip, consequently, was replete with interest for them. As the train left Bayport behind and began speeding through the open country with its snow-covered fields, they felt a sense of elation and freedom.

The Hardy boys had never been on a long train trip before, so the journey was really exciting for them. As the train rolled out of Bayport and started speeding through the countryside with its snow-covered fields, they felt a rush of happiness and freedom.

"This is certainly better than school!" declared Joe, settling back in his seat with a sigh of contentment.

"This is definitely better than school!" Joe exclaimed, leaning back in his seat with a sigh of satisfaction.

"Sure is. Chet Morton and the rest of the gang will be just about sick with envy when they hear where we've gone."

"Sure is. Chet Morton and the rest of the gang will be pretty much sick with jealousy when they find out where we've gone."

"I wish we could have them with us. When do we reach Chicago?"

"I wish we could have them with us. When do we get to Chicago?"

"Some time to-morrow. Won't it be dandy to stay on the train all night!"

"Some time tomorrow. Won't it be great to stay on the train all night!"

They watched the scenery that seemed to flash past as though on a moving scroll until gradually twilight fell and the lights in the Pullman were turned on. They went into the dining car, where they were served by a massive negro with an air of elaborate courtesy. The novelty of eating an excellent and perfectly served dinner while speeding swiftly across country appealed to them, and when they had finally risen to their feet and left a tip for the waiter, Joe was of the opinion that he could imagine nothing better than living this way all the time.

They watched the scenery that seemed to zoom by like a moving scroll until twilight set in and the lights in the Pullman car turned on. They made their way to the dining car, where a large Black waiter served them with great courtesy. The excitement of enjoying a delicious, perfectly served dinner while speeding across the country thrilled them, and after they got up and left a tip for the waiter, Joe thought he couldn't imagine anything better than living this way all the time.

"When I grow up, if I have money enough, I'll just live on the trains," he said solemnly.

"When I grow up, if I have enough money, I'll just live on trains," he said seriously.

"You'd soon get tired of it."

"You'd quickly get bored with it."

"Not me!" And not until the novelty of the long journey began to wear off did Joe admit to himself that possibly such an existence might be wearisome in the long run.

"Not me!" And it wasn't until the excitement of the long journey started to fade that Joe admitted to himself that maybe such a life could be tiring in the long run.

They slept the sound slumber of healthy youth and were up early next morning for the first breakfast call. There, at their table with its immaculate linen and gleaming silverware, they did justice to crisp bacon and golden eggs, the meanwhile looking out the wide windows at the murky chimneys and dark masses of factory buildings as the train entered the outskirts of a large city. The train roared across viaducts and they could see trolleys and automobiles speeding to and fro in the city streets in bewildering confusion. For the first time they began to have some appreciation of the real extent of their country.

They slept soundly like healthy young people and woke up early the next morning for breakfast. At their table, dressed in pristine linen and shiny silverware, they enjoyed crispy bacon and golden eggs while looking out the large windows at the smoky chimneys and dark silhouettes of factory buildings as the train approached the outskirts of a big city. The train rumbled over viaducts, and they watched trolleys and cars darting back and forth in the busy streets below. For the first time, they started to understand the true scale of their country.

"I guess Bayport isn't the only city in the States," said Frank, with a smile.

"I guess Bayport isn't the only city in the U.S.," Frank said, smiling.

"It looks pretty small compared to some of these that we've gone through."

"It seems pretty small compared to some of these we've looked at."

But as the morning passed they wearied at last of looking at the scenery, varied as it was, and toward mid-afternoon they began to be impatient for a sight of Chicago. When, at last, the train began to roar through the suburbs of the Windy City, as a friendly porter called it when they had failed to understand his reference to it as "Chi," they felt a mounting excitement. But the train rushed in past seemingly endless rows of houses, then past miles of industrial buildings overhung with a cloud of murky smoke, until they thought the center of the city would never be reached.

But as the morning went on, they eventually got tired of looking at the scenery, no matter how varied it was, and by mid-afternoon, they started to get impatient to see Chicago. When the train finally began to speed through the suburbs of the Windy City, as a friendly porter called it when they didn’t understand his reference to it as "Chi," they felt a surge of excitement. But the train rushed past what seemed like endless rows of houses, then through miles of industrial buildings shrouded in thick, murky smoke, until they thought they would never reach the city center.

The journey came finally to an end. Their porter was on the platform with their grips, they tipped him for his services during the trip and made their way down the crowded pavement, through the gates into the concourse of the enormous station. Here they gazed about in frank wonderment at the bustling hordes of people, all intent on their own affairs, moving to and from the trains. The constant sound of shuffling feet, buzzing voices, clanging bells, all the varied noises of a great railway station, sounded like the roar of the ocean in their ears.

The journey finally came to an end. Their porter was on the platform with their bags; they tipped him for his help during the trip and made their way down the crowded sidewalk, through the gates into the main area of the huge station. Here, they looked around in genuine amazement at the busy crowds of people, all focused on their own tasks, moving to and from the trains. The constant sounds of shuffling feet, buzzing voices, and ringing bells—all the different noises of a big train station—felt like the roar of the ocean in their ears.

They made their way outside and clambered into a waiting taxi, directing the driver to take them to the hotel their father had mentioned in his telegram. In a short time the car drew up at the entrance, after a brief ride through crowded, noisy streets that made the main street of Bayport seem like a country lane on Sunday afternoon by comparison. A bellboy seized their grips and the boys presented themselves at the desk.

They stepped outside and hopped into a waiting taxi, telling the driver to take them to the hotel their dad had mentioned in his telegram. Before long, the car stopped at the entrance after a quick ride through busy, loud streets that made Bayport's main street feel like a quiet country lane on a Sunday afternoon. A bellboy grabbed their bags, and the boys checked in at the front desk.

The clerk glanced at their names after they had signed.

The clerk looked at their names after they had signed.

"Ah, yes!" he said. "Frank and Joe Hardy. Your room has been reserved for you. And there is also a letter, I believe." He reached into a pigeon-hole in a compartment near by and produced a letter which he tossed over to them. He struck a bell smartly. "Front! Show these gentlemen to 845."

"Ah, yes!" he said. "Frank and Joe Hardy. Your room is ready for you. And there's also a letter, I think." He reached into a nearby compartment and pulled out a letter, tossing it to them. He rang a bell sharply. "Front! Take these gentlemen to 845."

Feeling highly important at being referred to as "gentlemen" and at having a bedroom actually reserved for them in a hotel of such grandeur, the Hardy boys followed a military-looking bellboy to the elevators, whence followed a swift ascent to the eighth floor. Then down wide, silent corridors to their room, a substantial, bright and airy room with bath. It was all a revelation to the lads, who had never been in a big hotel before, and when they looked out the big windows down on the thronging life of the city streets below they were excited beyond measure.

Feeling really important about being called "gentlemen" and having a bedroom actually saved for them in such a fancy hotel, the Hardy boys followed a military-style bellboy to the elevators, which then took them quickly up to the eighth floor. Then they walked down wide, quiet halls to their room, a spacious, bright, and airy space with a bathroom. It was all a revelation to the guys, who had never stayed in a big hotel before, and when they looked out the large windows at the bustling life of the city streets below, they were incredibly excited.

"First of all, we'll read dad's letter," said Frank. "These are the instructions he promised, I suppose."

"First, we'll read Dad's letter," said Frank. "These are the instructions he promised, I guess."

He opened the envelope and read:

He opened the envelope and read:

"My Dear Boys:

"My Dear Sons:

"I could have given you all the instructions that were necessary in the telegram I sent to your mother, but I thought it best that you come to Chicago first and have a little rest before resuming your journey. This would also give me a chance to tell you more about the mission I have decided to send you on. The truth of the matter is, I have been hurt, and am now laid up in a miner's cabin and have been unable to continue my investigations in the case I have in hand. For this reason I am calling on you to help me, for I think I can trust to your abilities by now by reason of the assistance you have given me in other cases. I did not want to worry your mother needlessly, which is the reason I did not mention my injury. It is not serious but it will be some time before I am able to be on my feet again, and, in the meanwhile, time is precious.

"I could have given you all the details you needed in the telegram I sent to your mom, but I thought it would be better for you to come to Chicago first and take a little break before continuing your journey. This will also give me a chance to explain more about the mission I want to send you on. The truth is, I've been injured and am currently stuck in a miner's cabin, so I haven't been able to continue my investigation on the case I'm working on. For this reason, I’m reaching out to you for help because I trust your skills by now thanks to the support you've given me in other cases. I didn't want to unnecessarily worry your mom, which is why I didn't mention my injury. It's not serious, but it will take some time before I can get back on my feet, and in the meantime, time is of the essence."

"In my investigations here I have discovered a secret concerning some stolen gold. It is this matter that I wish you to investigate for me. To do so it will be necessary for you to come to Lucky Bottom, Montana, at once. Have a good night's rest at the hotel and then come on here. I am under the care of a miner by the name of Hank Shale, and when you reach Lucky Bottom any one will be able to tell you where to find his place. I shall be expecting you, so do not fail me. I hope you have a pleasant trip. Do not worry about me, as I am in good hands and progressing favorably.

"In my investigations here, I’ve uncovered a secret about some stolen gold. This is the issue I want you to look into for me. To do this, you need to come to Lucky Bottom, Montana, right away. Get a good night's sleep at the hotel and then head over here. I’m being taken care of by a miner named Hank Shale, and when you get to Lucky Bottom, anyone will be able to direct you to his place. I’ll be expecting you, so please don’t let me down. I hope you have a great trip. Don’t worry about me; I’m in good hands and doing well."

"Your dad,
"Fenton Hardy."

"Your dad, Fenton Hardy."

Frank put down the letter, with a low whistle.

Frank set the letter down, whistling softly.

"So that's the reason he called for us!" he said. "Dad's been hurt."

"So that's why he called us!" he said. "Dad's been injured."

"He says it isn't very serious."

"He says it isn't that serious."

"It's serious enough when it means he's not able to be on his feet. Perhaps we ought to start out to him right away."

"It's serious enough when it means he can't be on his feet. Maybe we should head over to him right away."

"Not much use of that," objected Joe. "We wouldn't gain much time and we'd be so tired when we got there that we wouldn't be of much use to him for a day or so. I think we'd better rest here to-night, as he suggests, and go on to-morrow."

"That's not really helpful," Joe said. "We wouldn't save much time, and by the time we got there, we'd be so exhausted that we wouldn't be able to help him for a day or so. I think we should take a break here tonight, like he suggested, and continue tomorrow."

Frank considered his brother's advice sound, and, after enjoying a good dinner, the boys went out and wandered about the busy streets for almost an hour, enjoying the sights of the Windy City. But it was a cold, bitter evening, and they soon sought the warmth and comfort of their hotel again, going to bed early, because they were tired after their long hours on the train.

Frank thought his brother's advice was wise, and after having a nice dinner, the boys went out and strolled through the busy streets for almost an hour, taking in the sights of the Windy City. However, it was a cold, harsh evening, and they quickly returned to the warmth and comfort of their hotel, going to bed early because they were exhausted after their long hours on the train.

They were told by the information clerk that their train would leave at eleven o'clock the following morning. This gave them plenty of time for a good sleep, a bath and a leisurely breakfast. When all their preparations for the continuation of the journey had been made they presented themselves at the desk in the lobby to check out. Frank paid the bill, and the boys were just about to move away from the desk when a neat, elderly man somewhat below medium height, came up to him.

They were told by the information clerk that their train would leave at eleven o'clock the next morning. This gave them plenty of time for a good sleep, a bath, and a relaxed breakfast. When they had finished all their preparations for the continuation of the journey, they approached the desk in the lobby to check out. Frank paid the bill, and the boys were just about to step away from the desk when a neat, older man who was a bit shorter than average came up to him.

"Are you the Hardy boys?" he asked, glancing quizzically at them.

"Are you the Hardy Boys?" he asked, looking at them curiously.

"Yes."

"Yeah."

"I was told to be on the lookout for you," said the elderly man. "My name is Hopkins."

"I was told to keep an eye out for you," said the older man. "My name is Hopkins."

"Who sent you, Mr. Hopkins?" asked Frank politely.

"Who sent you, Mr. Hopkins?" Frank asked politely.

"I am your father's lawyer—that is, in Chicago," said the neat little man. "He sent me a telegram last night asking me to look you up here and do what I could for you. I have arranged for your transportation as far as Lucky Bottom. That's where you are bound, isn't it?"

"I’m your dad’s lawyer—in Chicago," said the tidy little man. "He sent me a telegram last night asking me to find you here and help you out. I’ve arranged your transportation all the way to Lucky Bottom. That's your destination, right?"

"Yes, that's the place."

"Yeah, that's the spot."

"Well, then," said Mr. Hopkins, "if you'll come with me I'll see that your accommodations are ready for you. I made the arrangements with the railway this morning."

"Well, then," Mr. Hopkins said, "if you come with me, I'll make sure your accommodations are set up. I handled the arrangements with the railway this morning."

Reflecting that they were certainly obtaining first-class service on their trip across country, the Hardy boys accompanied Mr. Hopkins across the lobby and out to the street, where a taxi was waiting. The porter put their luggage inside and Mr. Hopkins got in with them, directing the driver to the station.

Reflecting on the fact that they were definitely getting top-notch service on their trip across the country, the Hardy boys walked with Mr. Hopkins through the lobby and out to the street, where a taxi was waiting. The porter loaded their luggage into the car, and Mr. Hopkins got in with them, telling the driver to take them to the station.

"Your father is an old friend of mine," said the lawyer, "and I'm only too glad to be of service to his sons. I handle a great deal of his Chicago business for him."

"Your dad is an old friend of mine," said the lawyer, "and I'm more than happy to help out his sons. I take care of a lot of his Chicago business for him."

Although the Hardy boys had not been aware that their father had a great deal of Chicago business, they were properly appreciative of Mr. Hopkins' kindness, and when they finally reached the station and he guided them through the gates to the train they expressed their thanks for what he had done for them.

Although the Hardy boys didn't realize their dad had a lot of business in Chicago, they were genuinely grateful for Mr. Hopkins' kindness. When they finally got to the station and he led them through the gates to the train, they thanked him for everything he had done for them.

"It's nothing—nothing," he said brusquely.

"It's nothing—nothing," he said sharply.

"We can hardly look at it that way," replied Frank.

"We can barely see it that way," replied Frank.

Mr. Hopkins, absorbed in the details for the boys' comfort, did not answer. Instead he turned and said:

Mr. Hopkins, focused on making sure the boys were comfortable, didn’t respond. Instead, he turned and said:

"Porter—how about Compartment B?"

"Porter—what about Compartment B?"

"All ready, sah! All ready!" the porter assured him, leading them to the compartment. "All ready, sah, jes' as yoh asked."

"All set, sir! All set!" the porter reassured him, guiding them to the compartment. "All set, sir, just as you requested."

"We're traveling in style," murmured Frank, nudging his brother.

"We're traveling in style," whispered Frank, nudging his brother.


CHAPTER VIII

The Second Stranger

The Second Stranger

Mr. Hopkins bustled about the compartment, making everything comfortable for the Hardy boys and chatting affably.

Mr. Hopkins moved around the compartment, making everything comfortable for the Hardy boys and chatting friendly.

"You'll be looked after right until you reach Montana," he said. "You won't have to change trains. There'll be no bother."

"You'll be taken care of all the way to Montana," he said. "You won't have to switch trains. It’ll be hassle-free."

"We're very grateful to you—" began Frank.

"We really appreciate you—" started Frank.

The little lawyer dismissed their thanks with a gesture.

The young lawyer waved off their thanks with a gesture.

"It's no trouble at all," he said. "No trouble at all. Your father would do as much for me any day."

"It's no problem at all," he said. "No problem at all. Your dad would do the same for me any day."

From out on the platform they heard the stentorian cry, "All Aboard!" Mr. Hopkins glanced at his watch.

From the platform, they heard the loud shout, "All Aboard!" Mr. Hopkins checked his watch.

"I'll have to go," he said quickly. Then, without waiting to say good-bye, he dashed out of the compartment, slamming the door behind him in his haste.

"I need to go," he said urgently. Then, without waiting to say goodbye, he rushed out of the compartment, slamming the door behind him in his hurry.

The Hardy boys settled back in the comfortable seats as the train began to move. They looked out the window as they emerged from the great train-shed and then they were occupied gazing at the city streets as the locomotive picked up speed and roared on its way.

The Hardy boys settled into the cozy seats as the train started to move. They looked out the window as they left the large train station and then focused on the city streets as the train sped up and thundered along its route.

In due time the train passed through the outskirts of Chicago, then it rushed on through open stretches of country, past little towns and villages. It was an express that evidently stopped only at the larger cities.

In time, the train passed through the outskirts of Chicago, then sped on through open countryside, passing small towns and villages. It was an express that clearly only stopped at the bigger cities.

"At this rate it won't take us long to reach Montana," Frank remarked.

"At this rate, we won't take long to get to Montana," Frank said.

"We're sure making good time."

"We're making great time."

"What do you say to going out and sitting in the observation car for a while?" Frank suggested. "It's roomier than this compartment."

"What do you think about going out and sitting in the observation car for a bit?" Frank suggested. "It's bigger than this compartment."

"Suits me."

"Works for me."

Frank went to the door. To his surprise he found that it would not open. He tried again, but the door refused to budge.

Frank went to the door. To his surprise, he found that it wouldn't open. He tried again, but the door wouldn't budge.

"That's funny," he remarked. "We're locked in."

"That's funny," he said. "We're trapped."

Both the boys tried the door, but it was of no avail.

Both boys tried the door, but it was no use.

"The catch must have been on when Mr. Hopkins went out," Frank said. Even yet the real truth of the situation had not dawned on them.

"The catch must have been on when Mr. Hopkins went out," Frank said. Even now, the full truth of the situation had not hit them.

They hammered on the door for a while, but no one heard them. At last Frank caught sight of the bell button.

They knocked on the door for a while, but no one heard them. Finally, Frank spotted the doorbell button.

"That's stupid of me," he said, with a smile. "I should have known there'd be a bell to call the porter."

"That was dumb of me," he said, smiling. "I should have realized there'd be a bell to call the porter."

He pressed the button and waited. No one came. There was no sound but the roar of the train as it rushed on its way. He pressed the button again and again.

He pressed the button and waited. No one showed up. The only sound was the roar of the train as it sped by. He pressed the button again and again.

"That porter must be either dead or asleep," he muttered, settling down to a prolonged ringing of the bell.

"That porter has to be either dead or asleep," he grumbled, getting comfortable for a long round of ringing the bell.

After what seemed an interminable length of time they heard a shuffling of feet in the corridor. The sound of the steps ceased, and some one rapped at the door.

After what felt like an endless amount of time, they heard footsteps shuffling in the hallway. The sound stopped, and someone knocked on the door.

"Something foh you, gemmen?"

"Something for you, gentlemen?"

"Yes—let us out of here!"

"Yes—let us out!"

The porter tried the handle of the door.

The porter checked the doorknob.

"By golly," he observed, "you done lock yo'selves in."

"Wow," he said, "you've locked yourselves in."

"We didn't lock ourselves in. Somebody locked us in. Haven't you got a key?"

"We didn't lock ourselves in. Someone locked us in. Don’t you have a key?"

"Jes' a minute."

"Just a minute."

They heard the porter shuffling away. After a while he returned with the sleeping car conductor, a key clicked in the lock, and then the door swung open.

They heard the porter walking away. After a bit, he came back with the sleeping car conductor, a key clicked in the lock, and then the door opened.

"How on earth did that happen?" asked the conductor, mystified. He looked at the porter accusingly. "Did you lock these boys in there?"

"How did that happen?" the conductor asked, confused. He glanced at the porter with suspicion. "Did you lock these boys in there?"

"No, sah! No, sah!" protested the porter. "Ah didn't have nuffin to do with it, sah! Dey come on at Chicago wif an older man and I done showed 'em to de compa'tment and dat's all Ah knows about it."

"No, sir! No, sir!" protested the porter. "I didn't have anything to do with it, sir! They came on at Chicago with an older man and I just showed them to the compartment and that's all I know about it."

"I don't think the porter had anything to do with our being locked in," explained Frank. "It was an accident. Our friend Mr. Hopkins slammed the door on his way out and the catch must have been on without our knowing it. It's perfectly all right."

"I don't think the porter had anything to do with us being locked in," Frank said. "It was just an accident. Our friend Mr. Hopkins slammed the door when he left, and the latch must have caught without us realizing it. It's totally fine."

"I got their tickets all right," said the conductor.

"I got their tickets for sure," said the conductor.

"Yes, sah. Ah collected dem tickets mahself. De old gen'man wif dese boys give 'em to me. Two tickets to Indianapolis, sah."

"Yes, sir. I collected those tickets myself. The old gentleman with these boys gave them to me. Two tickets to Indianapolis, sir."

"To where?" asked Frank, in amazement.

"Where to?" Frank asked, astonished.

"Indianapolis."

"Indy."

"But we're not going to Indianapolis."

"But we're not going to Indianapolis."

"Dat's where yoh tickets reads to."

"That's where your tickets point to."

The Hardy boys looked at one another in consternation.

The Hardy boys exchanged worried glances.

"But we're going to Montana. Didn't Mr. Hopkins give you tickets to Lucky Bottom, Montana?"

"But we're going to Montana. Didn't Mr. Hopkins give you tickets to Lucky Bottom, Montana?"

The conductor produced some tickets from his pocket and glanced through them. "Even if he did," he remarked, "they wouldn't be any use on this train. We're bound south, not west. No," he concluded, "your tickets are here, Compartment B, and they read Indianapolis."

The conductor pulled out some tickets from his pocket and looked them over. "Even if he did," he said, "they wouldn't work on this train. We're heading south, not west. No," he finished, "your tickets are here, Compartment B, and they say Indianapolis."

"We've been tricked!" declared Frank hotly. "Mr. Hopkins said he had been sent to look after us and that this train would take us right through to Montana."

"We've been tricked!" Frank exclaimed angrily. "Mr. Hopkins said he was sent to look after us and that this train would take us all the way to Montana."

"And then he locked the door on you so you wouldn't go around making inquiries until it was too late," added the conductor. "Your friend certainly put one over on you. But I'm afraid we can't do much for you now. We're quite a distance out of Chicago, and this train doesn't stop for another hour yet."

"And then he locked the door so you couldn't go asking questions until it was too late," the conductor added. "Your friend really pulled a fast one on you. But I'm afraid there's not much we can do for you now. We're quite far out of Chicago, and this train won't stop for another hour."

"Another hour!"

"One more hour!"

"That's the best we can do."

"That's the best we can do."

"Well," said Frank, disgusted, "I guess we'll just have to wait and get off at the first stop, and then take the next train back to Chicago. This will hold us up another day on our trip."

"Well," Frank said, feeling frustrated, "I guess we'll just have to wait and get off at the first stop, and then take the next train back to Chicago. This is going to delay us another day on our trip."

"Sorry," said the conductor sympathetically. "Of course it isn't our fault. We couldn't know you were supposed to be going West."

"Sorry," said the conductor with empathy. "Of course, it's not our fault. We had no way of knowing you were meant to be heading West."

"No, of course not. It was Hopkins. He planned the whole thing from the start. Oh, well!" Frank shrugged. "We might as well wait."

"No, definitely not. It was Hopkins. He orchestrated the entire thing from the beginning. Oh, well!" Frank shrugged. "We might as well just wait."

He and Joe went back into the compartment and sat down again. This unexpected development left them silent and discouraged. Too late now, they saw that the astute Hopkins had deliberately sought to prevent them from joining their father in Montana. He had worked the trick very neatly, and it might easily have happened that the boys would not have discovered the deception until they reached Indianapolis had it not been for the chance remark of the porter. For that, at least, they were thankful.

He and Joe went back into the compartment and sat down again. This unexpected turn of events left them quiet and disheartened. It was too late now; they realized that the clever Hopkins had intentionally tried to stop them from joining their dad in Montana. He had pulled it off really smoothly, and the boys might not have discovered the trick until they got to Indianapolis if it hadn’t been for the porter’s offhand comment. For that, at least, they were grateful.

"Dad's enemies mustn't be very anxious to have us reach Montana, if they'll go to these lengths to sidetrack us," said Joe, at last.

"Dad's enemies can't be that worried about us getting to Montana if they're going to these lengths to try and stop us," Joe finally said.

"We'll get there if we have to walk," Frank replied grimly.

"We'll get there even if we have to walk," Frank replied grimly.

They had no further enjoyment of the scenery. Each flitting telegraph pole meant that they were drawing farther away from Chicago and losing so much more time in resuming their journey to the West. At length the train began to slow down and, looking out, they saw that they were approaching a small railway town with an immense water tank.

They didn't enjoy the scenery anymore. Every passing telephone pole meant they were getting further from Chicago and wasting more time getting back on their journey to the West. Finally, the train started to slow down, and looking out, they saw they were getting close to a small train town with a huge water tank.

The porter came to the door of the compartment.

The porter arrived at the door of the compartment.

"Heah's de fust stop," he told them. "You kin git a train back to Chicago fum heah!"

"Heah's the first stop," he told them. "You can catch a train back to Chicago from here!"

He took their luggage and, when the train came to a stop, the boys got out onto the platform.

He grabbed their luggage and, when the train came to a stop, the boys got off onto the platform.

"Now I wonder how long we'll have to wait before we get a train back," remarked Frank.

"Now I wonder how long we'll have to wait before we can catch a train back," Frank said.

His eye caught a bulletin board in front of the little station and he went over to it. At length he found what he sought, a late train bound for Chicago, and he almost groaned as he noted the time.

His eye caught a bulletin board in front of the small station, and he walked over to it. Eventually, he found what he was looking for, a late train to Chicago, and he almost groaned when he saw the time.

"There won't be a train along for five hours," he reported to Joe.

"There won't be a train for five hours," he told Joe.

"Good-night!"

"Good night!"

"That means we've got to cool our heels around here until dark. Five solid hours."

"That means we need to hang out here until it gets dark. Five full hours."

Dolefully, they confronted the bulletin board. A young man in a heavy ulster and tweed cap was also studying it. He glanced toward them.

Dourly, they faced the bulletin board. A young man in a thick coat and tweed cap was also looking at it. He glanced over at them.

"What's the trouble?" he asked.

"What's the issue?" he asked.

"Isn't there any earlier train to Chicago than that?"

"Isn't there an earlier train to Chicago than that?"

The young man shook his head.

The young man shook his head.

"I'm afraid not," he said. "I guess you're out of luck. In a hurry to get there?"

"I'm afraid not," he said. "I guess you're out of luck. In a hurry to get there?"

Frank nodded.

Frank agreed.

"That's too bad. But say—," the young man reflected a moment. "If you motored over to Greendale you'd be able to catch an earlier train. There's another railroad passes through there."

"That’s unfortunate. But hey—," the young man thought for a moment. "If you drove over to Greendale, you could catch an earlier train. There's another railroad that goes through there."

"If we can catch an earlier train, that's the train we want," said Frank decidedly. "How far away is Greendale and how do we get there?"

"If we can catch an earlier train, that's the one we want," Frank said firmly. "How far is Greendale and what's the best way to get there?"

"It's about twenty miles across country. I'm motoring over there myself right now. You're welcome to come along with me if you wish. I'm just waiting until the line is clear so I can put through a telephone call."

"It's about twenty miles across the countryside. I'm driving over there myself right now. You're welcome to join me if you'd like. I'm just waiting until the line is clear so I can make a phone call."

"Do you think we can make the train at Greendale all right?"

"Do you think we can catch the train at Greendale okay?"

"Oh, yes. I'm sure of it. There's a train leaves for Chicago in about an hour and we'll be there in plenty of time. There's my car beside the platform. Put your grips in it and I'll be along in a few minutes."

"Oh, yes. I'm sure of it. There's a train to Chicago leaving in about an hour and we'll get there with plenty of time to spare. My car is right next to the platform. Put your bags in it and I'll be there in a few minutes."

The young man went into the waiting room and the Hardy boys saw him go into a telephone booth to put through his call. Frank and Joe, congratulating themselves on this lucky turn of events that had saved them from a dreary five-hour wait, went over to the touring car the young man had indicated and put their grips in the back seat. In about five minutes their new-found friend emerged from the waiting room.

The young man entered the waiting room, and the Hardy boys saw him step into a phone booth to make his call. Frank and Joe, pleased with this fortunate turn of events that had spared them from a boring five-hour wait, walked over to the car the young man had pointed out and placed their bags in the back seat. About five minutes later, their new friend came out of the waiting room.

"All set?" he asked. "I made inquiries about your train and you'll be able to make it all right. Hop in."

"Ready to go?" he asked. "I checked on your train, and you'll be fine. Get in."

He insisted that they sit in the front seat with him, as there was plenty of room. "I like company when I'm driving," he said cheerfully, and this removed the last vestige of reluctance in the Hardy boys' minds, as they had been slightly afraid that they might be proving themselves bothersome to the stranger.

He insisted they sit in the front seat with him since there was plenty of room. "I like having company when I drive," he said cheerfully, which eased the last bit of hesitation in the Hardy boys' minds, as they had been a little worried about being a bother to the stranger.

He was a skilful driver and the roads were good. The big touring car sped along the highway and they left the village behind, racing out into the open country. The young man at the wheel said little, beyond an occasional remark about the weather or the condition of the roads.

He was a skilled driver, and the roads were nice. The large touring car zoomed down the highway as they left the village behind, speeding out into the countryside. The young man at the wheel didn’t say much, only occasional comments about the weather or the state of the roads.

Not until they were at least ten miles from the town did the boys have a suspicion that anything might be wrong. That was when the young man turned the car suddenly off the main highway down a lonely road. The car lurched heavily to and fro in the deep ruts.

Not until they were at least ten miles from the town did the boys suspect that something might be off. That was when the young man suddenly turned the car off the main highway onto a deserted road. The car bounced heavily back and forth in the deep ruts.

"I thought you said the other town was on the main highway," said Frank.

"I thought you said the other town was on the main highway," Frank said.

"I know the way," retorted the man at the wheel gruffly.

"I know the way," the man at the wheel replied gruffly.

Something in his tone made the Hardy boys suspicious. Frank glanced at his brother and he could tell by his expression that Joe did not like the situation either.

Something in his tone made the Hardy boys suspicious. Frank glanced at his brother, and he could tell by Joe's expression that he didn't like the situation either.

Some distance ahead they saw an object parked directly across the road. It was an automobile, and it effectually blocked their passage.

Some distance ahead, they saw a vehicle parked directly across the road. It was a car, and it completely blocked their way.

"Somebody wrecked, I guess," said their driver carelessly. He began to slow down. Frank, who was on the outside of the seat, groped under the flap in the door until his fingers encountered a heavy wrench. He was not going to be caught altogether unprepared.

"Someone crashed, I guess," said their driver nonchalantly. He started to slow down. Frank, who was sitting on the outside of the seat, fumbled under the flap in the door until he found a heavy wrench. He wasn't going to be caught completely unprepared.

The car came to a stop. From around the front of the other automobile came three unsavory individuals, unshaven, with peaked caps pulled low over their foreheads.

The car came to a stop. From around the front of the other vehicle emerged three shady characters, unshaven, with their caps pulled down low over their foreheads.

"Now," said the young man beside them, suddenly whipping out a pistol, "you'll just come along with us."

"Now," said the young man next to them, suddenly pulling out a gun, "you're going to come with us."

He leveled the weapon directly at the Hardy boys.

He aimed the weapon straight at the Hardy boys.


CHAPTER IX

The Escape

The Escape

Frank Hardy wasted not a second.

Frank Hardy didn’t waste a moment.

Before the man with the automatic pistol could realize what he was doing, he had flung up his hands sharply, at the same time releasing his grip on the wrench. It spun straight and true, knocking the automatic out of the fellow's grasp and it clattered to the floor of the car.

Before the man with the automatic pistol could process what he was doing, he had thrown up his hands quickly, while letting go of the wrench. It flew straight and true, knocking the gun out of the guy's grasp, and it clattered to the floor of the car.

When Joe saw that their antagonist was unarmed he rose halfway up in the seat and launched himself upon the driver. Frank, in the meantime, reached for the pistol. He was unable to find it, but his fingers closed over the wrench again.

When Joe saw that their antagonist was unarmed, he sat up halfway in the seat and lunged at the driver. In the meantime, Frank reached for the pistol. He couldn't find it, but his fingers closed around the wrench again.

There was a yell of surprise and rage from the three men in the road and they rushed toward the car. One of them came plunging along the side and attempted to grapple with Frank, but a sideways swing of the wrench caught him on the right of the head and he staggered back with a yelp of pain.

There was a shout of shock and anger from the three guys in the road, and they charged at the car. One of them ran along the side and tried to grab Frank, but a quick swing of the wrench hit him on the right side of the head, and he stumbled back with a yelp of pain.

Joe was still struggling with the driver of the car. The latter was at a disadvantage in that he had been caught unawares. The loss of his automatic had flustered him and Joe's sudden onslaught had taken him completely by surprise. Penned in by the wheel, he was unable to use his superior weight to advantage, and Joe seemed all over him, pounding him unmercifully.

Joe was still fighting with the driver of the car. The guy was at a disadvantage because he had been caught off guard. Losing his automatic had thrown him off, and Joe's sudden attack completely surprised him. Trapped by the steering wheel, he couldn’t use his greater weight to his advantage, and Joe was all over him, hitting him relentlessly.

One of the other toughs leaned over the side and seized Joe by the back of the coat. The man who had been hit with the wrench was dancing about in pain and keeping at a respectful distance. The other fellow was attempting to close in on Frank. He sprang forward, just dodged a sweeping blow of the wrench, and then wrestled with the boy.

One of the other toughs leaned over the side and grabbed Joe by the back of his coat. The guy who had been hit with the wrench was hopping around in pain, keeping a safe distance. The other guy was trying to get closer to Frank. He lunged forward, narrowly avoided a swing of the wrench, and then started to grapple with the boy.

They swayed to and fro. The tough was of husky build and his gorilla-like arms were possessed of great strength. The door of the car flew open and the pair staggered from the running board into the roadway. They rolled about, fighting and struggling, while the man who had been hit with the wrench took occasion to deliver a vicious kick at Frank. A sudden twist, however, brought the other man into range at the moment and he received the kick that was intended for the boy.

They swayed back and forth. The tough guy was stocky and had strong, gorilla-like arms. The car door swung open and the two of them staggered from the running board into the street. They rolled around, fighting and struggling, while the man who had been hit with the wrench seized the opportunity to deliver a brutal kick at Frank. However, a sudden twist brought the other man into the line of fire, and he ended up taking the kick that was meant for the boy.

But the Hardys were outnumbered. Joe was quickly overcome and the other pair would soon have beaten Frank into submission but for a surprising interruption.

But the Hardys were outnumbered. Joe was quickly overwhelmed, and the other two would have soon beaten Frank down if it weren't for a surprising interruption.

Down the roadway came a clattering and roaring, and around the other car came plunging an ancient and decrepit Ford with an enormous negro at the wheel. Beside him sat another colored man, and the pair gazed at the struggle before them, with mouths agape and eyes staring. Then the negro driving the car brought it to a stop and clambered down, picking up the car crank as he went.

Down the road came a loud clattering, and around the other car rushed an old and beat-up Ford with a large Black man behind the wheel. Next to him sat another Black man, and the two of them stared at the scene in front of them, mouths wide open and eyes wide. Then the driver of the car stopped and got out, grabbing the car crank as he did.

"You's the speeders what run oveh mah chickens!" he roared, bearing down on the two toughs who were grappling with Frank. He dealt one of them a hearty rap on the back of the head with the crank, and the fellow bolted forthwith. Reinforcements had arrived, and he judged that the fight would soon be over. He raced for the car parked across the road and scrambled into the front seat.

"You’re the ones who ran over my chickens!" he shouted, charging at the two guys who were wrestling with Frank. He gave one of them a solid hit on the back of the head with the crank, and the guy took off immediately. Backup had shown up, and he figured that the fight would be over soon. He dashed to the car parked across the street and jumped into the front seat.

The two colored men rushed into the battle with enthusiasm. The three toughs in the other car had, it appeared, deliberately driven their automobile into a flock of chickens at the side of the road near the negro's farm farther down the road. Revenge, therefore, was sweet.

The two men of color charged into the fight with excitement. The three tough guys in the other car had apparently driven their vehicle straight into a group of chickens by the side of the road near the Black man's farm further down the road. So, revenge was satisfying.

In a very short time the fight was at an end. The toughs broke and fled, regained their car, and were soon careering down the road. As for the young man who had brought the Hardy boys into this trap, he managed to get his own car started, shook off his attackers, and the automobile plunged forward.

In no time, the fight was over. The tough guys scattered and ran, got back to their car, and quickly sped down the road. As for the young man who had led the Hardy boys into this mess, he managed to start his own car, shook off his attackers, and drove off.

"Let them go," said Frank, picking himself up out of the ditch.

"Let them go," Frank said, pulling himself up out of the ditch.

"Ef dey runs oveh any moah of mah chickens, Ah'll folley 'em fum heah till Doomsday," declared the big negro.

" If they run over any more of my chickens, I'll follow them from here until Judgment Day," declared the big guy.

"You certainly showed up in the nick of time," said Joe, brushing off his coat. "They had us beaten two to one."

"You really showed up just in time," said Joe, brushing off his coat. "They had us beat two to one."

"White trash!" declared the other colored man. "Ah knows 'em. Dey jes' pool room toughs."

"White trash!" said the other Black man. "I know them. They're just pool room tough guys."

"How come dey lays foh yoh 'way out heah?" asked the big man curiously.

"Why are they lying down out here?" asked the big man curiously.

"The chap driving the touring car was going to drive us out to a town called Greendale so we could get a train back to Chicago," Frank explained, and telling the man where they had got into the automobile. "He turned down this road, and then we met the other three waiting for us. They all jumped us at once."

"The guy driving the tour car was taking us out to a town called Greendale so we could catch a train back to Chicago," Frank explained, telling the man where they had gotten into the car. "He turned down this road, and then we ran into the other three waiting for us. They all attacked us at once."

"Dey ain't no trains pass through Greendale!" declared their rescuer. "Ef yoh wait deah foh a train foh Chicago yoh'll wait yeahs and yeahs, and even den yoh won't get no train."

"Dey ain't no trains passing through Greendale!" declared their rescuer. "If you wait there for a train to Chicago, you'll wait years and years, and even then you won't get a train."

"We'll have to go back to that town then," said Joe.

"We'll have to go back to that town then," Joe said.

"Dat's wheah we's gwine. Get in dis yere flivver and we'll drive yoh back to de railway."

"That's where we're going. Get in this car and we'll drive you back to the train station."

Glad to have gotten out of the scrape thus easily, the Hardy boys clambered into the rickety Ford and the two colored men resumed their seats in front.

Glad to have gotten out of the mess so easily, the Hardy boys climbed into the worn-out Ford, and the two African American men took their seats in the front.

"Soon's I see dat cah acrost de road I knowed it was de same cah dat run down mah chickens!" declared the driver. "And w'en I sees dem fightin' wid yoh boys Ah knowed dey wasn't up to no good and Ah knowed whut side Ah was gwine to take. And Ah took it."

"Soon as I saw that car across the road, I knew it was the same car that ran over my chickens!" declared the driver. "And when I saw them fighting with your boys, I knew they weren't up to any good, and I knew what side I was going to take. So I took it."

"Yessah, we sho put de run on dem!" chuckled his companion.

"Yeah, we really got the upper hand on them!" laughed his friend.

"A mighty good thing for us that you showed up when you did," Frank declared. "That gang were trying to kidnap us."

"A really good thing you showed up when you did," Frank said. "That gang was trying to kidnap us."

"How come?"

"Why?"

"They've been trying to keep us from catching a train to the West, and they mighty nearly got away with it that time."

"They've been trying to stop us from catching a train to the West, and they almost succeeded that time."

"Well, dey won't ha'm yoh no moah—not so long as yoh is in dis autymobile," the big negro assured them. And, as the car bounded along onto the main highway, the Hardy boys discussed the trap into which they had been so cleverly led.

"Well, they won't harm you anymore—not as long as you're in this car," the big guy assured them. And, as the car sped onto the main highway, the Hardy boys talked about the trap they had been so cleverly led into.

"It'll teach us to beware of strangers from now on," Frank said. "Evidently one lesson isn't enough."

"It'll teach us to watch out for strangers from now on," Frank said. "Clearly, one lesson isn't enough."

"If a stranger says so much as 'Hello' to me after this I'll yell for the police."

"If a stranger says anything like 'Hello' to me after this, I'll call the cops."

"Perhaps not that bad," and Frank grinned. "But we know now that there is a plot on foot to keep us from reaching the West, and we'll have to be on our guard."

"Maybe not that bad," Frank said with a grin. "But we now know there’s a plan in motion to stop us from getting to the West, so we’ll need to stay alert."

"I'm more anxious than ever to get to the West now. It looks as if we're heading into some real excitement."

"I'm more eager than ever to head to the West now. It seems like we're diving into some real excitement."

"We've had more than we bargained for already."

"We've gotten more than we expected already."

In a short time the automobile came within sight of the town the boys had left but a little while before, and after warmly thanking their two rescuers and slipping a five-dollar bill into the hands of the big driver, who beamed with gratification and delight, the Hardy boys settled down to wait for the night train back to Chicago. They were bothered by no more encounters with strangers, and after an almost interminable wait the train arrived.

In a short time, the car came into view of the town the boys had just left, and after thanking their two rescuers sincerely and slipping a five-dollar bill into the hands of the big driver, who smiled with joy and appreciation, the Hardy boys settled in to wait for the night train back to Chicago. They didn’t have to deal with any more strangers, and after what felt like an endless wait, the train finally arrived.

"One day lost on our journey," remarked Frank, as the train pulled away from the station and headed northward.

"One day wasted on our trip," Frank said, as the train left the station and went north.

"It could have been worse. If those fellows had captured us we'd have likely been held prisoners in some out-of-the-way place for ever so long."

"It could have been worse. If those guys had caught us, we probably would have been stuck as prisoners in some remote place for a really long time."

"That's true, too. Well, we won't take any more chances. When we get to Chicago we'd better change our names and our appearance too, if we can manage it. If these chaps are on the lookout for us they won't stop now that we've escaped from them twice. We can't be too careful."

"That's true. Well, we won't take any more risks. When we get to Chicago, we should probably change our names and our looks, if we can pull it off. If these guys are looking for us, they definitely won't stop now that we've gotten away from them twice. We need to be extra cautious."

Joe agreed that his brother's idea was a good one, and for the rest of the tedious journey back to Chicago they whiled away the time by discussing ways and means whereby they might journey to the West without being identified readily as the Hardy boys by the mysterious enemies who seemed determined to prevent them from joining their father.

Joe agreed that his brother's idea was a good one, and for the rest of the long trip back to Chicago, they passed the time by discussing how they could travel to the West without being easily recognized as the Hardy boys by the mysterious enemies who seemed determined to stop them from joining their father.


CHAPTER X

On Guard

On Alert

Back in Chicago, the Hardy boys went to a hotel. They were careful not to go to the place at which they had stayed on their first arrival.

Back in Chicago, the Hardy boys went to a hotel. They were careful not to go to the place where they had stayed when they first arrived.

"Hopkins has likely been told of our escape by now and he may be on the lookout for us," said Frank. "We'll just stay under cover."

"Hopkins has probably heard about our escape by now and he might be on the lookout for us," said Frank. "We'll just stay out of sight."

"That should be easy enough in a big city like Chicago."

"That should be pretty easy in a big city like Chicago."

"It's not so easy if they know where to look for you, and I don't think they'll give up yet. For some reason, they're evidently mighty anxious to keep us from getting out to Montana."

"It's not that simple if they know where to find you, and I don't think they'll give up just yet. For some reason, they're really eager to stop us from getting to Montana."

In their hotel room that night they discussed the problem of changing their appearance. They had already changed their names, registering as Charles Norton and William Hill of Cleveland, Ohio, in case some prowling member of the gang that had evidently been assigned to see that they did not reach Montana should happen to drop into the hotel and glance over the register.

In their hotel room that night, they talked about how to change their appearance. They had already changed their names, signing in as Charles Norton and William Hill from Cleveland, Ohio, just in case some lurking member of the gang that was clearly tasked with preventing them from getting to Montana happened to stop by the hotel and check the guest list.

"I think," said Frank, "that the very simplest way for us to disguise ourselves would be to wear spectacles. If they chance to be looking for us they'll never think of looking for two boys wearing glasses."

"I think," said Frank, "that the easiest way for us to disguise ourselves would be to wear glasses. If they happen to be searching for us, they would never expect to find two boys wearing glasses."

"Good idea!" approved Joe. "Let's go out and get them now."

"Great idea!" agreed Joe. "Let's go out and get them now."

"Too late now. Shops will all be closed. We'll get them in the morning."

"Too late now. All the shops are closed. We'll get them in the morning."

They left the hotel early and found a shop near by where Frank was fitted with a pair of horn-rimmed glasses that gave him a studious and benevolent expression. Joe bought a pair of cheap spectacles with plain rims. The transformation was remarkable. Instead of a pair of merry, bright-eyed lads, one saw two solemn, near-sighted boys who looked for all the world as though they had never had an unrestrained boyish impulse in all their lives.

They left the hotel early and found a nearby shop where Frank got a pair of horn-rimmed glasses that gave him a studious and kind look. Joe bought a pair of inexpensive glasses with plain rims. The change was striking. Instead of two cheerful, bright-eyed guys, you saw two serious, near-sighted boys who seemed like they had never had a carefree, boyish moment in their lives.

"By all rights we ought to carry some books under our arms, too," Joe suggested.

"Honestly, we should probably be carrying some books under our arms as well," Joe suggested.

So, to make the transformation complete, they stopped at a bookstore and purchased two weighty volumes. And, when it came time for them to catch their train, no one would have recognized in the two, sad-faced, bespectacled, earnest young students, the irrepressible Hardy boys of Bayport.

So, to finish their transformation, they stopped at a bookstore and bought two hefty volumes. And when it was time for them to catch their train, no one would have recognized the two serious, bespectacled, earnest young students as the lively Hardy boys from Bayport.

To allay suspicion, they decided to board the train separately. Frank went first, while Joe remained in the concourse of the station for a few minutes. Then he followed.

To ease any suspicion, they chose to get on the train separately. Frank went first, while Joe stayed in the station concourse for a few minutes. Then he followed.

It was just as well that they did this. Near the gate leading to their train loitered a tall, sharp-featured youth who scrutinized every one who passed. He gave Frank but a fleeting glance as he went by and when Joe passed him later his gaze merely rested casually on the boy for a moment.

It was just as well that they did this. Near the gate leading to their train hung a tall, sharp-featured young man who watched everyone who went by. He only gave Frank a quick glance as he walked past, and when Joe passed him later, his gaze just casually lingered on the boy for a moment.

Had the Hardy boys but known it, the sharp-featured youth had been deputed by the mysterious Hopkins to report if the Hardy boys should attempt to leave Chicago. However, his instructions had been to keep on the lookout for two boys, aged sixteen and fifteen respectively, one dark, the other fair, who would board the train together. So the bespectacled students who had boarded the train separately did not arouse his suspicion and after the train pulled out he reported to Hopkins that the Hardy boys were certainly not on it.

Had the Hardy Boys known, the sharply featured young man had been sent by the mysterious Hopkins to report if the Hardy Boys tried to leave Chicago. However, he had been instructed to watch for two boys, aged sixteen and fifteen, one dark-haired and the other light, who would board the train together. So the bespectacled students who had boarded the train separately didn't raise his suspicions, and after the train left, he informed Hopkins that the Hardy Boys were definitely not on it.

Having left Chicago behind them at last and being assured that they were this time on the right train, Frank and Joe settled down to await with some little impatience their arrival in Lucky Bottom. The novelty of the cross-continent journey had worn off and the scenery had lost some of its earlier fascination. The unforeseen delay they had experienced left them all the more eager to join their father, and they wondered if he would worry because of their failure to arrive in Lucky Bottom at the expected time.

Having finally left Chicago behind and feeling confident they were on the right train this time, Frank and Joe settled in, a bit impatient, to wait for their arrival in Lucky Bottom. The excitement of the cross-country journey had faded, and the scenery had lost some of its earlier charm. The unexpected delay they'd faced made them even more eager to reunite with their father, and they wondered if he would be worried about their late arrival in Lucky Bottom.

Gradually the scenery changed. The countryside altered in contour. The landscape became rockier and more mountainous, and on the second day they found themselves entering Montana. A suppressed excitement seized them as they realized that before long they would be at the end of their journey.

Gradually, the scenery changed. The countryside shifted in shape. The landscape became rockier and more mountainous, and on the second day they found themselves entering Montana. A quiet excitement took hold of them as they realized that soon they would reach the end of their journey.

"I wonder how dad came to be hurt," Joe said, after reading over their father's letter again.

"I wonder how Dad got hurt," Joe said, after reading their father's letter again.

"I've been thinking about that, myself," said his brother. "From what we've gone through, I'd judge that he has enemies working against him in this case he is working on."

"I've been thinking about that too," his brother said. "Based on what we've been through, I’d say he has enemies trying to sabotage him in this case he’s working on."

"Do you think they may have shot him?"

"Do you think they might have shot him?"

"They might have disabled him in some way. He was able to write to us, anyway. There's that much to be thankful for."

"They might have disabled him somehow. He was still able to write to us, though. At least we have that to be grateful for."

The Hardy boys realized that if a gang were arrayed against them, as seemed only too evident from their experience in Chicago, they must be very much on their guard from now on, as they drew closer to their destination. This was forcibly impressed upon them by an incident that happened at a small station in the mountains, where the train stopped to take on water.

The Hardy boys understood that if a gang was lined up against them, as their experience in Chicago clearly showed, they needed to stay very alert from that point on as they approached their destination. This was strongly emphasized by an incident that occurred at a small station in the mountains where the train stopped to take on water.

"I think I'll take a walk up and down the platform," remarked Frank. "Coming?"

"I think I'll take a walk up and down the platform," Frank said. "Are you coming?"

Joe looked up from his book.

Joe looked up from his book.

"No, thanks. I think I'll stay here and read."

"No, thanks. I think I’ll just stay here and read."

Frank left the coach and strode slowly up and down the platform. It was only a small, weatherbeaten station and there were few people in evidence. The town consisted of only one street, and it was built at the base of a huge mountain. The snow came sweeping down from the great crags in shifting sheets.

Frank got off the train and walked slowly back and forth along the platform. It was just a tiny, worn-down station with hardly anyone around. The town had only one street and was situated at the foot of a massive mountain. Snow was swirling down from the towering cliffs in shifting sheets.

A rough-looking man in fur hat and mackinaw lounged down the platform, then swung himself up into the train. He appeared to be looking for some one. When Frank saw him next he was descending from one of the coaches far ahead. He came back to the platform again and there he was joined by another man, a villainous looking fellow with a black beard.

A rugged man wearing a fur hat and a heavy coat sauntered down the platform, then climbed onto the train. He seemed to be searching for someone. When Frank spotted him again, he was getting off one of the coaches further down. He returned to the platform, where he was joined by another man, a shady-looking guy with a black beard.

"Did you see anything of them Hardy boys?" asked the bearded man in a low tone of voice.

"Did you see any of those Hardy boys?" asked the bearded man in a quiet voice.

Frank, who was standing close by, could not help but overhear. He was electrified by astonishment.

Frank, who was standing nearby, couldn't help but overhear. He was shocked with amazement.

The man who had gone through the train shook his head.

The man who had walked through the train shook his head.

"Nary a sign of 'em on that train," he said.

"Nobody saw them on that train," he said.

"I can't figure out what happened," said the bearded man. "They ain't been on any train that's passed through here—we're sure of that."

"I can't figure out what happened," said the bearded man. "They haven't been on any train that's passed through here—we're sure of that."

"This here is the only way they can get to Lucky Bottom. If they did manage to sneak out of Chicago we'd be sure to see 'em goin' through here."

"This is the only way they can get to Lucky Bottom. If they managed to sneak out of Chicago, we'd definitely see them passing through here."

"Mebby they didn't get out of Chicago. The boys there might have picked up their trail again and caught 'em."

"Might be they never left Chicago. The guys there could have picked up their trail again and caught them."

"They would have wired us if they had."

"They would have contacted us if they had."

"That's true, too." The bearded man scratched the back of his head in perplexity. "I can't figger it out at all. Well, it ain't our fault. We've done the best we could."

"That's true, too." The bearded man scratched the back of his head, confused. "I can't figure it out at all. Well, it isn't our fault. We've done the best we could."

"Yeah, they can't blame us."

"Yeah, they can't hold us accountable."

"You're sure you went all through the train?"

"Are you sure you checked the entire train?"

"Right through. There was no two boys on it. There was one lad sittin' in the Pullman readin' a book, but he wasn't like the description of either one of 'em. Wore glasses. Looked like he was a regular little willy-boy."

"Right through. There weren’t two boys on it. There was one kid sitting in the Pullman reading a book, but he didn’t match the description of either of them. He wore glasses. Looked like he was just a regular little nerd."

"Wore glasses, eh? Well, he wasn't one of the Hardy boys, then. They don't wear glasses."

"Wore glasses, huh? Well, he wasn't one of the Hardy boys, then. They don’t wear glasses."

The pair moved off down the platform.

The two of them walked down the platform.

"You'd better go through the night train when it comes in. We'll keep on the lookout for 'em for a few days more until we get word one way or the other. The boss would be sore if they got through on us."

"You should definitely check out the night train when it arrives. We'll keep an eye out for them for a few more days until we hear something one way or another. The boss would be really upset if they got past us."

"Well, they haven't got through yet. That's one thing certain." The two men moved out of earshot.

"Well, they haven't made it through yet. That's one thing we know for sure." The two men stepped out of earshot.

Frank was tingling with excitement. He stepped toward the train, intending to go to Joe and tell him what he had heard. Then he hesitated. The rough-looking man who had searched the train might conceivably think he had been mistaken and might go through the train again. If he saw the two lads together he might be suspicious, spectacles or no spectacles. So Frank sauntered unobtrusively up and down the platform until it was time for the train to leave. Then he swung himself on board, but not until the train was actually pulling out did he rejoin his brother.

Frank was buzzing with excitement. He walked toward the train, planning to go find Joe and tell him what he had heard. Then he hesitated. The tough-looking man who had searched the train might think he was wrong and could search the train again. If he saw the two boys together, he might get suspicious, glasses or no glasses. So, Frank casually strolled back and forth on the platform until it was time for the train to leave. Then he hopped on board, but he didn't reunite with his brother until the train was actually pulling out.

"What kept you?" asked Joe, looking up.

"What took you so long?" asked Joe, looking up.

Frank sat down and, in a low voice, recounted the incident of the platform. Joe listened in almost incredulous surprise.

Frank sat down and, in a low voice, talked about what happened on the platform. Joe listened in almost disbelief.

"So it looks as though we've run the gauntlet at last," concluded Frank.

"So it seems like we've finally made it through the tough times," Frank said.

"Boy! it was certainly a bright thought of yours that we wear spectacles on this trip. He would have spotted me in a minute."

"Wow! It was definitely a clever idea of yours for us to wear glasses on this trip. He would have noticed me right away."

"It was luckier still that we weren't together when he walked all through the train. If he had told that black-bearded man that there were two boys sitting together they might both have gone back for a second look at us."

"It was even luckier that we weren't together when he walked through the train. If he had told that man with the black beard that there were two boys sitting together, they both might have come back to take a second look at us."

"Well, we got out of it all right. I don't think there's anything more to be feared."

"Well, we made it out okay. I don’t think there’s anything left to worry about."

"Not until we reach Lucky Bottom."

"Not until we get to Lucky Bottom."

"I wonder what we'll bump up against there."

"I wonder what we'll encounter there."

"Plenty—by the looks of things so far."

"Plenty—based on what we've seen so far."

The train continued on its laborious way through the mountains. It passed through little mining villages, abandoned camps, climbing on up to higher altitudes until, late in the afternoon, the Hardy boys heard the cry for which they had been waiting so long.

The train chugged along its slow path through the mountains. It went by small mining towns and deserted camps, climbing higher and higher until, late in the afternoon, the Hardy boys finally heard the call they had been waiting for.

"Lucky Bottom! Lucky Bottom!"

"Lucky Bottom! Lucky Bottom!"


CHAPTER XI

Fenton Hardy's Story

Fenton Hardy's Story

Lucky Bottom was a particularly desolate place in the winter time. It was not especially prepossessing at any season, but when the cold winds blew down from the rocky mountainsides and when snow drifted deep in the narrow street Lucky Bottom seemed like a deserted village. It had once been a prosperous mining camp, but one by one the mines had been worked out until now there was but one left. A few prospectors made the village their headquarters still, hanging on in the vain hope of some day making a lucky strike that would restore the town to its former grandeur, but the general impression prevailed that Lucky Bottom's days were numbered.

Lucky Bottom was a particularly bleak place in the winter. It wasn’t attractive at any time of year, but when the cold winds blew down from the rocky mountains and the snow piled high in the narrow streets, Lucky Bottom felt like a ghost town. It had once been a thriving mining camp, but one by one the mines had run dry until now there was only one left. A few prospectors still used the village as their base, clinging to the slim hope of hitting it big and bringing the town back to its former glory, but the general feeling was that Lucky Bottom's days were counted.

There were a few gaunt, hard-bitten individuals on the station platform when the Hardy boys got off the train. They were the only passengers that day and evidently it was unusual for any one to alight at Lucky Bottom, because the loungers stared at them as if they were beings from another world.

There were a few thin, tough-looking people on the station platform when the Hardy boys stepped off the train. They were the only passengers that day, and it clearly wasn't common for anyone to get off at Lucky Bottom because the bystanders stared at them as if they were from another planet.

"Can you tell me where Hank Shale's cabin is?" asked Frank of one of the men leaning against the station.

"Can you tell me where Hank Shale's cabin is?" Frank asked one of the men leaning against the station.

The native shifted his chew of tobacco, spat into the snow, and reflected.

The native moved his chew of tobacco, spat into the snow, and thought.

"Straight down Main Street," he said. "Then you start climbin' the hill. When you get to the top of the hill you'll find Hank's place. You can see it from here."

"Just head straight down Main Street," he said. "Then you'll start going up the hill. When you reach the top, you'll see Hank's place. It's visible from here."

He conducted them to the end of the platform and pointed to the top of a hill back of the collection of shacks comprising the town. The boys could see a small log cabin, almost hidden by trees and almost buried in the snow. The distance was not great, so Frank and Joe, after thanking the man who had directed them, started off toward the cabin.

He led them to the edge of the platform and pointed to the top of a hill behind the group of shacks that made up the town. The boys spotted a small log cabin, nearly hidden by trees and almost buried in the snow. The distance wasn't far, so Frank and Joe, after thanking the man who had shown them the way, set off toward the cabin.

They went through Lucky Bottom, which was nothing more than a collection of shacks and cabins ranged on either side of a wide street, and struck out up the hill until the street came to an end. There they followed a narrow path through the snow until at length they reached Hank Shale's place.

They passed through Lucky Bottom, which was just a group of shacks and cabins lined up on both sides of a broad street, and made their way up the hill until the street ended. There, they took a narrow path through the snow until they finally arrived at Hank Shale's place.

Their approach had evidently been seen, because the door opened as they neared the cabin and an elderly man with heavy, drooping mustache stood awaiting them.

Their approach was clearly noticed, as the door opened when they got close to the cabin, and an old man with a thick, drooping mustache stood there waiting for them.

"You the Hardy lads?" he inquired, in a piping voice.

"You guys the Hardy brothers?" he asked, in a high-pitched voice.

"Yes. This is Mr. Shale's place, isn't it?" returned Frank.

"Yeah. This is Mr. Shale's place, right?" replied Frank.

"Come in. Come in," invited Hank Shale, standing aside to let them enter. "We've been expecting you this last day."

"Come in. Come in," Hank Shale said, moving aside to let them in. "We've been waiting for you all day."

The boys entered a small, two-roomed cabin, a typical bachelor's residence, which, however, was kept scrupulously neat. They had barely time to look around before Hank Shale led the way to the adjoining room.

The boys walked into a small, two-room cabin, a typical bachelor's pad, which was, however, kept really clean. They had hardly any time to take in their surroundings before Hank Shale went to the next room.

"Your father's in here," he said. "Come along."

"Your dad's in here," he said. "Come on."

They followed the man into the bedroom, and there they saw Fenton Hardy lying on a small cot. He sat up in bed as they entered, and held out his hand.

They followed the man into the bedroom, and there they saw Fenton Hardy lying on a small cot. He sat up in bed as they entered and reached out his hand.

"Hello, sons!" he greeted them, with his cheerful smile. "Glad to see you."

"Hey, guys!" he greeted them with a big smile. "Great to see you."

When greetings had been exchanged, Hank Shale took the boys' coats and hats and began setting the table for supper. Soon the cabin was redolent with the fragrant odor of coffee. While Hank was busy in the other room, the boys had a chance to talk with their father.

When they finished greeting each other, Hank Shale took the boys' coats and hats and started setting the table for dinner. Before long, the cabin was filled with the pleasant smell of coffee. While Hank was busy in the other room, the boys had a moment to chat with their father.

"But how did you get hurt, Dad?" asked Frank.

"But how did you get hurt, Dad?" Frank asked.

Fenton Hardy leaned back on his pillow with a sigh.

Fenton Hardy leaned back on his pillow with a sigh.

"I cracked two of my ribs," he told them. "Tumbled down off a big rock back in the mountains, and now I'm laid up until the ribs mend again. I'm thankful it wasn't a great deal worse."

"I broke two of my ribs," he told them. "I fell off a big rock in the mountains, and now I'm stuck here until my ribs heal. I'm just glad it wasn't much worse."

"We thought perhaps some one had shot you."

"We thought maybe someone had shot you."

"No, it wasn't that bad. I was chasing a fellow at the time, and if it hadn't been for falling off the rock I would have caught him. So my good friend Hank Shale insisted that I come to his cabin until my ribs set again. It isn't very serious, but it will keep me indoors for a while. That's why I sent for you."

"No, it wasn't that bad. I was chasing a guy at the time, and if I hadn't fallen off the rock, I would have caught him. So my good friend Hank Shale insisted I stay at his cabin until my ribs heal. It's not very serious, but it will keep me indoors for a bit. That's why I called for you."

"You want us to take up the case where you left off?"

"You want us to continue the case from where you stopped?"

Their father nodded.

Their dad nodded.

"I'll be able to help you considerably, even if I am laid up," he said. "But what delayed you? We expected you here yesterday."

"I can still help you a lot, even if I'm stuck in bed," he said. "But what held you up? We were expecting you here yesterday."

The Hardy boys glanced at one another.

The Hardy boys looked at each other.

"You must have enemies that knew we were coming, Dad," Frank said. "They tried to sidetrack us in Chicago. We were delayed a whole day there."

"You must have enemies who knew we were coming, Dad," Frank said. "They tried to throw us off in Chicago. We were stuck there for an entire day."

"How was that?"

"How'd that go?"

The boys then told their father of their meeting with the man who called himself Hopkins, of being locked in the compartment on the wrong train, of their fight on the road and of their eventual return to Chicago. When they told him of their simple disguise on the trip westward he nodded approval. When they told him of the rough-looking man who had searched the train for them at the mining village he frowned.

The boys then told their father about their encounter with the guy who called himself Hopkins, how they got locked in the compartment on the wrong train, their fight on the road, and their eventual return to Chicago. When they mentioned their simple disguise during the trip west, he nodded in approval. But when they talked about the tough-looking man who had searched the train for them at the mining village, he frowned.

"Just as I expected," he remarked. "Some one must have got their hands on a copy of that telegram I sent you."

"Just like I thought," he said. "Someone must have gotten a hold of that telegram I sent you."

"The operator wouldn't give it out."

"The operator didn't share it."

"No. But they may have tapped the wires. They would know that if I sent a message it would be to bring some one out here to help me. And this gang I have been fighting are capable of anything."

"No. But they might have tapped the lines. They would know that if I sent a message, it would be to bring someone out here to help me. And this group I've been up against is capable of anything."

"Who are they?"

"Who are they?"

"It's a long story, boys. But seeing that you're going to be working on the case, I may as well give you all the information I have. This case concerns a quantity of gold that was stolen from three miners. One of these men, called Bart Dawson—"

"It's a long story, guys. But since you're going to be working on the case, I might as well give you all the information I have. This case involves a stash of gold that was stolen from three miners. One of these men, named Bart Dawson—"

"Bart Dawson!" exclaimed Frank and Joe simultaneously.

"Bart Dawson!" Frank and Joe shouted at the same time.

Their father looked at them in surprise.

Their father looked at them in shock.

"Yes. Do you know him?"

"Yeah. Do you know him?"

"Why, that's the man Jadbury Wilson mentioned!" Frank exclaimed.

"Wow, that's the guy Jadbury Wilson was talking about!" Frank said.

"And who, may I ask, is Jadbury Wilson?"

"And who, if I may ask, is Jadbury Wilson?"

"We'll tell you later, Dad. It may not be the same fellow, but he mentioned a miner named Bart Dawson. Go on with the story, and then we can tell you about Wilson."

"We'll let you know later, Dad. It might not be the same guy, but he brought up a miner named Bart Dawson. Keep going with the story, and then we can fill you in about Wilson."

"Well, this chap Dawson called me out here on the case and told me that the gold was stolen from them by a gang of outlaws who have been terrorizing this district for years. The outlaws are known as Black Pepper's Gang."

"Well, this guy Dawson called me out here about the case and told me that a gang of outlaws, who have been causing trouble in this area for years, stole the gold from them. The outlaws are known as Black Pepper's Gang."

"Black Pepper! And his real name is Jack Pepperill."

"Black Pepper! His real name is Jack Pepperill."

"You seem to know as much about these fellows as I do myself," said the detective, in surprise.

"You seem to know as much about these guys as I do," said the detective, surprised.

"We'll tell you how we happened to hear about him. It's the same man all right. Go ahead."

"We'll share how we found out about him. It's definitely the same guy. Go ahead."

"Black Pepper's gang stole the gold from these miners. I discovered that before I'd been working on the case two days. We laid a trap for two members of the gang and managed to capture them. Then we threatened them with imprisonment if they didn't tell where the gold had gone to. They declared that one member of the gang had deserted and had taken the gold with him. The gold was in four bags, and although the outlaws gave chase and finally caught this man, the bags had disappeared. Try as they might, they could not get the fellow to admit where he had hidden it. He denied the theft utterly, said he had seen nothing of the gold, and that night he escaped.

"Black Pepper's gang stole the gold from these miners. I found this out just two days after I started working on the case. We set a trap for two gang members and managed to catch them. Then we threatened them with jail time if they didn't reveal where the gold had gone. They claimed that one gang member had left and taken the gold with him. The gold was in four bags, and although the outlaws chased this guy down and finally caught him, the bags were nowhere to be found. No matter how hard they tried, they couldn't get him to confess where he had hidden it. He completely denied the theft, claimed he hadn’t seen any gold, and that night he escaped."

"The outlaws were of the opinion that the gold had been hidden somewhere in a deserted mine shaft. That was the story the two rascals told us, and it was while I was checking up on this story that I was attacked by Black Pepper himself. I managed to fight him off and disarmed him, but he got away so I chased him and it was while I was chasing him that I fell off the rock and cracked my ribs."

"The outlaws thought the gold was hidden somewhere in an abandoned mine shaft. That’s what the two troublemakers told us, and while I was looking into their story, I was attacked by Black Pepper himself. I managed to fend him off and disarm him, but he escaped, so I chased him. It was while I was chasing him that I fell off the rock and cracked my ribs."

"And that's how the case stands now?"

"And that's where things are at now?"

"That's how it stands now. I don't know whether to believe the two outlaws we captured or not. They may have been telling the truth. The gold may have really been stolen by the chap who deserted them. They said he later escaped from them and that they thought he had probably gone back to where he had hidden the gold and made away with it."

"That's the situation right now. I’m not sure whether to trust the two outlaws we caught. They could be telling the truth. The gold might have actually been taken by the guy who abandoned them. They claimed he later got away and that they thought he probably went back to the place where he hid the gold and took off with it."

"In that case there wouldn't be much chance of getting it again."

"In that case, there wouldn't be much chance of getting it back."

"It's that circumstance that makes me suspicious of the story. If the deserter had recovered the gold and cleared out, the outlaws would likely give up hunting for it and they would certainly give up bothering me. But they are still in the vicinity and I have an idea they know just where the gold is and are waiting for a chance to get their hands on it. I think this story about the chap deserting from the gang and making away with the loot is false. They just wanted to throw me off the trail and probably thought I'd give up the case and go back East, leaving them a clear field."

"It's that situation that makes me suspicious of the story. If the deserter had actually taken the gold and left, the outlaws would probably stop searching for it and definitely stop harassing me. But they’re still around, and I have a feeling they know exactly where the gold is and are just waiting for a chance to grab it. I believe this story about the guy leaving the gang with the loot is a lie. They just wanted to mislead me and probably thought I’d drop the case and head back East, leaving them a clear shot."

"What is your theory about the gold?"

"What’s your theory about the gold?"

"I think they know where it is, all right. They have it hidden away safely but they don't dare remove it. They'll wait until the affair dies down and then they'll probably separate and leave this district, meeting somewhere else to divide the loot."

"I think they know where it is, for sure. They’ve got it tucked away safely, but they’re too scared to take it out. They'll wait until the whole situation blows over, and then they’ll probably split and leave this area, meeting up somewhere else to divide the spoils."

"Our problem is—"

"Our issue is—"

"To find that gold." Fenton Hardy looked steadily at his sons as he said this. "I have a lot of confidence in you," he went on. "It just requires a lot of hard work and keeping your eyes open. Mainly, it will keep the gang on the jump. They'll know we haven't given up the case and they'll be afraid to do anything. And now," he said, "you might tell me how you happen to have heard the names of Bart Dawson and Black Pepper before."

"To find that gold." Fenton Hardy looked intently at his sons as he said this. "I have a lot of faith in you," he continued. "It just takes a lot of hard work and being aware of your surroundings. Mostly, it will keep the gang on their toes. They'll realize we haven't abandoned the case, and they'll be too scared to act. And now," he said, "maybe you can tell me how you happened to hear the names Bart Dawson and Black Pepper before."

Frank and Joe then told their father of their meeting with Jadbury Wilson, the old miner who said he had once lived in Lucky Bottom. They deemed it best not to mention the fact that Jadbury Wilson suspected Bart Dawson of stealing from him. If Bart Dawson were back in Lucky Bottom they felt safer in reserving this bit of information. They merely told their father that Wilson had mentioned the names of Dawson and Black Pepper, among others, as having lived in Lucky Bottom at the time he had been a miner there.

Frank and Joe then shared with their dad their encounter with Jadbury Wilson, the old miner who claimed he used to live in Lucky Bottom. They thought it was best not to mention that Jadbury suspected Bart Dawson of stealing from him. Since Bart Dawson might be back in Lucky Bottom, they felt it was safer to keep that detail to themselves. They simply told their dad that Wilson had mentioned the names of Dawson and Black Pepper, among others, as people who had lived in Lucky Bottom when he was a miner there.

"What kind of chap is Dawson?" asked Frank.

"What kind of guy is Dawson?" asked Frank.

"One of the finest!" declared their father promptly. "He is a real square-shooter, as the miners would say. The loss of the gold has broken him all up. He told me he had had hard luck all his life and now that he had a fortune within his grasp it was heart-breaking to lose it again."

"One of the best!" their father said right away. "He's a straight shooter, as the miners would put it. Losing the gold has completely crushed him. He told me he's had bad luck his whole life, and now that he finally had a fortune within reach, it’s devastating to lose it all over again."

Frank could not help thinking that life had evidently paid back Bart Dawson in his own coin. He had stolen a fortune from Jadbury Wilson after Wilson had endured hard luck for years. Now he was getting a taste of his own medicine. Still, it seemed strange that Fenton Hardy should be so convinced of Dawson's honesty if he were the type of man who would rob his own partners.

Frank couldn't shake the feeling that life had clearly returned the favor to Bart Dawson. He had taken a fortune from Jadbury Wilson after Wilson had struggled for years. Now, Dawson was experiencing a dose of his own medicine. Still, it was odd that Fenton Hardy was so sure of Dawson's honesty if he was the kind of person who would steal from his own partners.

"Come and get it!" piped Hank Shale, from the next room.

"Come and get it!" called Hank Shale from the next room.

"That's the supper call," laughed Mr. Hardy. "You must be hungry after your journey. Better go and eat. Hank will bring me mine in here."

"That's dinner time," laughed Mr. Hardy. "You must be hungry after your trip. You should go eat. Hank will bring my food in here."

Nothing loath, the two boys went into the combination living room and kitchen, where Hank Shale was already dishing out piping hot beans and stew from an enormous pot. What with huge slabs of bread, thickly buttered, and excellent coffee, the boys sat down to their supper with a will. They ate off tin plates and drank from tin cups, but they agreed that no meal could have tasted better. Even the food of the dining car on the train, exquisitely cooked and served though it had been, seemed somehow to lack the flavor of this meal in Hank Shale's mountain cabin.

Nothing holding them back, the two boys went into the combined living room and kitchen, where Hank Shale was already serving hot beans and stew from a massive pot. With thick slices of buttered bread and great coffee, the boys sat down to dinner eagerly. They ate off tin plates and drank from tin cups, but they all agreed that no meal could have tasted better. Even the food from the dining car on the train, though it was excellently cooked and served, somehow lacked the flavor of this meal in Hank Shale's mountain cabin.

Hank, like most men who have lived a solitary existence, was a silent man. He said nothing throughout the meal, but as he watched the boys eat and as he responded to their request for second helpings, a slow smile crept over his wrinkled face.

Hank, like most men who have lived alone, was a quiet man. He didn't say anything during the meal, but as he watched the boys eat and reacted to their request for seconds, a slow smile appeared on his wrinkled face.

"That's the best meal I ever ate!" declared Frank emphatically, when he had cleared his plate for the second time.

"That's the best meal I've ever had!" Frank said excited

"Me too," agreed Joe.

"Same here," Joe agreed.

"Glad ye like it," said Hank Shale, deeply pleased.

"Glad you like it," said Hank Shale, really happy.


CHAPTER XII

The Cave-In

The Cave-In

Next day, refreshed by their night's sleep, the Hardy boys set out on a systematic search for the hidden gold.

Next day, feeling refreshed from their night's sleep, the Hardy boys began a thorough search for the hidden gold.

"There won't be much real detective work about this case," their father told them. "It will be just a plain case of plugging along and searching high and low for that gold. It is hidden somewhere, or the gang wouldn't be staying around. Hunt in all the abandoned mine diggings, in any place where it might possibly be hidden. You may follow that line or you may try to find where the outlaws are camping and possibly pick up some clues there."

"There won't be much actual detective work in this case," their dad said. "It'll just be a straightforward job of keeping at it and searching everywhere for that gold. It's hidden somewhere, or the gang wouldn't still be around. Check all the abandoned mine diggings and anywhere else it could be stashed. You can either follow that lead or try to find where the outlaws are camping and see if you can pick up any clues there."

With this to go on, Frank and Joe Hardy left the cabin in the morning. They decided to explore some of the abandoned diggings first.

With this information, Frank and Joe Hardy left the cabin in the morning. They chose to check out some of the old mining sites first.

"It's like hunting for a needle in a haystack," said Frank; "but we might have a bit of luck and stumble on the gold."

"It's like looking for a needle in a haystack," Frank said, "but we might get lucky and find the gold."

They did not go down into the town because they knew that their presence in the camp would cause considerable talk and, although they had little doubt but that news of their arrival had reached the outlaws by now, they preferred to remain under cover as much as possible.

They didn't go into the town because they knew their presence in the camp would attract a lot of attention, and even though they were pretty sure the outlaws had already heard about their arrival, they preferred to stay hidden as much as possible.

Hank Shale had suggested searching the workings of an old mine just over the brow of the hill, and toward this place they went. There was a faint trail through the rocks, although it had long since been snowed over, but the boys managed to find the workings without difficulty. They felt the exhilaration of the clear, cold air and the excitement of at last being at work on the mystery of the hidden gold.

Hank Shale had suggested checking out the old mine just over the hill, so that’s where they headed. There was a faint path through the rocks, although it had been covered in snow for a while, but the boys easily found their way to the mine. They felt the thrill of the crisp, cold air and the excitement of finally diving into the mystery of the hidden gold.

The abandoned mine did not look very much like a mine. It was just a large pocket in the earth, with a shaft that sank down into the darkness. The shaft was but a few yards across and a rickety ladder led down into the hard rock.

The abandoned mine didn’t really resemble a mine at all. It was just a big hole in the ground, with a shaft that dropped down into the darkness. The shaft was only a few yards wide and an unstable ladder descended into the solid rock.

"We may as well try this one for a start," suggested Frank. "We can easily tell if any one has been around recently."

"We might as well give this one a shot as a starting point," Frank suggested. "We can easily tell if anyone has been here recently."

They had brought electric flashlights with them, and without further ado Frank began to descend the ladder. Joe followed. Their descent into the abandoned mine was precarious, as at various places the rungs of the ladder were broken, but after descending about forty feet they came to the first and only level. The mine had evidently been a failure.

They had brought electric flashlights with them, and without wasting any time, Frank started to go down the ladder. Joe followed him. Their descent into the abandoned mine was risky since some of the ladder rungs were broken in places, but after going down about forty feet, they reached the first and only level. Clearly, the mine had been a failure.

In the light of the flashlights they saw that they were in a rocky cavern about two hundred feet in length. Not a great deal of work had been done in the mine and it had evidently been abandoned years before. The boys found the cavern extremely cold and damp and they made haste to explore it.

In the glow of their flashlights, they realized they were in a rocky cave about two hundred feet long. Not much work had been done in the mine, and it was clear it had been left abandoned for years. The boys found the cave to be really cold and damp, so they hurried to explore it.

When they had almost completed the circuit of the place, hunting carefully for any sign of recent removal of rock, for any place where the stolen gold might possibly have been hidden, they were of the unanimous opinion that no one had been in the place since it was originally deserted. There was not the vestige of a hiding place. The abandoned working was but one of many in that locality, one lucky strike in the neighborhood having sent other miners into a frenzy of excavation on their respective claims. It had been worked for a short time and then left to its fate.

When they had nearly finished going around the area, carefully looking for any signs of recent rock removal or any spots where the stolen gold might have been hidden, they all agreed that no one had been there since it was first abandoned. There wasn't a trace of a hiding place. The abandoned site was just one of many in the area, with one fortunate discovery nearby causing other miners to rush to dig on their own claims. It had been worked for a brief period and then left behind.

"I don't think there's anything here," said Joe.

"I don't think there's anything here," Joe said.

"I'm sure of it. Oh, well, we couldn't expect to find the gold right off the bat. There are lots of other mines to search yet, and most of them plenty deeper than this."

"I'm sure of it. Well, we couldn't expect to find the gold right away. There are a lot of other mines to explore, and most of them are much deeper than this."

"Think we should go back?"

"Do you think we should go back?"

"Just a minute. There seems to be a passage here."

"Hold on a second. There looks like there's a passage here."

Frank's light had revealed a narrow opening at the extreme end of the cavern. He bent down and examined it more carefully.

Frank's flashlight had uncovered a narrow opening at the far end of the cave. He crouched down and looked at it more closely.

"This seems to lead somewhere," he said. "I think I'll follow it." He crouched down and made his way on hands and knees into the passage. Joe waited until he had disappeared and then called after him.

"This looks like it goes somewhere," he said. "I think I'll check it out." He crouched down and crawled into the passage on his hands and knees. Joe waited until he was gone and then called out after him.

"I'll wait here."

"I'll wait here."

"If it leads anywhere I'll call you."

"If it goes anywhere, I'll call you."

Joe could hear his brother scrambling along through the little corridor in the rocks. After a while the sounds died away. It was dark and lonely in the cavern in which he stood. He waited for Frank's summons to follow.

Joe could hear his brother making his way through the narrow passage in the rocks. After a while, the sounds faded away. It was dark and empty in the cave where he stood. He waited for Frank's call to follow.

After five minutes there was still not a sound from the opening into which his brother had disappeared. Joe began to get anxious. He knelt down and flashed his light into the interior of the passage. There was no sign of Frank.

After five minutes, there was still no sound from the entrance where his brother had gone. Joe started to feel uneasy. He knelt down and shone his flashlight into the passage. There was no sign of Frank.

"I wonder if anything has happened to him," he muttered.

"I wonder if something has happened to him," he muttered.

When another five minutes passed and there was still no sign of his brother, Joe decided to invade the passage himself. Anything might have happened. Frank might have been overcome by poisonous gases in the depth of the mine. He might have tumbled down some unseen pit and hurt himself. Flashing the light ahead of him, Joe crawled into the narrow corridor in the face of the rock.

When another five minutes went by and there was still no sign of his brother, Joe decided to go into the passage himself. Anything could have happened. Frank might have been knocked out by poisonous gases deep in the mine. He could have fallen into some hidden pit and gotten hurt. Shining the light in front of him, Joe crawled into the narrow corridor in front of the rock.

For several yards the passage extended directly ahead; then there was a turning. Examining the corridor, Joe saw that it was not a natural opening in the rock, but had been constructed by human hands, for the marks of pick and shovel were plainly visible. It had been blasted out of the rock, and for a short distance the dimensions of the passage were of good size, but gradually they narrowed.

For several yards, the passage stretched straight ahead; then it curved. Looking at the corridor, Joe noticed it wasn't a natural gap in the rock but had been built by people, as the marks from pick and shovel were clearly visible. It had been blasted out of the rock, and for a short stretch, the passage was fairly spacious, but it gradually got narrower.

He had just gone past the turn in the tunnel when he heard a faint shout.

He had just passed the turn in the tunnel when he heard a faint shout.

"Joe! Joe!"

"Hey, Joe!"

It seemed to come from a long distance, and there was a note of appeal in it that told the boy his brother was in danger.

It felt like it was coming from far away, and there was a sense of urgency in it that made the boy realize his brother was in trouble.

Scrambling on through the tunnel that seemed to open before him in the vivid circle of light, he made his way toward Frank. He heard the cry again, and this time it was louder. He shouted back:

Scrambling through the tunnel that appeared before him in the bright circle of light, he made his way toward Frank. He heard the cry again, and this time it was louder. He shouted back:

"I'm coming. What's the matter?"

"I'm on my way. What's wrong?"

"I'm trapped here. My foot is caught."

"I'm stuck here. My foot is caught."

On through the gloomy tunnel Joe went.

Onward into the dark tunnel Joe went.

At last the light revealed the form of his brother some distance ahead. Frank was lying flat on the rocky floor of the passage, with his foot caught in a crevice between two heavy boulders. He had tried to climb over them, and one rock had evidently become dislodged, pinning his foot against the other.

At last, the light showed the shape of his brother a little ways ahead. Frank was lying flat on the rocky ground of the passage, with his foot stuck in a crack between two heavy boulders. He had tried to climb over them, but one rock had clearly come loose, trapping his foot against the other.

"Are you hurt?" asked Joe anxiously, as he reached Frank's side.

"Are you okay?" Joe asked nervously as he rushed to Frank's side.

"No. I'm all right. But I can't move my foot."

"No. I'm fine. But I can't move my foot."

Joe put down the flashlight so that its glare clearly illuminated the scene. Then he went over to the boulder and exerted all his strength to move it. But the boulder was heavy. Had it struck Frank's foot directly it would have shattered it to a pulp. Fortunately, it had merely slid into position above the other rock, pressing against the boy's ankle and imprisoning his foot in the crevice between.

Joe set the flashlight down so its brightness lit up the scene. Then he walked over to the boulder and used all his strength to try to move it. But the boulder was heavy. If it had hit Frank's foot directly, it would have crushed it. Luckily, it had only rolled into place above the other rock, pressing against the boy's ankle and trapping his foot in the gap between them.

Frank was unable to lend his brother any assistance. He was lying face downward and was unable to rise to a sitting position.

Frank couldn't help his brother at all. He was lying face down and couldn't get up to a sitting position.

"It's—mighty—heavy!" panted Joe, as he strove to move the heavy boulder. It refused to budge.

"It's really heavy!" Joe panted, as he tried to move the heavy boulder. It wouldn't move at all.

"Rest a bit and then try it again."

"Take a short break and then give it another shot."

Joe sat down, breathing heavily.

Joe sat down, panting.

"How did it happen?" he asked.

"How did it happen?" he asked.

"I was crawling along through the tunnel when I saw this pile of boulders ahead. At first I was going to turn back, but I thought that when I had come this far it was foolish to turn around, so I started to climb over the boulders. Just as I was almost over, that big boulder slid down against the other one—and there I was. Lucky I didn't break my leg."

"I was crawling through the tunnel when I saw a pile of boulders ahead. At first, I thought about turning back, but I figured it was silly to go back after coming this far, so I started climbing over the boulders. Just as I was almost over, that big boulder shifted against the other one—and there I was. Thank goodness I didn't break my leg."

"I'm afraid to move that boulder the wrong way, or it might roll over onto you. There's only one way to move it safely and that is to lift it straight up, just enough to release your foot. But I'm afraid I'm not strong enough."

"I'm worried about moving that boulder the wrong way, or it could roll over you. There's only one safe way to move it, and that's to lift it straight up just enough to get your foot free. But I'm afraid I'm not strong enough."

"Try it again, anyway."

"Go ahead and try again."

Again Joe applied himself to the heavy rock. Although he strained and gasped in his efforts to move it, the boulder defied his efforts and he was unable to budge it an inch. He made attempt after attempt, but it soon became evident that the effort was beyond his strength, and at last he was forced to sink back, exhausted, against the wall. He mopped his brow.

Again Joe focused on the heavy rock. Even though he strained and gasped while trying to move it, the boulder resisted his efforts, and he couldn't shift it even a little. He kept trying, but it quickly became clear that the task was too much for him, and finally, he had to lean back against the wall, worn out. He wiped his forehead.

"Too heavy!" he declared, out of breath.

"Too heavy!" he gasped.

Frank was silent.

Frank was quiet.

"If we only had a crowbar of some kind!" he suggested at last. "It wouldn't be hard to move it then."

"If we just had a crowbar or something!" he finally suggested. "It wouldn't be difficult to move it then."

Joe looked up.

Joe glanced up.

"Why, I saw a crowbar back in the mine!" he exclaimed. "It will be the very thing."

"Wow, I spotted a crowbar back in the mine!" he exclaimed. "It'll be perfect."

"Go back and get it. You'll be able to move the boulder away without any trouble. Then we'll clear out of here."

"Go back and grab it. You'll be able to push the boulder aside easily. Then we'll get out of here."

Joe picked up his flashlight and turned to retrace his steps into the main working of the mine.

Joe grabbed his flashlight and turned to go back into the main work area of the mine.

"I'll only be a few minutes," he promised.

"I'll just be a few minutes," he promised.

"Don't worry about me. I won't go away," said Frank, with a laugh. He could be cheerful even in the dangerous position in which he found himself.

"Don't worry about me. I won't disappear," Frank said with a laugh. He could stay upbeat even in the risky situation he was in.

Back down the narrow tunnel crawled Joe, back toward the cavern into which they had first descended. He remembered having seen a long iron bar lying at the foot of the shaft and he realized that it would be an ideal lever for moving away the boulder that imprisoned his brother. He made haste, not wishing to leave his brother too long imprisoned, and in a few minutes he was back in the great cave.

Back down the narrow tunnel crawled Joe, heading back toward the cavern where they had first descended. He remembered seeing a long iron bar lying at the bottom of the shaft and realized it would be a perfect lever to move the boulder that trapped his brother. He hurried, not wanting to leave his brother trapped for too long, and in a few minutes, he was back in the big cave.

At first he could not find the iron bar, and he hunted about, flashing the light here and there into dark corners. At last he found it, near the foot of the shaft. It was quite heavy and one end of it lay beneath a heap of rocks.

At first, he couldn't locate the iron bar, so he searched around, shining the light into dark corners. Finally, he found it near the bottom of the shaft. It was pretty heavy, and one end was buried under a pile of rocks.

Joe tugged at the iron bar.

Joe pulled on the iron bar.

At first it resisted his efforts. He put all his strength into the attempt and the bar slowly moved. A final tug and it came free so suddenly that he staggered backward.

At first, it resisted his efforts. He put all his strength into the attempt and the bar slowly moved. A final tug and it came free so suddenly that he stumbled backward.

It was this circumstance that saved his life.

It was this situation that saved his life.

For, in extricating the bar, he had dislodged the mass of rocks. With a rush and a roar they came tumbling down across the bottom of the shaft. Had Joe been standing beneath he would have been crushed to death.

For, in removing the bar, he had knocked loose a large mass of rocks. With a rush and a roar, they came tumbling down across the bottom of the shaft. If Joe had been standing underneath, he would have been crushed to death.

Then, before the clattering had died away, came a sullen, hollow roar from higher up in the shaft. Timbers snapped and crackled. The old boards, long since rotting away, suddenly gave beneath the pressure of rocks and earth. An avalanche of stones descended into the shaft on top of the first downfall of rock. More followed, showers of earth came rushing down and a cloud of dust pervaded the cavern.

Then, before the noise had faded, a heavy, muffled roar came from higher up in the shaft. Timbers snapped and crackled. The old boards, long since decayed, suddenly broke under the weight of rocks and dirt. An avalanche of stones came crashing down into the shaft on top of the initial rockfall. More followed, showers of dirt rushed down, and a cloud of dust filled the cavern.

Joe leaped back.

Joe jumped back.

Then, with a roar like thunder, the entire shaft caved in. Rocks and timbers came tumbling down with a terrific crash. The air was filled with the noise of smashing timbers and falling rock. The faint light from the shaft that had given some vague illumination to the cave, was blotted out. The mine reverberated with echoes and shook with the force of the crash.

Then, with a roar like thunder, the whole shaft collapsed. Rocks and timbers came crashing down with a loud bang. The air filled with the sound of splintering wood and falling stone. The faint light from the shaft that had provided some dim illumination to the cave was completely extinguished. The mine echoed with sounds and shook from the impact of the collapse.

Silence reigned. It was broken by the sharp sounds of falling pebbles that descended in the wake of the avalanche. Then those noises too died away. The cavern was filled with a choking cloud of dust.

Silence ruled. It was interrupted by the sharp sounds of falling pebbles cascading down after the avalanche. Then those noises faded away as well. The cave was filled with a suffocating cloud of dust.

Joe was almost stupefied by horror. He realized to the full the peril of the situation.

Joe was almost speechless with fear. He fully understood the danger of the situation.

"The shaft has caved in," he thought. "We're trapped in the mine! We'll never get out alive!"

"The shaft has collapsed," he thought. "We're stuck in the mine! We're never getting out of here alive!"

He turned his flashlight on the place where the shaft had been. The light revealed only a high, sloping hill of rocks and shattered timbers. The shaft was completely blocked. It would take an army of men to clear away the débris.

He turned his flashlight to the spot where the shaft used to be. The light showed only a tall, sloping pile of rocks and broken timbers. The shaft was completely blocked. It would take a whole army to clear away the debris.

Joe realized that he and Frank would never be able to accomplish the task. And he knew there was no hope of assistance from outside, for no one knew where they were. It might be days before they were traced to the mine.

Joe realized that he and Frank would never be able to complete the task. And he knew there was no hope of help from anywhere else, since no one knew where they were. It could take days before someone found out they were at the mine.


CHAPTER XIII

In the Depths of the Earth

In the Depths of the Earth

Joe Hardy still had the iron bar in his hand. He had not relinquished his grip on it.

Joe Hardy still had the iron bar in his hand. He hadn't let go of it.

"That's what caused all the trouble," he said to himself. The sight of the bar reminded him of Frank, still imprisoned back in the tunnel. He knew Frank would have heard the crash and would be wondering what had happened.

"That's what caused all the trouble," he said to himself. The sight of the bar reminded him of Frank, still stuck in the tunnel. He knew Frank would have heard the crash and would be wondering what had happened.

"I may as well set him free first and then we can reason out what we are going to do."

"I might as well let him go first, and then we can figure out what we're going to do."

He turned and, dragging the heavy bar behind him, made his way to the opening of the tunnel. When he reached it he crouched down and proceeded into the passage.

He turned and, pulling the heavy bar behind him, made his way to the entrance of the tunnel. When he got there, he crouched down and moved into the passage.

With the flashlight illuminating the way, he went on toward the place where his brother was imprisoned. He found that the collapse of the shaft had shaken the entire mine. Bits of rock and heaps of earth and dirt along the floor of the tunnel testified to the shock of the cave-in. But when he came to the place where the tunnel turned to the right, he found, to his surprise, that the turning had vanished.

With the flashlight lighting his path, he continued toward the spot where his brother was trapped. He saw that the collapse of the shaft had shaken the whole mine. Chunks of rock and piles of earth and dirt scattered across the tunnel floor showed the impact of the cave-in. But when he reached the point where the tunnel turned right, he was surprised to find that the turn was gone.

Instead, there was a solid wall of rocks and boulders ahead of him!

Instead, there was a solid wall of rocks and boulders in front of him!

At first, Joe could not believe his eyes. Then realization dawned on him. The collapse of the shaft had shaken loose the boulders and rocks that lined the tunnel at this point and they had fallen down to block the passage.

At first, Joe couldn’t believe what he was seeing. Then it hit him. The collapse of the shaft had loosened the boulders and rocks that lined the tunnel here, and they had fallen down to block the way.

He stared incredulously at the rocky wall ahead of him. He was cut off completely from his brother. Then he shouted:

He looked in disbelief at the rocky wall in front of him. He was totally cut off from his brother. Then he yelled:

"Frank!"

"Frank!"

There was no answer. His shout echoed and re-echoed in the narrow space of the tunnel.

There was no response. His shout echoed and bounced back in the tight tunnel.

He shouted again and again, but the echoes were his only answers. Once he thought he heard a faint cry from beyond the wall, but he could not be sure. Communication had been cut off. He realized that his peril was doubled now. With the shaft blocked, with the passageway blocked, he was imprisoned underground in a small space, where the air would soon become foul and where suffocation would eventually end his life. He set his flashlight on the floor of the tunnel, seized the iron bar, and set to work to remove the blockade.

He shouted over and over, but the echoes were his only replies. At one point, he thought he heard a faint cry from beyond the wall, but he couldn't be certain. Communication had been cut off. He knew his danger had now doubled. With the shaft blocked and the passageway blocked, he was trapped underground in a small space, where the air would soon get bad and where suffocation would eventually take his life. He placed his flashlight on the tunnel floor, grabbed the iron bar, and got to work removing the blockage.

The task seemed hopeless. The rocks were piled up deeply and were so large and so tightly jammed together that it seemed impossible to remove them. Joe knew that if the roof of the tunnel had completely fallen in there would be little hope, as rock would continue to fall as fast as he removed the rock from underneath.

The task felt hopeless. The rocks were stacked high and were so big and so tightly wedged together that it seemed impossible to clear them away. Joe realized that if the roof of the tunnel had completely collapsed, there would be little chance of success, as more rock would keep falling just as fast as he cleared the rock from below.

He pried away a huge boulder at the top of the heap and stood to one side as he exerted all the leverage of the iron bar. The great rock wavered, then rolled down the side of the heap into the open tunnel. Joe waited anxiously.

He pushed aside a massive boulder at the top of the pile and stepped to the side as he used all his strength with the iron bar. The large rock shook for a moment, then rolled down the slope into the open tunnel. Joe waited nervously.

To his relief there was no crash of rock from the top of the tunnel. The removal of the boulder had left a small opening.

To his relief, there was no crashing rock from the top of the tunnel. The removal of the boulder had created a small opening.

He shouted again:

He yelled again:

"Frank! can you hear me?"

"Frank! Can you hear me?"

A surge of gladness passed over him when he heard his brother's voice in reply:

A wave of happiness washed over him when he heard his brother’s voice in response:

"I hear you. What's happened?"

"I get you. What happened?"

"The shaft caved in."

"The shaft collapsed."

"The main shaft?"

"The main shaft?"

"Yes."

Yes.

"I heard the crash. I shouted to you but I didn't hear any answer. Are you hurt?"

"I heard the crash. I called out to you, but I didn't get a reply. Are you okay?"

"No. I'm all right. I jumped back just in time."

"No. I'm fine. I jumped back just in time."

"Where are you now? Can't you reach me?"

"Where are you now? Can't you get in touch with me?"

"The tunnel caved in, too. I'm trying to dig my way through to you."

"The tunnel collapsed, too. I'm trying to dig my way through to reach you."

There was a moment of silence. Clearly, the news came as a surprise to Frank.

There was a moment of silence. It was obvious that the news caught Frank off guard.

"That's bad," he said, at last. "Do you think you can get through?"

"That's not good," he said finally. "Do you think you can make it?"

"I think so. I have the crowbar with me." Joe attacked another rock on the heap, edging the end of the crowbar into a crevice.

"I think so. I have the crowbar with me." Joe struck another rock on the pile, wedging the end of the crowbar into a crack.

"How bad is the cave-in?"

"How serious is the cave-in?"

"Very bad. The whole shaft went."

"Really bad. The whole shaft broke."

"That means we'll not be able to get out of here."

"That means we won't be able to get out of here."

"We may find a way."

"We might figure it out."

"Well, try to get through to me first. Then we'll see what we're to do."

"Okay, just try to reach out to me first. Then we’ll figure out what to do."

Joe continued his labors at the rock pile. One by one he managed to dislodge heavy rocks and boulders until at last he had cleared away an aperture of sufficient extent to admit the passage of his body. He shoved the crowbar ahead of him and crawled over the remaining rocks.

Joe kept working at the rock pile. One by one, he managed to move heavy rocks and boulders until he finally cleared enough space to fit his body through. He pushed the crowbar in front of him and crawled over the leftover rocks.

Within a few minutes he had reached his brother, who was lying in the same position in which Joe had last seen him.

Within a few minutes, he reached his brother, who was lying in the same position that Joe had last seen him.

"How's the foot?"

"How's your foot?"

"All right," Frank answered. "It isn't hurting any. See what you can do with that crowbar."

"Okay," Frank replied. "It’s not causing any harm. Let’s see what you can do with that crowbar."

Joe inserted the end of the crowbar beneath the boulder, resting the middle of the bar on the boulder beneath. Then, exerting all his strength, he weighed down on the bar.

Joe positioned the end of the crowbar under the boulder, balancing the middle of the bar on the boulder itself. Then, using all his strength, he pushed down on the bar.

Slowly, gradually, the great rock began to move.

Slowly, bit by bit, the massive rock started to shift.

"It's giving way!" cried Frank. "Just a little more—a little more!"

"It's giving way!" Frank shouted. "Just a bit more—a bit more!"

By means of the bar and the principles of leverage Joe was able to apply much more strength to the removal of the boulder than if he had tried to move it with his bare hands. He shifted his grasp, bore down on the bar again, and the great boulder rose higher.

By using the bar and the principles of leverage, Joe was able to apply much more strength to move the boulder than if he had tried to lift it with his bare hands. He adjusted his grip, pushed down on the bar again, and the huge boulder lifted higher.

"Good," declared Frank, dragging himself forward. "I'm free."

"Good," Frank said as he pulled himself forward. "I'm free."

He extricated his foot from the crevice and Joe lessened his weight on the bar. The boulder fell back into place again. But Frank was no longer a prisoner.

He pulled his foot out of the crack, and Joe eased up on the bar. The boulder settled back into place. But Frank was no longer trapped.

"That's that!" Frank ejaculated, scrambling to a sitting position and beginning to rub his ankle to restore circulation. "I'm out of that little jam, anyway, thanks to you and that crowbar."

"That's it!" Frank said, quickly sitting up and starting to rub his ankle to get the circulation going again. "I'm out of that little mess, anyway, thanks to you and that crowbar."

Joe sat down on a near-by rock.

Joe sat down on a nearby rock.

"We're up against a worse dilemma now," he said.

"We're facing a tougher dilemma now," he said.

Frank looked grave.

Frank looked serious.

"I know it. Still, there may be a way out. You say there's no use trying to get back up the shaft?"

"I get it. Still, there might be a way out. You’re saying there’s no point in trying to climb back up the shaft?"

"None at all. The whole place caved in with a crash."

"Not at all. The entire place collapsed with a loud crash."

"What caused it?"

"What triggered it?"

"That crowbar had evidently been left there to prop up a weak place in the side of the shaft, and when I moved it, the whole thing gave way. Some of the rocks came tumbling out, and then the side of the shaft caved in. If I hadn't jumped back in the nick of time my goose would have been cooked. There must be a couple of tons of rock in the shaft now."

"That crowbar was clearly left there to support a weak spot in the side of the shaft, and when I moved it, everything gave way. Some of the rocks fell out, and then the side of the shaft collapsed. If I hadn't jumped back just in time, I would have been in big trouble. There must be a couple of tons of rock in the shaft now."

"We couldn't dig our way through?"

"We couldn't dig our way through?"

Joe shook his head. "We'd be wasting time trying. I guess the only thing we can hope for is that somebody heard the crash and comes to see what happened."

Joe shook his head. "We'd be wasting time trying. I guess the only thing we can hope for is that someone heard the crash and comes to check what happened."

"But they don't know we're down here."

"But they don't know we're down here."

"That's true, too. And they won't be very likely to start clearing away the shaft unless they know we're here. This mine was abandoned a long time ago, by the looks of things."

"That’s true, too. And they probably won’t start clearing the shaft unless they know we’re here. This mine looks like it was abandoned a long time ago."

"They might see our footprints up to the side of the shaft."

"They might see our footprints leading up to the edge of the shaft."

"It was snowing when we came here. They may be covered over by now."

"It was snowing when we arrived here. They might be covered by now."

The boys were silent. They realized that their plight was almost hopeless. In the cold, dark depths of the earth, with their air supply cut off, they were facing suffocation, exposure and starvation, and there seemed not the slightest possibility of escape.

The boys were quiet. They understood that their situation was nearly hopeless. In the cold, dark depths of the earth, with their air supply cut off, they were facing suffocation, exposure, and starvation, and there seemed to be no chance of escape.

"The only thing to do," said Frank, at last, "is to keep on following this tunnel. There's no use going back into the mine itself."

"The only thing we can do," Frank said finally, "is to keep following this tunnel. There's no point in going back into the mine."

"No, there's no use going back. But to my mind I don't think there's any use going ahead, either. This tunnel probably ends in a blank wall."

"No, there's no point in going back. But honestly, I don't think moving forward will help, either. This tunnel probably just leads to a dead end."

"We might as well find out. We won't do ourselves any good by just sitting here and waiting to die." Frank got to his feet and picked up his flashlight. "Better turn out your light," he advised. "We need only one light at a time and we might as well be saving the batteries."

"We might as well find out. Sitting here and waiting to die isn't going to help us." Frank stood up and grabbed his flashlight. "You should turn off your light," he suggested. "We only need one light at a time, and we might as well save the batteries."

Joe got up and did as his brother had suggested.

Joe stood up and followed his brother's suggestion.

Frank went on down the passage, followed by Joe. The boys felt in their hearts that there was very little hope that the passage would lead anywhere, but it seemed to be the only possible avenue of escape. They recognized that it was only a "drift" that the miners had dug and blasted away from the main workings in an effort to discover a vein of gold, and the fact that it had not been further developed seemed to indicate that the search had been unsuccessful and that the drift had been abandoned.

Frank walked down the passage, with Joe following behind. The boys sensed in their hearts that there was hardly any hope that this passage would lead anywhere, but it appeared to be their only option for escape. They understood that it was merely a "drift" that the miners had dug and blasted away from the main area in an attempt to find a vein of gold, and the fact that it had not been further developed suggested that the search had failed and the drift had been abandoned.

"I wish we had told dad exactly where we were going to go to-day," said Frank as they went slowly on down the tunnel.

"I wish we had told Dad exactly where we were going today," Frank said as they slowly continued down the tunnel.

"So do I. There'd be a chance for us then. They'd send some one out to look for us, and then they could start to work clearing away that shaft."

"So do I. Then we’d have a chance. They’d send someone out to look for us, and then they could start clearing that shaft."

"Well, we can be thankful we weren't in the shaft when it collapsed."

"Well, we can be grateful we weren't in the elevator when it fell."

"Yes, it could have been worse. If I had been caught in the cave-in you would be lying under that boulder yet."

"Yeah, it could have been worse. If I had been trapped in the cave-in, you’d still be stuck under that boulder."

"We still have a chance as long as we have that crowbar and can keep moving." Frank paused. "By the way, do you feel a draft?"

"We still have a chance as long as we have that crowbar and can keep moving." Frank paused. "By the way, do you feel a draft?"

"Seems to me I do feel cold air!"

"Looks like I feel cold air!"

"Perhaps there is an opening to this tunnel. This seems promising."

"Maybe there's an entrance to this tunnel. This looks promising."

The rush of cold air about their heads was soon quite evident. The boys' spirits rose forthwith and they proceeded through the tunnel more cheerfully.

The rush of cold air around their heads became clear pretty quickly. The boys' spirits lifted immediately, and they went through the tunnel with more cheer.

"If air can get into this place we should be able to get out of it," said Frank. "Perhaps this tunnel is just another entrance to the mine."

"If air can get into this place, we should be able to get out," Frank said. "Maybe this tunnel is just another entrance to the mine."

"Let's hope so."

"Fingers crossed."

They continued, Frank flashing the light before him. The tunnel began to grow narrower. They had to crouch almost double in order to avoid bumping their heads on the rocky roof.

They kept going, with Frank shining the light ahead of him. The tunnel started to get narrower. They had to crouch almost completely to avoid hitting their heads on the rocky ceiling.

"Another minute or so and we'll know whether this place has an opening or not," called back Frank.

"Just a minute more and we'll find out if this place has an opening or not," Frank called back.

"It must have an opening! Where would that fresh air we feel be coming from if it hadn't one?"

"It must have an opening! Where would all that fresh air we feel be coming from if it didn’t?"

"It might be coming through a small slit in the rocks. We can't depend on it too much. Ah! Here we are!"

"It could be coming through a small crack in the rocks. We can't rely on it too much. Ah! Here we are!"

His light had disclosed the fact that they were at the end of the tunnel. But his tones immediately changed to a murmur of disappointment when he saw that the tunnel ended in a sheer wall of cold, wet rock.

His light revealed that they were at the end of the tunnel. But his voice quickly shifted to a whisper of disappointment when he realized that the tunnel ended in a solid wall of cold, wet rock.

The boys crouched in silence gazing at the rock wall that seemed to crush all their hopes. The wall was a barrier that cut them off from all chance of reaching the sun-lit, outside world again.

The boys huddled in silence, staring at the rock wall that felt like it was crushing all their hopes. The wall stood as a barrier, cutting them off from any chance of reaching the sunlit, outside world again.

"It's a blind alley!" said Joe, in a hushed voice.

"It's a dead end!" Joe said quietly.

Frank merely nodded. He had been buoying up his hopes by refusing to admit to himself that the tunnel could be anything else than an outlet to the mine. Now he was overwhelmed by disappointment.

Frank just nodded. He had been keeping his hopes up by refusing to accept that the tunnel could be anything other than an exit to the mine. Now he was filled with disappointment.

"We're up against it," he said at last. "This tunnel leads nowhere and the shaft is blocked."

"We're in a tough spot," he finally said. "This tunnel goes nowhere and the shaft is blocked."

"I'm afraid so."

"I'm afraid so."

Joe tapped the crowbar tentatively against the wall of rock. It thudded dully. There was no hollow sound that might indicate another tunnel beyond. The dull ring of the iron bar seemed to sound their death-knell.

Joe tapped the crowbar cautiously against the rock wall. It thudded softly. There was no hollow echo that might suggest another tunnel beyond. The dull ring of the iron bar seemed to signal their doom.

"I guess this is our finish, Frank," he said gravely.

"I guess this is the end for us, Frank," he said seriously.


CHAPTER XIV

Attacked by the Outlaws

Attacked by the Outlaws

The Hardy boys were so profoundly discouraged by the discovery that the tunnel, their sole hope of safety, ended in nothing but a blank wall of rock, that for a while they sat in the gloom, scarcely speaking. Their plight was perilous and there seemed not the slightest ray of hope.

The Hardy boys were extremely disheartened by the realization that the tunnel, their only chance of escape, led to nothing but a solid wall of rock. For a while, they sat in the darkness, barely talking. Their situation was dangerous, and there seemed to be no sign of hope.

At last Frank bestirred himself.

Finally, Frank got moving.

"I'm still thinking of that gust of fresh air we felt farther back in the tunnel!" he said.

"I'm still thinking about that rush of fresh air we felt further back in the tunnel!" he said.

"There is fresh air coming in somewhere. The air in here isn't getting foul."

"There’s fresh air coming in from somewhere. The air in here isn’t getting stale."

"Let's go back and explore the tunnel again. We might find an opening of some kind."

"Let's go back and check out the tunnel again. We might discover some kind of opening."

"It won't be big enough for us to get through," predicted Joe, gloomily.

"It won't be big enough for us to get through," Joe predicted, sounding gloomy.

"Well, we'll go and see, anyway."

"Well, we'll go and check it out, anyway."

The boys turned back. Frank took the lead again and they moved on. The flashlight cast its bright circle of illumination on the dank rock walls of their prison as Frank explored every inch of the sides of the tunnel. For a while their scrutiny met with no reward. The tunnel was unbroken by crevice or cranny.

The boys turned around. Frank took the lead once more and they continued on. The flashlight created a bright circle of light on the damp rock walls of their prison as Frank investigated every inch of the tunnel's sides. For a while, their searching yielded nothing. The tunnel was solid, with no cracks or openings.

"We must have passed the place by now," said Joe.

"We must have passed the place by now," Joe said.

"I don't think so. We'll keep on trying."

"I don't think so. We'll keep trying."

At last Frank gave an exclamation of satisfaction. He had felt a sudden rush of cold air against his face. It seemed to come from above and he stopped, flashing the light hither and thither.

At last, Frank exclaimed with satisfaction. He had suddenly felt a rush of cold air against his face. It seemed to come from above, and he stopped, shining the light back and forth.

"It's around here somewhere."

"It's somewhere around here."

"I can feel the draft. There must be a big opening."

"I can feel the draft. There has to be a big opening."

The circle of light ceased wavering and rested finally on a place at the side of the tunnel, toward the roof. It was just a dark patch, an indentation in the rock, but it was quite large and it seemed to indicate an opening of some kind. It was about five feet from the ground.

The circle of light stopped flickering and finally settled on a spot at the side of the tunnel, near the top. It was just a dark patch, a dent in the rock, but it was fairly big and appeared to suggest an opening of some sort. It was about five feet off the ground.

"I'll hold the light," Frank said. "See if you can clamber up and investigate that place, Joe."

"I'll hold the light," Frank said. "Try to climb up and check out that spot, Joe."

He stepped back and directed the flashlight so that Joe was able to find a convenient foothold. Joe reached up and secured a grasp on the edge of the natural shelf of rock. Then he managed to scramble up the wall until he swung himself over the ledge. Frank stepped back farther and the light plainly revealed his brother kneeling on the rocky shelf.

He stepped back and aimed the flashlight so that Joe could find a good foothold. Joe reached up and grabbed the edge of the natural rock shelf. Then he managed to climb up the wall until he swung himself over the ledge. Frank stepped back further, and the light clearly showed his brother kneeling on the rocky shelf.

"Find anything?" he asked.

"Find anything?" he asked.

"There's a powerful draft of air coming down through here," said Joe, in tones of suppressed excitement. "I think this is a sort of tunnel or air shaft through the rock. I'll turn on my own flashlight."

"There's a strong breeze coming through here," said Joe, with a hint of excitement in his voice. "I think this is some kind of tunnel or air shaft in the rock. I'll turn on my flashlight."

In a moment Frank could see the glow of his brother's light reflected from the rocks above. Then he heard Joe give a lusty shout of delight.

In a moment, Frank saw the glow of his brother's light reflecting off the rocks above. Then he heard Joe let out a loud shout of joy.

"It leads on up!" he called. "It is a tunnel running at an angle, and I think it goes to the surface."

"It goes up!" he shouted. "It's a tunnel slanting upwards, and I think it leads to the surface."

"Can you see any light?"

"Can you see any light?"

"No. Nothing. But I think it won't hurt to explore it. By the force of the cold air rushing down through here I think it must lead to the top."

"No. Nothing. But I don't think it would hurt to check it out. Given how the cold air is rushing through here, I'm pretty sure it leads to the top."

"I'm coming up."

"I'm on my way."

Joe disappeared up into the tunnel and Frank, putting his flashlight into his pocket, scrambled up to the shelf of rock. There he knelt and turned on the light again.

Joe vanished into the tunnel, and Frank, tucking his flashlight into his pocket, climbed up to the ledge. There, he knelt and switched the light back on.

He could see Joe ahead of him, crawling on up through the narrow passage. The tunnel in the rock was just as Joe had described it, a long, narrow shaft that led upward at a steep slope. It was not so steep that they would not be able to clamber on up to wherever it might lead.

He could see Joe in front of him, crawling through the tight passage. The tunnel in the rock was exactly as Joe had described, a long, narrow shaft that sloped steeply upward. It wasn't so steep that they couldn't climb up to wherever it might lead.

"Go ahead," he called out. "I'll follow you."

"Go ahead," he shouted. "I'll catch up with you."

"I hope it doesn't get narrower up ahead."

"I hope it doesn't get smaller up ahead."

"We'll go as far as the tunnel lets us."

“We'll go as far as the tunnel allows us.”

The two boys began crawling up the rocky shaft. Joe called back:

The two boys started climbing up the rocky shaft. Joe shouted back:

"It's widening out!"

"It's getting wider!"

And, truly, the shaft became gradually wider until the boys could almost stand upright in it. The draft of cold air blew against them with great force and roared and whistled down the tunnel. Suddenly Joe stopped and waved the flashlight back and forth.

And, honestly, the tunnel slowly got wider until the boys could nearly stand up straight in it. A blast of cold air hit them hard and howled and whistled through the tunnel. Suddenly, Joe stopped and waved the flashlight back and forth.

"There's a drop here."

"There's a drop here."

Frank joined him. There was room enough now for them to stand side by side, and the wavering flashlights showed them that they stood at the end of the tunnel and that it opened into a chamber of rock similar to the mine working they had first entered.

Frank joined him. There was now enough space for them to stand side by side, and the flickering flashlights revealed that they were at the end of the tunnel, which opened into a rock chamber similar to the mine they had first entered.

"Look, Joe! I think I see a glow of light away over there. Turn off your flash."

"Hey, Joe! I think I see a light glowing over there. Turn off your flash."

The flashlights were switched off and the brothers stood in total darkness. When their eyes became accustomed to the absence of the electric glow, they saw that almost directly across from them was a faint, bluish grey reflection of light.

The flashlights were turned off and the brothers stood in complete darkness. Once their eyes adjusted to the lack of electric light, they noticed that almost directly in front of them was a faint, bluish-gray reflection of light.

"We've found our way into another mine," said Frank. "That must be the light from the shaft. There's a chance for us yet."

"We've entered another mine," Frank said. "That has to be the light from the shaft. There's still hope for us."

He switched on his light again and flashed it into the rocky chamber into which the tunnel led. They found that they stood but a few feet above the floor of the mine working, so they promptly leaped down and then began a cautious walk across the cavern. The floor was rough and strewn with chipped masses of rock which showed that mining had once gone on there, and once they stumbled over a pick that some one had left behind when the working was abandoned.

He turned his light back on and shone it into the rocky chamber that the tunnel opened into. They realized they were only a few feet above the mine floor, so they quickly jumped down and started carefully walking across the cavern. The floor was uneven and covered with broken pieces of rock, indicating that mining had taken place there before, and at one point, they tripped over a pick that someone had left behind when the work stopped.

They drew closer to the light that emanated from the shaft, and at last their flashlights revealed a crude ladder leading up the wall. Here they were met by another rush of cold air. The draft created by the tunnel leading into the other mine was severe and the wind whistled about the cavern. At the bottom of the shaft the Hardy boys looked up.

They moved closer to the light coming from the shaft, and finally their flashlights showed a rough ladder climbing up the wall. They were hit by another blast of cold air. The draft from the tunnel leading to the other mine was strong, and the wind howled through the cavern. At the bottom of the shaft, the Hardy boys looked up.

The ladder led up a distance of about twenty feet, and they could see the blue sky above. The sight made them sigh with relief. It was as if a heavy weight had been lifted from them.

The ladder went up about twenty feet, and they could see the blue sky above. The view made them sigh with relief. It felt like a heavy weight had been lifted off their shoulders.

"Up you go," said Frank. "We'll be out of here in no time, now."

"Here we go," said Frank. "We'll be out of here in no time."

"I'll say we're lucky."

"We're lucky."

"I never thought we'd see daylight again. The old sky looks pretty good, doesn't it?"

"I never thought we'd see the light of day again. The old sky looks pretty nice, doesn't it?"

"Never looked so good to me before."

"Never looked this good to me before."

Joe put his foot on the first rung of the ladder. Although the mine had evidently been deserted many years before, the ladder leading down into the shaft still held firm. Slowly he began to ascend.

Joe placed his foot on the first rung of the ladder. Even though the mine had clearly been abandoned many years ago, the ladder leading down into the shaft still felt sturdy. He started to climb slowly.

Frank came behind. Each was filled with relief that they had escaped imprisonment in the abandoned mine, imprisonment that might easily have meant a wretched death. The cold wind about their faces was like the breath of life to them.

Frank came up behind. They were both relieved that they had escaped captivity in the abandoned mine, a situation that could have easily led to a miserable death. The cold wind on their faces felt like a breath of fresh air to them.

Suddenly Joe stopped.

Suddenly, Joe halted.

"Listen!" he whispered.

"Hey!" he whispered.

They remained still. Then, from above, at the top of the shaft, they could hear voices.

They stayed quiet. Then, from above, at the top of the shaft, they could hear voices.

"That cave-in must have finished them," some one was saying. "The whole shaft is gone."

"That cave-in must have taken them out," someone was saying. "The entire shaft is gone."

"They might have found their way out," replied another voice. "These two mines lead into each other."

"They could have found a way out," another voice replied. "These two mines connect to each other."

"I didn't know that."

"I didn't know that."

"Yes—there's a tunnel leading down into their main drift."

"Yeah—there's a tunnel going down into their main drift."

"Oh, those kids would never find it. Probably they were crushed to death by the cave-in, anyway."

"Oh, those kids will never find it. They probably got trapped and died in the cave-in, anyway."

The voices died away as the men evidently moved back from the neighborhood of the shaft-head.

The voices faded as the men clearly stepped back from the area around the shaft-head.

"Some one has been looking for us," said Joe, in a low voice.

"Someone has been looking for us," Joe said quietly.

"They've given us up for dead. They'll get a surprise when we pop up out of the ground. Evidently they weren't going to try to dig us out. Go on up."

"They've written us off as dead. They'll be shocked when we suddenly emerge from the ground. Clearly, they weren't planning to dig us out. Go ahead."

Joe resumed his climb and in a few minutes he emerged above ground, stepping off the top of the ladder to a rickety platform covered with snow. Frank scrambled up beside him, and then the two brothers stared in amazement at what they saw.

Joe continued his climb and in a few minutes he came up to the surface, stepping off the top of the ladder onto a shaky platform covered in snow. Frank quickly climbed up next to him, and then the two brothers stared in awe at what they saw.

Three rough-looking men were standing only a few yards away. One was a tall, surly chap in a short, fur coat. He was badly in need of a shave and his brutal chin and heavy jowls were black with a stubble of beard. The other two were short and husky of build. One was clean-shaven and thin-featured, the other had a reddish mustache. About the waist of one of the men, the thin-featured fellow, was a belt with a holster from which projected the butt of a revolver. The three were villainous in appearance.

Three rough-looking guys were standing just a few yards away. One was a tall, grumpy guy in a short, fur coat. He definitely needed a shave, and his brutal chin and heavy jowls were covered with a stubbly beard. The other two were short and stocky. One was clean-shaven and had a thin face, while the other had a reddish mustache. Around the waist of the thin-faced guy was a belt with a holster, from which the butt of a revolver was sticking out. The three looked pretty menacing.

As though some sixth sense warned the men that they were observed, they whirled about and confronted the Hardy boys.

As if some instinct warned the men that they were being watched, they spun around and faced the Hardy boys.

The men were as surprised as the lads. Both Frank and Joe realized that there was something unsavory about the strange trio and when they saw the thin-featured man suddenly reach for his revolver they knew that they were confronting not friends, but enemies.

The men were as shocked as the guys. Both Frank and Joe sensed that there was something shady about the weird trio, and when they saw the skinny guy suddenly grab his gun, they understood that they were facing not friends, but foes.

"That's them!" shouted the man in the fur coat excitedly. "Grab them!" And with that he began to run toward the two boys. "No shooting!" he shouted to the thin-featured fellow, who promptly shoved his revolver back into the holster.

"That's them!" the man in the fur coat yelled excitedly. "Get them!" With that, he started running toward the two boys. "No shooting!" he called out to the thin-faced guy, who quickly put his revolver back in his holster.

"Run for it," muttered Frank.

"Run!" muttered Frank.

He wheeled about and commenced to run down the hillside in the general direction of the town.

He turned around and started running down the hill toward the town.

The snow was deep and it hampered their movements, but the pursuers also experienced this handicap. Frank and Joe were exhausted by their gruelling experience in the mine and they were unable to make good progress. The man in the fur coat came leaping after them, ploughing through the snow recklessly. He gained rapidly on them.

The snow was deep and it slowed them down, but the pursuers faced the same issue. Frank and Joe were worn out from their tough time in the mine and they couldn’t move quickly. The guy in the fur coat was jumping after them, charging through the snow recklessly. He was closing in quickly.

"Stop or we'll shoot," he roared.

"Stop or we’ll shoot," he shouted.

This was but a bluff, and the Hardy boys recognized it as such. They raced madly on through the deep snow that clung to their limbs and held them back. Joe was lagging behind, unable to keep up the pace. The man in the fur coat was only a few feet back of him. The fellow leaped ahead and sprang at Joe in a football tackle that brought the boy down. The pair went rolling over and over in the snow, kicking and scrambling.

This was just a bluff, and the Hardy boys saw right through it. They raced frantically through the deep snow that stuck to their limbs and slowed them down. Joe was falling behind, struggling to keep up. The man in the fur coat was only a few feet behind him. The guy lunged forward and tackled Joe in a way that knocked him down. The two of them rolled over and over in the snow, kicking and scrambling.

Frank stopped and turned back. He could not desert his brother and he was prepared to be captured with him at the expense of his own freedom. He met the thin-faced man, who led the other pair of pursuers, with a slashing blow in the face that knocked the man off his balance so that he tumbled backward into the snow with a grunt of pain and amazement. The short, stocky man came on with a growl. Frank swung and missed; then his attacker closed with him and they struggled to and fro in the snowbank.

Frank stopped and turned back. He couldn’t abandon his brother, and he was ready to be caught alongside him, even if it meant giving up his own freedom. He confronted the thin-faced man, who led the other two pursuers, with a swift punch to the face that knocked him off balance, causing him to fall backward into the snow with a grunt of pain and surprise. The short, stocky man charged at him with a growl. Frank swung and missed; then his attacker got close, and they struggled back and forth in the snowbank.

His assailant twined one foot about Frank's leg and they toppled over into the snow. By that time the thin man had scrambled to his feet and again launched himself into the struggle. Frank Hardy was completely overpowered.

His attacker wrapped one foot around Frank's leg, and they both fell into the snow. By then, the thin man had gotten back on his feet and jumped back into the fight. Frank Hardy was completely overpowered.

He was dragged roughly to his feet, his arms gripped behind his back. Joe had been no match for his more powerful antagonist and he too had been forced to submit to capture.

He was yanked up to his feet, his arms held tightly behind his back. Joe had stood no chance against his stronger opponent and had also been compelled to give in to capture.

The trio held the boys in their power.

The trio had control over the boys.

"What'll we do with 'em?" asked the thin-faced man gruffly.

"What are we going to do with them?" asked the thin-faced man gruffly.

"Bring 'em back to the mine first," said the fellow in the fur coat. "I guess the boss will want to see these birds."

"Bring them back to the mine first," said the guy in the fur coat. "I guess the boss will want to see these birds."

Frank and Joe were roughly bundled up the hillside again by their captors. All the time Frank's mind was in a whirl. Who were these three men? Why had they attacked them? Why had they been hunting for them in the first place? And who was "the boss" they spoke of?

Frank and Joe were roughly pushed up the hillside again by their captors. Meanwhile, Frank's mind was racing. Who were these three guys? Why had they attacked them? Why had they been pursuing them in the first place? And who was "the boss" they mentioned?

In due time they reached the shaft-head again and there the man in the fur coat faced them.

In due time, they reached the shaft-head again, and there the man in the fur coat confronted them.

"Who are you two boys?" he demanded.

"Who are you two guys?" he asked.

"Who are you?" countered Frank.

"Who are you?" Frank replied.

"That doesn't matter. What's your names?"

"That doesn't matter. What are your names?"

"Tell us yours first."

"You go first."

"What were you doing in that mine?"

"What were you doing in that mine?"

"What did you attack us for? Why are you keeping us here?"

"What did you attack us for? Why are you holding us here?"

The man in the fur coat became impatient at receiving questions instead of answers.

The guy in the fur coat got frustrated by getting questions instead of answers.

"Are you the Hardy boys?" he asked. "Sons of that detective?"

"Are you the Hardy boys?" he asked. "Sons of that detective?"

"Try and find out."

"Try to find out."

"We'll find out, all right," declared the man in the fur coat threateningly. "We'll take you to somebody that'll make you talk."

"We'll find out, that's for sure," the man in the fur coat said menacingly. "We'll take you to someone who'll make you spill the beans."

"You'd better let us go or the whole three of you will find yourselves in jail," said Frank.

"You should let us go, or all three of you are going to end up in jail," Frank said.

The man laughed shortly.

The man chuckled briefly.

"No fear," he said. "Not in Lucky Bottom, at any rate." He turned to the other two men. "Keep these boys here," he ordered. "I'll be back in a while. Don't let them get away!"

"No worries," he said. "Not in Lucky Bottom, at least." He looked at the other two men. "Keep these guys here," he instructed. "I'll be back in a bit. Don’t let them escape!"

"Where are you going, Jack?" asked the thin-faced man.

"Where are you headed, Jack?" asked the guy with the thin face.

"I'm going to get Black Pepper. He'll make these birds talk."

"I'm going to get Black Pepper. He'll get these birds talking."

With that the fellow stalked away through the snow. Frank and Joe glanced quickly at one another. They knew now the explanation of their capture. They were in the hands of three members of the gang of the notorious Black Pepper, the outlaw.

With that, the guy walked off through the snow. Frank and Joe exchanged quick glances. They now understood why they were captured. They were in the clutches of three members of the infamous Black Pepper gang, the outlaw.


CHAPTER XV

The Trap

The Trap

The man of the thin features produced the revolver from its holster and sat down on a snow-covered rock near the top of the shaft. He held the weapon negligently, but there was no doubt that he could level it at the Hardy boys in a second if they attempted to escape.

The man with the thin features pulled out the revolver from its holster and sat down on a snow-covered rock near the top of the shaft. He held the weapon carelessly, but there was no doubt he could aim it at the Hardy boys in an instant if they tried to escape.

"You can sit down if you want," he said. His partner still retained a tight grasp on Frank. "Let him go, Shorty. I've got this gun here and I guess they won't try to get away. We may as well be comfortable."

"You can sit down if you want," he said. His partner still held onto Frank tightly. "Let him go, Shorty. I've got this gun here, and I don't think they'll try to escape. We might as well get comfortable."

The fellow addressed as "Shorty" moved away from Frank and sat down by his companion. The Hardy boys found a heap of rocks near by and seated themselves. They knew there was no use of attempting to escape as long as that ugly-looking revolver was in the hand of their captor.

The guy called "Shorty" moved away from Frank and sat down next to his buddy. The Hardy boys found a pile of rocks nearby and took a seat. They knew there was no point in trying to escape as long as that nasty-looking revolver was in their captor's hand.

"Say, Slim," remarked Shorty, "do you think Black Pepper is at the camp?"

"Hey, Slim," Shorty said, "do you think Black Pepper is at the camp?"

The other man nodded.

The other guy nodded.

"Yeah! He came back this morning."

"Yeah! He came back this morning."

Slim looked up at the Hardy boys.

Slim looked up at the Hardy boys.

"What were you guys lookin' for in that mine, anyway?"

"What were you all looking for in that mine, anyway?"

"Oysters," replied Frank, with a grin.

"Oysters," Frank said, smiling.

"None of your funny stuff," rapped out Slim. "We'll make you talk soon enough. We know what you're after."

"Cut out the jokes," Slim said sharply. "We’ll get you to talk soon enough. We know what you want."

"What did you ask us for, then?" asked Joe.

"What did you ask us for, then?" Joe asked.

The outlaws were silent. They saw that nothing was to be gained by seeking information from the lads. They were content to await the return of Black Pepper and their companion Jack.

The outlaws were quiet. They realized that there was no benefit in trying to get information from the kids. They were happy to wait for Black Pepper and their friend Jack to come back.

Frank and Joe Hardy sat on the snow-covered rocks in silence. Slowly Frank put his hand behind his back and began to grope about among the rocks. He knew that they were loose and that they were of various sizes. The idea had occurred to him that if he could but use one of them as a weapon he might be able to disarm Slim and perhaps effect his escape and that of his brother.

Frank and Joe Hardy sat silently on the snow-covered rocks. Slowly, Frank reached behind his back and started feeling around among the rocks. He knew they were loose and varied in size. The thought crossed his mind that if he could grab one to use as a weapon, he might be able to disarm Slim and maybe help himself and his brother escape.

Bit by bit he groped about. One rock was too large for him to grasp. Another was too small to be of any use. Finally his hands closed about a good-sized stone that came from the rest of the pile without much difficulty.

Bit by bit he felt around. One rock was too big for him to hold. Another was too small to be useful. Finally, his hands wrapped around a decent-sized stone that came from the rest of the pile easily.

He calculated the distance and eyed the revolver warily. Frank had been pitcher on the Bayport high school nine and the accuracy of his aim had often been the despair of opposing batsmen. Now he called on all his skill.

He measured the distance and looked at the revolver cautiously. Frank had been the pitcher for the Bayport high school team, and his accuracy had often frustrated the opposing batters. Now he relied on all his skills.

Without moving from his position he suddenly brought up the rock and flung it with all his strength directly at the revolver in Slim's hand. The outlaw's grip on the weapon had relaxed in his indifference, and when the stone struck its mark, full and true, the gun went flying into the deep snow.

Without moving from his spot, he suddenly picked up the rock and threw it with all his strength straight at the revolver in Slim's hand. The outlaw's grip on the weapon had loosened in his indifference, and when the stone hit its target, perfectly and accurately, the gun went flying into the deep snow.

"Come on, Joe!" shouted Frank scrambling to his feet. He had noticed a path leading through the snow in the direction of the road that went to Hank Shale's cabin and he ran toward this path with all the speed at his command. Joe had not been slow to grasp the situation, and he too came racing through the snow but a few paces behind.

"Come on, Joe!" shouted Frank as he jumped to his feet. He had spotted a path through the snow heading toward the road that led to Hank Shale's cabin, and he ran toward it as fast as he could. Joe quickly understood what was happening and raced through the snow just a few steps behind him.

The outlaws were taken off their guard. Slim instinctively reached for his revolver, but it had disappeared in the snow and he wasted many precious seconds hunting for it. Shorty had leaped after the boys, then, seeing that his companion did not follow, he hesitated, ran back, and then turned around again. He did not know what to do.

The outlaws were caught off guard. Slim instinctively reached for his revolver, but it was lost in the snow, and he wasted valuable seconds searching for it. Shorty had jumped after the boys but, noticing that his friend didn’t follow, he hesitated, ran back, and then turned around again. He didn’t know what to do.

"After them!" roared Slim, and Shorty took up the pursuit. But his indecision had given the Hardy boys the opportunity they needed. They had a good start on their pursuer and Shorty was but a clumsy runner at best. Frank gained the path and there his progress was swifter because he was not handicapped by the impeding snow. Slim finally abandoned his search for the weapon and also took up the chase, but by this time he was far behind.

"After them!" shouted Slim, and Shorty started the chase. But his hesitation had given the Hardy boys the chance they needed. They had a solid lead on their pursuer, and Shorty was only a clumsy runner at best. Frank found the path, and he moved faster there because he wasn’t slowed down by the heavy snow. Slim eventually gave up looking for the weapon and joined the chase, but by that time, he was way behind.

The boys gained the main road, with Shorty ploughing along in pursuit. Even yet they were not safe, but chance came to their aid in the shape of a stage that ran from Lucky Bottom to one of the neighboring camps. It rattled along, with sleighbells jingling, the driver muffled to the ears, and when Shorty and Slim caught sight of it they slowed up and abandoned the chase. The open road was a dangerous place. They did not wish any interference from the stage driver or his passengers.

The boys made it to the main road, with Shorty trailing behind. They still weren’t out of danger, but luck was on their side when a stagecoach appeared, heading from Lucky Bottom to one of the nearby camps. It rattled by with sleigh bells jingling, the driver bundled up to his ears, and when Shorty and Slim spotted it, they slowed down and called off the chase. The open road was a risky spot. They didn't want any trouble from the stage driver or his passengers.

When Frank and Joe saw that their pursuers had turned back they slowed down to a walk. Hank Shale's cabin was already in sight.

When Frank and Joe noticed that their pursuers had turned back, they slowed down to a walk. Hank Shale's cabin was already visible.

"We gave them the slip, all right," declared Frank jubilantly.

"We got away from them, for sure," Frank said happily.

"I'll tell the world we did. Black Pepper and the other fellow will be hopping mad when they come back and find that we've escaped."

"I'll let everyone know we did it. Black Pepper and the other guy are going to be furious when they return and see that we've gotten away."

"We'll have to be on the lookout for them from now on. They won't stop until they do lay their hands on us."

"We'll need to keep an eye out for them from now on. They won't stop until they get their hands on us."

"Perhaps it's just as well. We can be on our guard. If we weren't expecting anything wrong we'd be liable to walk right into their arms."

"Maybe it's for the best. We can stay alert. If we weren't expecting anything bad, we could easily walk right into their trap."

When the boys reached the cabin they found their father and Hank Shale greatly worried by their prolonged absence. They told of their descent into the abandoned mine, of the cave-in, and of their subsequent escape, of their capture by Black Pepper's men and of their get-away. Mr. Hardy looked grave.

When the boys got to the cabin, they found their dad and Hank Shale really worried about how long they had been gone. They talked about going into the old mine, the cave-in, and how they managed to escape, as well as how they were captured by Black Pepper's men and how they got away. Mr. Hardy looked serious.

"I think we'd better drop the case," he said finally. "It's too big a risk to take."

"I think we should drop the case," he said at last. "It's too big of a risk to take."

"Why?" asked the boys, in surprise.

"Why?" the guys asked, surprised.

"You might have been buried alive in that mine, in the first place. I would never have forgiven myself. And now that you have run up against Black Pepper's gang they'll be out to get you. I don't want to be responsible for making you run those risks."

"You could have been buried alive in that mine, to begin with. I would never have been able to forgive myself. And now that you’ve crossed paths with Black Pepper's gang, they’ll be out to get you. I don’t want to be responsible for putting you in those dangerous situations."

"We won't drop the case," laughed Frank. "It's just getting interesting now. We'll find that gold for you, Dad."

"We're not dropping the case," laughed Frank. "It's getting interesting now. We'll find that gold for you, Dad."

"Don't worry about us," chimed in Joe. "We can look after ourselves. We probably won't be up against any worse dangers than the ones we faced to-day."

"Don't worry about us," Joe said. "We can take care of ourselves. We probably won't encounter any worse dangers than the ones we faced today."

"Well," said Mr. Hardy, reluctantly, "you've come all the way out here, and I suppose you'll be disappointed if I don't let you go ahead; but I don't want you to take any unnecessary risks."

"Well," Mr. Hardy said hesitantly, "you've come all the way out here, and I guess you'll be let down if I don’t let you proceed; but I don’t want you to take any unnecessary risks."

"I'm thinkin' they'll pull through all right," said Hank Shale solemnly. "Let the lads be, Mr. Hardy."

"I'm thinking they'll get through this just fine," said Hank Shale seriously. "Leave the guys alone, Mr. Hardy."

So, with this encouragement, Mr. Hardy consented to let his sons continue their activities on the case. Both Frank and Joe promised to take all due precautions and next morning they resumed their search for the missing gold.

So, with this encouragement, Mr. Hardy agreed to let his sons keep working on the case. Both Frank and Joe promised to be careful, and the next morning they resumed their search for the missing gold.

During the days that followed they explored several abandoned workings, but the hunt was fruitless. They succeeded only in getting themselves well covered with dirt and grime and would return to the cabin hungry and weary. There had been no sign of any members of Black Pepper's gang. But finally Hank Shale, who had been down to the general store at Lucky Bottom one day, had news for them.

During the following days, they checked out several abandoned sites, but their search didn’t yield any results. They only managed to get themselves covered in dirt and grime and returned to the cabin feeling hungry and tired. There hadn’t been any sign of Black Pepper's gang. But eventually, Hank Shale, who had gone to the general store at Lucky Bottom one day, had some news for them.

"They be sayin' down town," declared the old miner, "that Black Pepper and his gang have broke up camp."

"They're saying downtown," declared the old miner, "that Black Pepper and his gang have broken up camp."

"Have they left Lucky Bottom?" asked Mr. Hardy quickly.

"Did they leave Lucky Bottom?" Mr. Hardy asked quickly.

Hank Shale shook his head. "Nobody knows. They had a camp somewheres back in the mountain, but they've all cleared away from it. Maybe the two lads here scared 'em."

Hank Shale shook his head. "Nobody knows. They had a camp somewhere back in the mountains, but they've all moved away from it. Maybe the two guys here scared them."

"They've likely just moved to a new camping place," remarked Frank.

"They've probably just relocated to a new campsite," Frank said.

"I hope so," said Mr. Hardy. "If they've gone away it means that the gold has gone with them. If they're still around we have a chance yet."

"I hope so," Mr. Hardy said. "If they’ve left, it means the gold left with them. If they’re still here, we still have a chance."

Frank and Joe said nothing, but when they went to bed that night they talked in whispers in the darkness.

Frank and Joe didn't say anything, but when they went to bed that night, they whispered to each other in the dark.

"What's the program for to-morrow?" asked Joe.

"What's the plan for tomorrow?" asked Joe.

"We're going to find out if any of that gang are still around."

"We're going to see if any of that crew are still around."

"Do you mean we'll go out looking for them?"

"Are you saying we’ll go out looking for them?"

"Sure! It's just as dad says—if they've gone away the gold has gone with them. If they're still hanging around we'll know there's still a good chance of finding it ourselves."

"Sure! Just like Dad says—if they've left, the gold is gone with them. If they're still around, we know there's still a good chance we can find it ourselves."

"Where shall we look?"

"Where should we search?"

"Up in the mountains. We can look around for trails in the snow."

"Up in the mountains. We can search for trails in the snow."

"Suits me, as long as they don't catch us."

"Suits me, as long as they don't find us."

"That's a chance we have to take."

"That's a risk we need to take."

So next morning, without revealing their plans to any one, the boys started out into the mountains. It was a gloomy day and the sky was overcast. The lowering, snow-covered crags loomed high above them as they headed toward a narrow defile not far from the abandoned mine where they had been captured by Black Pepper's men some days previous. It was toward this defile that the man called Jack had gone on his way to summon Black Pepper, and the boys judged that the outlaws' abandoned camp was probably somewhere in that direction.

So the next morning, without sharing their plans with anyone, the boys set out into the mountains. It was a dreary day and the sky was gray. The dark, snow-covered peaks towered above them as they approached a narrow pass not far from the abandoned mine where they had been captured by Black Pepper's gang a few days earlier. It was toward this pass that a man named Jack had gone to call Black Pepper, and the boys figured that the outlaws' abandoned camp was probably somewhere in that direction.

They discovered a narrow trail through the snow. It was a trail that had evidently been much used, for the snow was packed hard by the tramp of many feet.

They found a narrow path through the snow. It was clearly a well-trodden path, as the snow was packed down tightly by the steps of many people.

"I think we're on the right track, all right," said Frank. "Even if we only find the deserted camp we may get some clues that will help us."

"I think we're on the right track, for sure," said Frank. "Even if we only find the abandoned camp, we might get some clues that will help us."

The boys went higher up into the mountain and at last they came to a protected spot beneath an overhanging crag, where the snow had not penetrated. Here the trail ended in a long platform of bare rock. They went across it, but were unable to pick up the trail again, although they searched about in every direction.

The boys climbed higher up the mountain and finally reached a sheltered area under a jutting rock, where the snow hadn’t reached. Here, the trail ended on a long stretch of bare rock. They crossed it but couldn’t pick up the trail again, even though they looked around in every direction.

Suddenly Frank said to his brother in a low voice:

Suddenly Frank said to his brother in a quiet voice:

"Don't look around. Keep straight ahead."

"Don't glance around. Keep looking straight ahead."

"What's the matter?"

"What's wrong?"

"There's some one following us. I just caught a glimpse of him out of the corner of my eye. He's hiding behind the rocks back there."

"Someone's following us. I just saw a glimpse of him out of the corner of my eye. He's hiding behind those rocks back there."

"Let's tackle him."

"Let's take him on."

"There may be others with him. Let him follow, and if he's alone we'll grab him."

"There might be others with him. Let him follow, and if he's on his own, we'll catch him."

Without giving any indication that they had seen their pursuer, the Hardy boys cut down into a narrow ravine where huge masses of boulders made progress difficult. They came to a place where rocks rose on either side so close together that there was room for only one person to pass at a time. As soon as they had gone through the opening Frank leaped to one side, motioning to his brother to take the opposite side of the boulders. They were now completely hidden from the man who followed.

Without showing any signs that they had noticed their pursuer, the Hardy boys made their way down into a narrow ravine where large boulders made it tough to move forward. They reached a spot where rocks on either side were so close that only one person could fit through at a time. As soon as they passed through the gap, Frank jumped to one side, signaling to his brother to take the other side of the boulders. They were now completely concealed from the man who was chasing them.

"We'll get him when he comes through," whispered Frank.

"We'll catch him when he comes through," whispered Frank.

They waited expectantly.

They waited eagerly.

At last they heard the crunch of snow that indicated the unsuspecting man was approaching. Cautiously he drew nearer, step by step. The boys prepared themselves.

At last, they heard the crunch of snow that signaled the unsuspecting man was getting closer. Cautiously, he moved in, step by step. The boys got ready.

The man drew nearer. He was just entering the passage between the boulders. Frank and Joe pressed themselves against the rocks. They saw a head appear in view, then the shoulders of the man. He stepped forward and, at the same moment, they sprang at him.

The man got closer. He was just entering the gap between the boulders. Frank and Joe squeezed themselves against the rocks. They saw a head come into view, then the man's shoulders. He stepped forward, and at the same moment, they jumped at him.

Frank launched himself full on the fellow's shoulders and he gave a cry of surprise. At the same time Joe flung his arms about the man's waist and all three came tumbling to the ground. There was a flurry of snow as they struggled, but the fight was short-lived. Taken completely by surprise, the man was quickly overcome. He had reached for a revolver at his waist, but Frank had seen it in the nick of time and had struck it from his grasp. He seized the weapon himself and pressed the barrel of it to the fellow's temple.

Frank jumped onto the guy's shoulders, and he let out a surprised shout. At the same time, Joe wrapped his arms around the man's waist, and all three of them fell to the ground. Snow flew everywhere as they wrestled, but the fight didn’t last long. The man was totally caught off guard and quickly taken down. He tried to grab a revolver from his waist, but Frank noticed just in time and knocked it out of his hand. He grabbed the weapon himself and pressed the barrel against the guy's temple.

"All right! All right!" he gasped. "I give in."

"Okay! Okay!" he panted. "I give up."

There was something familiar about the voice. The man turned his head about and they saw that it was the man known as Slim, the thin-faced fellow who had been among their captors several days before.

There was something recognizable about the voice. The man turned his head and they saw it was Slim, the thin-faced guy who had been one of their captors a few days earlier.


CHAPTER XVI

Information

Info

"So it's you!" said Frank.

"So it’s you!" Frank said.

"Just my luck," muttered the outlaw, in disgust. "I might have known better!"

"Typical," grumbled the outlaw, clearly frustrated. "I should have seen this coming!"

Still leveling the revolver at Slim, Frank relinquished his grasp and stood back. Joe also withdrew. Slim, holding his hands above his head and keeping a wary eye on the weapon, got to a sitting position.

Still aiming the revolver at Slim, Frank let go and stepped back. Joe also backed away. Slim, keeping his hands raised and watching the gun closely, sat up.

"This is luck," Frank remarked. "We hadn't expected to meet again so soon."

"This is luck," Frank said. "We didn't expect to run into each other again so soon."

"If I'd had any brains I wouldn't have let myself step into a trap like this," growled Slim.

"If I had any sense, I wouldn't have walked into a trap like this," Slim grumbled.

"What were you following us for?"

"What were you following us for?"

"What were you doing up here?"

"What were you doing up here?"

"Trying to find you," said Joe cheerfully.

"Looking for you," Joe said with a smile.

"Where's Shorty and Jack and Black Pepper?"

"Where are Shorty, Jack, and Black Pepper?"

Something in the man's question made Frank think quickly. Was it possible that Slim had become separated from the rest of the gang?

Something in the man's question made Frank think fast. Could it be that Slim had gotten separated from the rest of the crew?

"I suppose you know the camp's broken up?" he remarked.

"I guess you heard that the camp's broken up?" he said.

A look of surprise leaped into Slim's face.

A look of surprise crossed Slim's face.

"No," he said, hoarsely. "I've been away. What happened? You don't mean to tell me——"

"No," he said, hoarsely. "I've been gone. What happened? You can't be telling me——"

"We're telling you nothing."

"We're telling you zip."

"They caught the gang?" went on Slim.

“They caught the gang?” Slim continued.

"Wait until we take you down to Lucky Bottom. You'll find out all about it then," said Frank, evasively. If Slim thought the rest of the outlaws were captured he might be more disposed to talk.

"Just wait until we take you to Lucky Bottom. You'll learn all about it then," Frank said, dodging the question. If Slim believed the other outlaws had been caught, he might be more willing to talk.

"I might have known it," said Slim gloomily. "They were gettin' too careless. I told 'em a hundred times they'd be tripped up, especially after lettin' you two give us the slip."

"I should have known," Slim said darkly. "They were getting too careless. I told them a hundred times they'd get caught, especially after letting you two get away."

"We might be able to make it easier for you," Frank suggested.

"We could help make this easier for you," Frank suggested.

"How?"

"How?"

"If you've got any information to give us we might be able to put in a word for you."

"If you have any information to share with us, we might be able to put in a good word for you."

Slim looked at them steadily for a moment. Then he asked:

Slim looked at them intently for a moment. Then he asked:

"What kind of information do you want?"

"What kind of information do you need?"

"You know what we're hunting for."

"You know what we're looking for."

"The gold?"

"Is it the gold?"

"Of course."

"Sure."

Slim was silent for a moment.

Slim was quiet for a moment.

"That gang has been tryin' to double-cross me all along," he said at last. "I don't owe 'em nothin'. They would have cleared out with the gold and left me here if they could."

"That gang has been trying to double-cross me the whole time," he finally said. "I don't owe them anything. They would have taken the gold and left me here if they could."

"Did they know where it was hidden?" asked Joe.

"Did they know where it was hidden?" Joe asked.

"Of course some one knew. They didn't dare make a get-away with it as long as Fenton Hardy was watchin' them. I guess the game is all up now, though. If they've got Black Pepper in jail they'll make him come through and tell where it was hidden."

"Of course someone knew. They didn't dare escape with it as long as Fenton Hardy was watching them. I guess the game's over now, though. If they've got Black Pepper in jail, they'll make him reveal where it was hidden."

"Don't the others know?"

"Don’t the others know?"

Slim shook his head. "He wouldn't tell any of us. He hid the gold himself and we couldn't find out where. He said he was afraid we'd be double-crossin' him and stealin' it on him. I think he planned to take it himself and ditch the whole bunch of us."

Slim shook his head. "He wouldn't tell any of us. He hid the gold himself, and we couldn't figure out where. He said he was afraid we’d double-cross him and steal it from him. I think he planned to take it himself and ditch all of us."

"What do you know about it?"

"What do you know about it?"

"I know everythin' about it," said Slim boastfully. "Everythin' except where it was hidden."

"I know everything about it," said Slim proudly. "Everything except where it was hidden."

"Who owned it in the first place?"

"Who initially owned it?"

"You ought to know that as well as me. Bart Dawson and one of the Coulsons had it. Dawson blew into camp a while ago with Coulson and they dug up this gold. Dawson had it hid away some place. It must be about twenty years ago since he's been here. At least that's what Black Pepper said. He was in Lucky Bottom when Dawson was here before."

"You should know this just as well as I do. Bart Dawson and one of the Coulsons were involved. Dawson came into camp a while back with Coulson, and they discovered this gold. Dawson had it hidden away somewhere. It's been about twenty years since he was here. At least, that's what Black Pepper said. He was in Lucky Bottom when Dawson was here last."

The Hardy boys exchanged glances of surprise. The names of Bart Dawson and Coulson were familiar. These were Jadbury Wilson's partners and the gold must be the gold that Wilson presumed Dawson had stolen from them. There was a mystery here that they could not fathom. If Dawson had stolen the gold, why did he bring Coulson back with him? Why had he waited for twenty years before returning to dig up the loot?

The Hardy boys exchanged looks of surprise. The names Bart Dawson and Coulson sounded familiar. These were Jadbury Wilson's partners, and the gold must be the gold that Wilson believed Dawson had stolen from them. There was a mystery here that they couldn't understand. If Dawson had stolen the gold, why did he bring Coulson back with him? Why had he waited twenty years before returning to dig up the treasure?

"And Black Pepper's gang stole it from Dawson?" persisted Frank.

"And Black Pepper's gang took it from Dawson?" Frank pressed on.

The outlaw nodded.

The outlaw nodded.

"Haven't you an idea where he hid it?"

"Haven't you got any idea where he hid it?"

"It was in one of the old mines somewhere around here. That's how we knew you fellows were after it when we found you were searching through the workings."

"It was in one of the old mines around here. That’s how we knew you guys were looking for it when we saw you searching through the workings."

"Where was your camp?"

"Where was your campsite?"

Slim looked up at them. "Don't you know?"

Slim looked up at them. "Don't you know?"

"We know it's deserted. We were on our way to try to find it."

"We know it’s empty. We were on our way to look for it."

"Don't kid me," sneered the outlaw. "You know where it is all right. You were headin' right for it when I began to follow you. You're not any too far away from it now."

"Don't mess with me," sneered the outlaw. "You know exactly where it is. You were heading straight for it when I started to follow you. You're not too far from it now."

This was a stroke of luck that they had not expected. Unwittingly, they had been on the right trail to the camp all the time.

This was a lucky break they hadn't seen coming. Without realizing it, they had been on the right path to the camp all along.

"What are you going to do with me?" asked Slim.

"What are you going to do with me?" Slim asked.

"We're going to take you down to Lucky Bottom," said Frank.

"We're going to take you to Lucky Bottom," said Frank.

"Aw, let me go," whined the outlaw. "I've told you all I know about it."

"Aw, let me go," complained the outlaw. "I've told you everything I know about it."

Frank shook his head.

Frank shook his head.

"I think you'll be safer in behind the bars."

"I think you'll be safer behind bars."

"The sheriff's a good friend of our gang. He'll fix things for me."

"The sheriff is a good friend of our crew. He'll help me out."

"That's up to you and the sheriff. If he tries to fix anything this time he'll get into trouble. We'll see to that. You'd better come with us."

"That's up to you and the sheriff. If he tries to change anything this time, he'll get in trouble. We'll make sure of that. You'd better come with us."

Frank gestured with the revolver and Slim got unwillingly to his feet. Then, making the outlaw lead the way, the boys started back down the trail toward Lucky Bottom. Both Frank and Joe were anxious to resume the search for the outlaw's camp, but they were confident that they could find it now, from the fact that Slim had admitted they were on the right trail.

Frank pointed the revolver, and Slim reluctantly stood up. Then, having the outlaw take the lead, the guys headed back down the path toward Lucky Bottom. Both Frank and Joe were eager to continue searching for the outlaw's camp, but they were sure they could find it now since Slim had acknowledged they were on the right track.

They made the journey back to town without incident. Their arrival, with Slim marching ahead and Frank keeping the outlaw covered with the revolver, created a sensation. Word quickly sped about the mining camp that one of the members of Black Pepper's notorious gang had been captured and a crowd congregated about the jail as the little procession disappeared into the sheriff's office.

They made the trip back to town without any problems. When they arrived, with Slim leading the way and Frank keeping the outlaw covered with the revolver, it caused quite a stir. News spread fast through the mining camp that one of Black Pepper's infamous gang members had been caught, and a crowd gathered around the jail as the small group made its way into the sheriff's office.

The sheriff was a shifty-eyed man of middle age, obviously weak and susceptible to public opinion. When he saw Slim led into the office he scratched his head dubiously.

The sheriff was a shifty-eyed middle-aged man, clearly weak and easily swayed by public opinion. When he saw Slim being brought into the office, he scratched his head with uncertainty.

"We want this fellow locked up," said Frank.

"We want this guy locked up," said Frank.

"What fer?" asked the sheriff reluctantly.

"What for?" asked the sheriff hesitantly.

"For being mixed up in the gold robbery, for one thing. If that isn't enough you can hold him for carrying a revolver. If that isn't enough we'll charge him with assault, pointing a weapon, and half a dozen other things."

"For being involved in the gold robbery, for one thing. If that’s not enough, you can also charge him for carrying a revolver. If that still isn’t enough, we’ll hit him with assault, pointing a weapon, and a bunch of other charges."

"I don't know," drawled the sheriff. "It ain't quite usual——"

"I don't know," the sheriff said slowly. "It's not really common——"

Clearly he did not wish to put Slim in a cell. Frank became impatient.

Clearly, he didn't want to put Slim in a cell. Frank was getting impatient.

"Look here," he said. "You're sheriff here and your duty is to lock up lawbreakers. We'll give you all the evidence you need against this chap, but we want him kept where he can't do any harm. If you're afraid of Black Pepper——"

"Listen," he said. "You're the sheriff here, and your job is to lock up criminals. We'll provide you with all the evidence you need against this guy, but we want him kept somewhere he can't cause any trouble. If you're worried about Black Pepper—"

"I'm not afraid of nobody," said the sheriff hastily.

"I'm not afraid of anyone," said the sheriff quickly.

Just then the door opened and a bearded old prospector strode in. He went right up to the desk and shook his fist beneath the sheriff's nose.

Just then, the door swung open and a bearded old prospector walked in. He went straight to the desk and shook his fist right in front of the sheriff's face.

"Lock him up," he roared. "We've stood for about enough from you, and I don't care whether you're sheriff or not. If you're goin' to encourage outlaws and thieves, me and the boys will mighty soon see that there's a new sheriff in this here man's town."

"Lock him up," he yelled. "We've put up with enough from you, and I don't care if you're the sheriff or not. If you're going to support outlaws and thieves, me and the guys are going to make sure there's a new sheriff in this town real soon."

Frank and Joe then saw that other miners were standing in the doorway, crowding against one another, muttering truculently.

Frank and Joe then noticed that other miners were huddled in the doorway, pushing against each other and grumbling angrily.

The sheriff blinked, wavered, and finally gave in.

The sheriff blinked, hesitated, and finally relented.

"I just wanted to make sure it was all right," he muttered. "Don't want to lock anybody up that don't deserve it."

"I just wanted to make sure it was okay," he mumbled. "I don't want to lock anyone up who doesn't deserve it."

"You know mighty well that Slim Briggs deserves it, if any one in this camp ever did," retorted the old miner. "Lock him up."

"You know very well that Slim Briggs deserves it, if anyone in this camp ever did," the old miner shot back. "Lock him up."

The sheriff took a ponderous bunch of keys from his pocket and unlocked a heavy door leading to the cells. "This way, Slim," he said regretfully.

The sheriff pulled out a heavy bunch of keys from his pocket and unlocked a solid door that led to the cells. "This way, Slim," he said with a hint of regret.

Slim Briggs followed him into the cell. He looked around, plainly expecting to see the rest of the gang in jail as well. Suspicion dawned on him.

Slim Briggs followed him into the cell. He looked around, clearly expecting to see the rest of the gang locked up too. Doubt settled in.

"Where's the others?" he demanded wrathfully.

"Where are the others?" he asked angrily.

"What others?" asked the sheriff mildly.

"What others?" the sheriff asked gently.

"Black Pepper—the rest of the boys."

"Black Pepper – the competitors."

"They ain't here."

"They're not here."

Slim gaped in astonishment.

Slim stared in disbelief.

"They ain't here?" he shouted finally. "Why, those boys told me they'd all been rounded up! I spilled everything I knew, just so I'd get let off easy!"

"They're not here?" he yelled at last. "Those guys told me they had everyone captured! I shared everything I knew just to get a lighter sentence!"

"You're the only one that's been pinched," said the sheriff.

"You're the only one who's been caught," said the sheriff.

"So far," added Frank pointedly.

"So far," Frank added pointedly.

Then, as Slim Briggs burst into a wild outbreak of bitter recrimination against the way in which he had deceived himself, the boys withdrew and the cell door clanged.

Then, as Slim Briggs erupted in a furious outpouring of harsh self-blame for how he had fooled himself, the boys stepped back and the cell door slammed shut.

The old miner laughed and slapped Frank on the shoulder.

The old miner chuckled and patted Frank on the shoulder.

"I guess Bart Dawson come along just in time!" he declared. "Sheriff would have let that bird go if I hadn't got the boys to back you up." He turned to the sheriff. "We've seen that Slim is in jail," he said. "You're responsible for keepin' him there. If he gets out—" he snapped his fingers ominously—"it means a new sheriff in Lucky Bottom."

"I guess Bart Dawson showed up just in time!" he declared. "The sheriff would have let that guy go if I hadn't gotten the boys to back you up." He turned to the sheriff. "We've confirmed that Slim is in jail," he said. "You're responsible for keeping him there. If he gets out—" he snapped his fingers ominously—"it means a new sheriff in Lucky Bottom."


CHAPTER XVII

The Outlaw's Notebook

The Outlaw's Notebook

"Are you Bart Dawson?" asked Frank.

"Are you Bart Dawson?" Frank asked.

"That's me," said the old man. "I'm the fellow they stole that there gold from."

"That's me," said the old man. "I'm the guy they stole that gold from."

The Hardy boys looked curiously at the old miner. From what they had heard of Bart Dawson from Jadbury Wilson they had been prepared to dislike him. But he appeared so genial and friendly and his grizzled old face was apparently so honest that they could not help but feel drawn to him. He certainly did not look like the sort of man who would desert his partners and rob them in the way Jadbury Wilson had described. Still, the evidence seemed all against him. He had betrayed his comrades and decamped with their gold, according to Wilson's story.

The Hardy boys looked curiously at the old miner. From what they’d heard about Bart Dawson from Jadbury Wilson, they were ready to dislike him. But he seemed so friendly and his grizzled old face looked so honest that they couldn’t help but feel drawn to him. He definitely didn’t seem like the kind of guy who would abandon his partners and rob them like Jadbury Wilson had said. Still, the evidence seemed stacked against him. He had betrayed his friends and run off with their gold, according to Wilson’s story.

But why, argued Frank, should he wait twenty years to return for the wealth he had hidden? Why should he return with one of the Coulsons? Could it be possible that the pair had been in league with one another against Jadbury Wilson? The mystery defied explanation, but the more Frank looked at the jovial, honest face of the old man before him the more he was convinced that Bart Dawson had none of the earmarks of either thief or traitor.

But why, Frank argued, should he wait twenty years to come back for the wealth he had hidden? Why should he return with one of the Coulsons? Is it possible that the two had been working together against Jadbury Wilson? The mystery didn’t make sense, but the more Frank looked at the cheerful, honest face of the old man in front of him, the more he was convinced that Bart Dawson didn’t have any of the traits of a thief or a traitor.

"We've got one of 'em behind the bars now," said Dawson, rubbing his hands with satisfaction. "I only wish we had 'em all."

"We've got one of them behind bars now," said Dawson, rubbing his hands in satisfaction. "I just wish we had them all."

"Perhaps we will have them all before long," remarked Frank. "We've run across a few clues that may lead to something."

"Maybe we'll have them all soon," Frank said. "We've come across some clues that might lead to something."

"That's good! That's good!" declared the old man. "Do your best, lads, and you may be sure Bart Dawson won't forget you."

"That's great! That's great!" the old man said. "Do your best, guys, and you can be sure Bart Dawson won't forget you."

Frank and Joe forbore any mention of the name of Jadbury Wilson. It was best, they decided, to keep that information to themselves until they should learn more about the affair of the stolen gold. They had long since learned that one of the axioms of successful detective work is to listen much and say little. Accordingly, they bade good-bye to Bart Dawson and left the jail.

Frank and Joe avoided mentioning Jadbury Wilson's name. They decided it was better to keep that information to themselves until they found out more about the stolen gold case. They had long understood that a key rule of successful detective work is to listen more and say less. So, they said goodbye to Bart Dawson and left the jail.

"Where to?" asked Joe.

"Where to?" Joe asked.

"Back to where we caught Slim Briggs. We were on the right trail to the camp."

"Back to where we found Slim Briggs. We were on the right path to the camp."

"But if the outlaws have left there isn't much use going up there now."

"But if the outlaws have left, there's not much point in going up there now."

"We never know what we'll find."

"We never know what we'll discover."

The boys made their way up into the mountains again and, after about an hour of steady traveling, found themselves on the trail that led into the defile where they had trapped Slim so neatly. On the way they discussed their meeting with Bart Dawson.

The boys hiked up into the mountains again and, after about an hour of consistent walking, found themselves on the trail that led into the narrow pass where they had caught Slim so expertly. Along the way, they talked about their encounter with Bart Dawson.

"I can't imagine that old fellow being the kind of man who would desert his partners and steal their gold, the way Jadbury Wilson described," said Frank, for the tenth time. "I just can't figure it out at all! You can tell with half an eye that he isn't a crook."

"I can't picture that old guy being the kind of man who would abandon his partners and steal their gold, like Jadbury Wilson said," Frank said for the tenth time. "I just can't make sense of it! You can see with just a glance that he isn't a criminal."

"Yet Jadbury Wilson was absolutely convinced that he had left them all in the lurch."

"Yet Jadbury Wilson was completely sure that he had abandoned them all."

"And he had the gold in his possession. We know that. He came back here to dig it up. That shows he must have hidden it, as Wilson said he did. The whole story hangs together mighty well."

"And he had the gold with him. We know that. He returned here to unearth it. That indicates he must have hidden it, just like Wilson said he did. The entire story fits together pretty well."

"Yet why should he bring Coulson with him?" objected Joe.

"Yet why should he take Coulson with him?" argued Joe.

"That's another queer angle. I can't figure it out at all. I think we should see Coulson and tell him what we know, tell him what Jadbury Wilson told us, and ask him about it."

"That's another weird angle. I can't make sense of it at all. I think we should check in with Coulson and share what we know, tell him what Jadbury Wilson said, and ask him about it."

"That's the best idea. But isn't it strange how Jadbury Wilson, away back in Bayport, should be connected with this case, away out here in Montana?"

"That's a great idea. But isn't it weird how Jadbury Wilson, all the way back in Bayport, is tied to this case out here in Montana?"

"It's a coincidence, all right. We just seem to have blundered into the affair from both ends. Bart Dawson and Coulson know a lot that we don't know, but then we know a lot that Bart Dawson and Coulson don't know."

"It's definitely a coincidence. We just seem to have stumbled into the situation from both sides. Bart Dawson and Coulson know a lot that we don't, but we also know a lot that Bart Dawson and Coulson aren't aware of."

"I think we hold the advantage. To-morrow we'll try to find Coulson."

"I think we have the upper hand. Tomorrow, we'll try to locate Coulson."

The boys were going down the defile now and they passed between the overhanging rocks where they had captured the outlaw. The marks of the struggle were still plainly evident in the snow.

The boys were heading down the narrow path now, and they passed between the overhanging rocks where they had caught the outlaw. The signs of the struggle were still clearly visible in the snow.

"Poor Slim!" remarked Frank, with a laugh. "He'll be kicking himself all around the cell for talking so much."

"Poor Slim!" Frank laughed. "He'll be cursing himself all over the cell for chatting so much."

"He was nicely fooled. He was sure the rest of the gang were all in jail."

"He was easily tricked. He was convinced the rest of the group was all in jail."

"We didn't tell any lies about it. He took it for granted that the outlaws were arrested. All we did was to look wise and let him keep on thinking so." The boys chuckled at the recollection of the ease with which the dull-witted Slim had been duped.

"We didn't lie about it. He assumed the outlaws were arrested. All we did was act smart and let him keep believing that." The boys laughed at how easily the not-so-bright Slim had been deceived.

"If only the rest of them are that easy!" said Frank.

"If only the others were that easy!" said Frank.

"No such luck. I'm thinking this Black Pepper will give us trouble before we are through. He seems to have Lucky Bottom pretty well under his thumb."

"No such luck. I think this Black Pepper is going to cause us problems before we’re done. He seems to have Lucky Bottom pretty much under his control."

"He has the sheriff buffaloed, at any rate, by the looks of things. If Bart Dawson hadn't shown up when he did I don't think Slim Briggs would have been put in jail at all."

"He has the sheriff fooled, at least from how it seems. If Bart Dawson hadn't arrived when he did, I don't think Slim Briggs would have ended up in jail at all."

The trail now led toward a clump of trees, and here there were evidences of recent habitation. Some of the trees had been chopped down, presumably for firewood, and the stumps rose above the level of the snow. There were numerous footprints about the little grove and in some places the snow was closely packed down. As the boys drew closer they caught a glimpse of a small cabin in the midst of the grove.

The path now went toward a group of trees, and here there were signs of recent activity. Some of the trees had been cut down, likely for firewood, and the stumps stood above the level of the snow. There were many footprints around the small grove, and in some areas, the snow was packed down tightly. As the boys got closer, they spotted a small cabin in the middle of the grove.

"We'll go easy from now on," said Frank quietly. "Some of them may have come back."

"We'll take it easy from now on," Frank said quietly. "Some of them might have come back."

The boys went cautiously forward, keeping to the shelter of the trees as much as possible. Every few moments they would stop and listen.

The boys moved carefully ahead, sticking to the cover of the trees as much as they could. Every few moments, they would pause and listen.

But they heard not a sound. There was not a voice from the cabin. The only noises were the rustling of the trees in the wind. Quietly, the Hardy boys stole up toward the cabin. It stood in a little clearing in the wood. At the edge of the clearing they waited, but still they heard nothing, and finally Frank was satisfied that the place was, in fact, deserted.

But they didn’t hear a sound. There was no voice coming from the cabin. The only noises were the trees rustling in the wind. Quietly, the Hardy boys crept toward the cabin. It was located in a small clearing in the woods. They waited at the edge of the clearing, but still heard nothing, and eventually, Frank was convinced that the place was actually deserted.

"No one here," he said, in a tone of relief. "We'll take a look around."

"No one here," he said, sounding relieved. "Let's check it out."

They advanced boldly across the clearing, directly toward the door of the cabin. It was half open. Frank peered inside.

They walked confidently across the clearing, heading straight for the cabin door. It was half open. Frank looked inside.

The place was deserted. The cabin was sparsely furnished, with a rude table, two chairs, and bunks on either side. There was a small iron stove at the far end of the building and the place was dimly lighted by one window.

The place was empty. The cabin had minimal furnishings, with a basic table, two chairs, and bunks on either side. There was a small iron stove at the far end of the room, and it was dimly lit by a single window.

There was every evidence that the outlaws had left the place in a hurry. Papers, articles of clothing and rubbish of all kinds lay about the floor, scattered here and there in abandon. One of the chairs was lying overturned on the floor. The place was in confusion.

There was clear evidence that the outlaws had rushed out of the place. Papers, clothes, and all sorts of trash were strewn across the floor, scattered haphazardly. One of the chairs was overturned. The place was a mess.

The boys entered.

The guys walked in.

"Looks as if they didn't waste much time in getting out," remarked Joe.

"Looks like they didn’t waste much time getting out," Joe commented.

"I'll say they didn't. The cabin looks as if a cyclone had hit it."

"I'll say they didn't. The cabin looks like a tornado went through it."

"Wonder if there'd be any use looking through those papers." Joe indicated a scattered heap of old envelopes, letters, tattered magazines and torn sheets of paper lying on the floor.

"Wonder if it would be worth checking out those papers." Joe pointed to a messy pile of old envelopes, letters, worn-out magazines, and ripped sheets of paper on the floor.

"That's just what I was thinking." Frank scooped up a handful of the papers and sat down on a bunk. He began to sort them over. The magazines he flung to one side as worthless. Some of the sheets of paper contained nothing but crude attempts at drawing or penciled lists of figures presumably done by some of the outlaws while idling away their time in the cabin.

"That's exactly what I was thinking." Frank grabbed a handful of the papers and sat down on a bunk. He started sorting through them. He tossed the magazines aside as useless. Some of the sheets had nothing but rough sketches or lists of figures, likely created by some of the outlaws while they were passing the time in the cabin.

One or two of the letters, Frank put to one side, as liable to give some clue to the identity of members of the gang. When he had looked through the first handful of papers he picked up some more.

One or two of the letters, Frank set aside, as they might give some hint about the identity of the gang members. After he went through the first few papers, he grabbed some more.

Suddenly he gave an exclamation of satisfaction.

Suddenly, he let out a satisfied shout.

"Find something?" asked Joe.

"Find anything?" asked Joe.

"This may be valuable." Frank held up a small black notebook and began flipping the pages. On the inside of the cover he read:

"This could be useful." Frank held up a small black notebook and started flipping through the pages. On the inside of the cover, he read:

"Black Pepper—his book."

"Black Pepper—his book."

"This is the captain's own little record book. There should be some information here."

"This is the captain's personal logbook. There should be some information in here."

Frank began studying the book carefully. The first few pages gave him little satisfaction, the writing consisting largely of cryptic abbreviations evidently in an improvised code known only to the outlaw himself. There were the names of several men written on another page, and among them he recognized the names of Slim, Shorty and Jack, the trio who had captured them at the abandoned mine working. Across from their names had been marked various sums of money, evidently their shares of the gang's takings in some robbery.

Frank started examining the book closely. The first few pages didn’t satisfy him much, as the writing was mostly made up of cryptic abbreviations that seemed to be in a makeshift code known only to the outlaw. There were names of several men listed on another page, and he recognized Slim, Shorty, and Jack among them—the trio who had caught them at the abandoned mine. Next to their names, various amounts of money were noted, clearly representing their shares of the gang's earnings from some robbery.

Then, on the next page, he found a crude map.

Then, on the next page, he found a rough map.

He studied it curiously. It looked something like the ground floor plan of an extremely crude house. There was one large chamber with two passages leading from it. One of these passages was marked with an X, and each passage led to a small chamber. From one of these led still another passage which branched into a tiny room, in one corner of which was inscribed a small circle.

He looked at it with curiosity. It resembled the rough layout of a very basic house. There was one big room with two hallways coming out of it. One of these hallways had an X marked on it, and each hallway led to a small room. From one of these, there was another hallway that split into a tiny room, in one corner of which was marked a small circle.

"That's the funniest plan of a house I ever saw!" said Joe, looking over his brother's shoulder.

"That's the funniest house plan I've ever seen!" said Joe, looking over his brother's shoulder.

Frank studied the plan for a few moments and then looked up.

Frank examined the plan for a moment and then glanced up.

"Why, it isn't a house at all. It's a mine!" he declared. "This is the plan of a mine. This big room is the main working at the bottom of the shaft, and these passages are tunnels leading out of it."

"Why, it’s not a house at all. It’s a mine!" he said. "This is the layout of a mine. This big room is the main working area at the bottom of the shaft, and these passages are tunnels leading out of it."

"Perhaps it's the mine where the gold is hidden!" cried Joe, in excitement.

"Maybe it's the mine where the gold is buried!" Joe exclaimed, filled with excitement.

"There may be something about it on another page." Frank turned the leaf of the notebook. There he found what he was so eagerly seeking.

"There might be something about it on another page." Frank flipped through the notebook. There, he found what he had been looking for so eagerly.

At the top of the page was written, in a scrawling, unformed hand: "Lone Tree Mine." Beneath that he found the following:

At the top of the page, it was written in a messy, unclear handwriting: "Lone Tree Mine." Below that, he found the following:

"Follow passage X to second cave, then down tunnel to blue room. Gold at circle."

"Go through passage X to the second cave, then down the tunnel to the blue room. The gold is at the circle."

Frank looked up at his brother.

Frank looked up at his brother.

"This is what we wanted," he said jubilantly. "They've had the gold hidden there all the time. All we have to do now is find the Lone Tree Mine and we'll recover the stuff in no time."

"This is what we wanted," he said excitedly. "They've had the gold hidden there this whole time. All we have to do now is find the Lone Tree Mine, and we'll get it back in no time."

"Unless the outlaws have taken it away by now," pointed out Joe.

"Unless the outlaws have taken it by now," Joe pointed out.

"That's right, too. I hadn't thought of that. They may have taken it away right after they abandoned this camp. Well, we've just got to take our chances on that. If they've left it in the mine this long they may think it's safe enough there a while longer." Frank got up from the bunk and stuffed the notebook into his pocket. His eyes were sparkling with excitement. "Joe, I believe we're on the right track! We know just where the stuff has been hidden and I've a hunch it's there yet. We haven't any time to lose. Let's start right now, before those rascals get ahead of us, and hunt for the Lone Tree Mine."

"That's true too. I hadn’t considered that. They might have taken it right after they left this camp. Well, we just have to take our chances. If they’ve left it in the mine this long, they might think it’s safe there for a while longer." Frank got up from the bunk and shoved the notebook into his pocket. His eyes were shining with excitement. "Joe, I think we’re onto something! We know exactly where the stuff is hidden, and I have a feeling it’s still there. We don’t have any time to waste. Let’s start now, before those troublemakers get ahead of us, and look for the Lone Tree Mine."

"Why, I'll bet I know where that is!" declared Joe. "Don't you remember an old mine working near where they caught us the other day? There was a big pine right by the top of the shaft, standing all by itself."

"Hey, I think I know where that is!" Joe said. "Don’t you remember that old mine close to where they caught us the other day? There was a big pine tree right by the top of the shaft, all by itself."

"I'll bet that's the place! Come on! We'll try it, anyway!"

"I bet that's the spot! Let's go! We'll give it a shot, anyway!"

Hastily, they left the little cabin. They were sure now that they were on the trail of the hidden gold. Frank remembered the lone pine tree that Joe had mentioned; it seemed to identify the abandoned working as the place they sought.

Hastily, they left the little cabin. They were now sure they were on the trail of the hidden gold. Frank remembered the lone pine tree that Joe had mentioned; it seemed to point to the abandoned site as the place they were looking for.

It was snowing heavily as they started down the trail but the boys scarcely noticed it in their excitement. They even forgot that they had not had their lunch.

It was snowing heavily as they started down the trail, but the boys hardly noticed it because they were so excited. They even forgot that they hadn’t had their lunch.

"If the outlaws haven't beaten us to it," declared Frank, "we'll have that gold before the day is out!"

"If the outlaws haven’t gotten to it first," Frank declared, "we’ll have that gold before the day’s over!"


CHAPTER XVIII

The Blizzard

The Blizzard

The Hardy boys set off down the trail at a good pace. The wind howled down from the crags and whistled through the trees. The entire mountain was veiled in a great mist of swirling snow and, as the wind rose, the snow stung their faces and slashed against them.

The Hardy boys started down the trail at a brisk pace. The wind howled down from the cliffs and whistled through the trees. The whole mountain was covered in a thick mist of swirling snow, and as the wind picked up, the snow stung their faces and whipped against them.

"Storm coming up," said Frank, burying his chin deeper into his coat collar.

"There's a storm brewing," Frank said, tucking his chin further into his coat collar.

"I hope it doesn't get any worse. We'll never find the place."

"I hope it doesn't get worse. We'll never find the place."

"We won't give up now. If we wait until to-morrow it may be too late."

"We won't give up now. If we wait until tomorrow, it might be too late."

The storm grew rapidly worse. The snowfall was so heavy that it obscured even the tops of the great masses of rock and it quickly drifted over the trail so that the boys were forced to follow the path by memory. This was difficult, as in some places the trail had wound about through tumbled masses of boulders and when it was hidden by snow they had to guess at its intricate windings. Several times Frank lost it altogether, but he was always able to pick up the trail again in some place that was sheltered from the storm.

The storm quickly got worse. The snowfall was so heavy that it covered even the tops of the massive rocks, and it quickly drifted over the trail, forcing the boys to rely on memory. This was tough, as in some spots the trail had wound around piles of boulders, and when it was buried in snow, they had to guess its complicated twists and turns. Several times, Frank completely lost the trail, but he could always find it again in a spot that was sheltered from the storm.

The boys struggled on in silence. The wind was increasing in volume and the snow was so heavy that Joe could scarcely see the dim form of his brother but a few yards ahead. Suddenly he saw his brother stop.

The boys trudged on in silence. The wind was getting stronger and the snow was so thick that Joe could barely make out his brother's figure just a few yards ahead. Suddenly, he saw his brother come to a halt.

"I've lost the trail!" shouted Frank, turning back.

"I've lost the trail!" Frank shouted as he turned around.

They were standing ankle deep in snow. There was not the slightest vestige of a path. High above them they could discern the gloomy mass of a steep rock cliff and before them loomed a sloping declivity of rock that afforded not the slightest foothold.

They were standing in snow up to their ankles. There wasn't a trace of a path anywhere. High above them, they could make out the dark outline of a steep rock cliff, and in front of them was a sloping stretch of rock that offered no footholds at all.

"I lost the trail farther back, but I thought I was following it all right and could pick it up farther on. We'll have to turn back."

"I lost the trail a while ago, but I thought I was on the right track and could find it again up ahead. We need to head back."

They retraced their steps. So furiously was it snowing that their own footprints were almost obliterated and they could scarcely find their way back to the place where they had left the trail. They found it again, however, and struck out in another direction.

They backtracked. The snow was falling so heavily that their footprints were nearly gone, and they could barely find their way back to where they had left the path. They did find it again, though, and headed off in a different direction.

It was growing bitterly cold, and although they were warmly clad they began to feel the effect of the chill wind that swept down from the icy mountain slopes. They pulled their caps down about their ears and made their way slowly forward against the terrific wind that buffeted them and flung sheets of snow against them.

It was getting really cold, and even though they were dressed warmly, they started to feel the chill from the icy wind blowing down from the mountain slopes. They pulled their hats down over their ears and moved slowly forward against the harsh wind that hit them and threw sheets of snow at them.

Frank gave a shout of triumph when he finally picked up the trail again in the shelter of some huge rocks where the snow had not yet penetrated. They advanced with new courage.

Frank shouted with joy when he finally found the trail again in the protection of some massive rocks where the snow hadn’t reached yet. They moved forward with renewed confidence.

At length they emerged through the defile where the trail to the outlaw's deserted camp led off the main trail up the mountain, and then they rested.

At last, they came out of the narrow passage where the path to the outlaw's abandoned camp branched off the main trail up the mountain, and then they took a break.

Far below them they could see the slope of the mountain, veiled in sweeping banners of snow that shifted and swirled madly in the blustering wind. The town was hidden from view, obscured by the white blizzard.

Far below them, they could see the mountain slope covered in large sheets of snow that shifted and swirled wildly in the strong wind. The town was out of sight, hidden by the white snowstorm.

"Do you think we should try to make it?" asked Frank.

"Do you think we should give it a shot?" asked Frank.

"The mine?"

"The quarry?"

"Yes."

Yes.

"You're leading this procession. Whatever you want to do."

"You're in charge of this procession. Do whatever you want."

"If you think the storm is too bad, we'll start for the cabin."

"If you think the storm is too severe, we’ll head to the cabin."

"What would you rather do?"

"What would you prefer?"

"I hate to give up now," replied Frank, after a moment of hesitation.

"I really don't want to give up now," Frank replied after a moment of pause.

"I feel the same way about it," Joe said. "I vote we try to find the mine. Once we get there we'll be able to get in out of the storm, anyway."

"I feel the same way about it," Joe said. "I say we try to find the mine. Once we get there, we can at least get out of the storm."

"I thought you'd say that," laughed Frank. "We'll head for the Lone Tree Mine then. As far as I can remember it is just below us, and then over to the right."

"I figured you would say that," laughed Frank. "Let's go to the Lone Tree Mine then. As far as I can remember, it's just below us and then over to the right."

"We'll find it, I guess."

"We'll find it, I guess."

They started down the slope. But once they left the shelter of the rocks where they had rested they found that the fury of the storm was increased tenfold on the mountainside. The full force of the blizzard struck them.

They began their descent down the slope. But as soon as they moved away from the protection of the rocks where they had taken a break, they realized that the intensity of the storm was amplified tenfold on the mountainside. The full force of the blizzard hit them.

The wind shrieked with a thousand voices. The snow came sweeping down on them as though lashed by invisible whips. The roar of the storm sounded in their ears and the fine snow almost blinded them.

The wind howled with a thousand voices. The snow came pouring down on them as if whipped by invisible forces. The storm roared in their ears, and the fine snow nearly blinded them.

"It's worse than I thought," muttered Frank.

"It's worse than I thought," Frank said under his breath.

The slope was steep and precipitous. They could not distinguish the details of the trail other than as a vaguely winding path that led steadily downward. Frank lost his footing on a slippery rock and went tumbling down the declivity for several yards before he came to a stop in a snowbank. He got to his feet slowly and limped on, suffering from a bruised ankle.

The slope was steep and abrupt. They couldn’t make out the details of the trail except as a vaguely winding path that went steadily downward. Frank lost his balance on a slippery rock and tumbled down the hillside for several yards before stopping in a snowbank. He got to his feet slowly and limped on, nursing a bruised ankle.

The trail wound about a steep cliff and he skirted the base of it, then disappeared between two high masses of rock. Joe could dimly see the figure of his brother, and he hastened on so as not to lose sight of him.

The path twisted around a steep cliff, and he walked along its base before disappearing between two large rock formations. Joe could faintly see his brother's figure, so he quickened his pace to keep him in sight.

But when Joe came around the rocks he was confronted by an opaque cloud of snow, like a huge white screen that had dropped from the skies. He could not see Frank at all.

But when Joe rounded the rocks, he was met by a thick cloud of snow, like a massive white curtain that had descended from the sky. He couldn't see Frank at all.

He followed the trail as well as he could, but in a few moments he came to a stop. He was out on the open mountainside and the winds at this point converged so that the snow seemed to be swirling about him from all sides. The faint trail had been wholly obliterated.

He followed the path as best he could, but soon he stopped. He was out on the open mountainside, and the winds at this point came together so that the snow seemed to swirl around him from every direction. The faint trail had been completely wiped out.

He shouted.

He yelled.

"Frank! Frank!"

"Hey, Frank!"

But the wind flung the words back into his teeth. A feeling of panic seized him for a moment, but he quickly calmed himself, for he realized that when Frank looked behind and saw they were separated, he would retrace his steps.

But the wind threw the words back in his face. For a moment, he felt a rush of panic, but he quickly collected himself, realizing that when Frank turned around and noticed they were apart, he would come back for him.

He went on uncertainly a few paces, until it occurred to him that he might be wandering in the wrong direction and that if Frank did turn back he might not be able to find him. So he tried to return to the trail again. But the snow was falling so heavily by now that he seemed to be wandering in an enormous grey void, from which all direction had been erased.

He walked a few steps with hesitation until he realized he might be going the wrong way and that if Frank turned back, he could lose track of him. So he tried to get back to the trail. But the snow was falling so heavily now that it felt like he was lost in a huge gray nothingness, where all sense of direction had faded away.

He was hopelessly lost, so he stood where he was and shouted again and again. There was no answer. He could only hear the constant howling of the wind, the sweep and swish of snow.

He was totally lost, so he just stood there and shouted over and over. There was no reply. All he could hear was the relentless howling of the wind and the rustling of the snow.

Once he thought he heard a faint cry from far ahead, but he could not be sure, and although he listened intently he could hear it no more.

Once he thought he heard a distant cry from up ahead, but he couldn't be sure, and even though he listened closely, he couldn't hear it again.

As he stood there on the rocks, with the snow sweeping down on him and with the wind howling about him, with only the gaunt, gloomy shapes of the boulders looming out of the heavy mist of storm, Joe felt the icy clutch of the cold and he began to beat his arms against his chest so as to keep warm. He knew the danger of inaction in such a blizzard.

As he stood there on the rocks, with the snow falling around him and the wind howling, with only the stark, gloomy shapes of the boulders emerging from the thick storm mist, Joe felt the freezing grip of the cold and started to rub his arms against his chest to stay warm. He understood the risk of doing nothing in such a blizzard.

Anything was better than remaining where he was. He struggled forward, slipped and fell on the rocks, regained his feet, and moved slowly on into the teeth of the wind. He did not know whether he was following the trail or not but, to the best of his judgment, he tried to descend the slope.

Anything was better than staying where he was. He pushed himself forward, slipped, and fell on the rocks, got back up, and slowly moved on into the wind. He had no idea if he was following the path or not, but he tried to go down the slope as best as he could.

As for Frank, he had been plunging doggedly on through the storm, confident that Joe was close behind, and it was not until he had gone far down the trail that he became aware that his brother was not following. He turned, and when he could no longer discern the figure in the storm behind he retraced his steps, shouting at the top of his lungs.

As for Frank, he had been pushing through the storm, sure that Joe was right behind him. It wasn’t until he had traveled quite a distance down the path that he realized his brother wasn’t following. He turned around, and when he could no longer see Joe’s figure in the storm, he went back, yelling as loud as he could.

There was no answer.

No response.

He searched about, going to left and right of the trail. He did not dare go far, being fearful of losing the trail himself. Frank was alarmed lest Joe had slipped and fallen on the rocks and injured himself. If he were unable to proceed he would freeze to death, lying helpless on the mountainside.

He looked around, moving left and right off the trail. He didn't want to go too far, afraid he might lose the trail himself. Frank was worried that Joe had slipped and fallen on the rocks and hurt himself. If he couldn’t move, he would freeze to death, stuck helplessly on the mountainside.

With this thought in his mind, he searched frantically. He tried to follow back up the trail, but the snow had swept over his footsteps and he soon found himself knee-deep in a heavy drift and he knew he had lost the path.

With this thought in his mind, he searched frantically. He tried to follow the trail back, but the snow had buried his footsteps, and he soon found himself knee-deep in a thick drift, realizing he had lost the path.

He tried to regain the trail, but the white screen of snow was like a shroud over the rocks and he had lost all sense of direction.

He tried to find the trail again, but the white blanket of snow covered the rocks like a shroud, and he had completely lost his sense of direction.

He floundered about in the snow aimlessly, but the trail constantly evaded him. Frank set his jaw grimly and went hither and thither, stopping every little while to shout. He knew that the wind drowned out his voice and he realized the futility of his cries, but still he hoped that there was just a chance that Joe might hear him.

He stumbled around in the snow without purpose, but the path kept slipping away from him. Frank gritted his teeth and wandered back and forth, pausing often to shout. He knew the wind muffled his voice, and he understood how pointless his cries were, but he still held on to the hope that Joe might hear him.

Frank Hardy felt an overpowering sense of loneliness as he wandered about among the rocks and the deep drifts. He seemed to be alone in a world of swirling, shrieking winds and flailing snow that stormed down from a sky of leaden hue.

Frank Hardy felt an overwhelming sense of loneliness as he walked among the rocks and heavy snowdrifts. He seemed to be alone in a world of swirling, howling winds and falling snow that poured down from a gray sky.

He shouted again and again, but to no avail.

He shouted over and over, but it didn't help.

It was mid-afternoon, but the sky was so dark that it seemed almost dusk. If darkness fell and they were lost out on the mountain there was little hope that they would survive until morning. They would perish from exposure.

It was mid-afternoon, but the sky was so dark that it felt almost like evening. If night came and they were lost on the mountain, there was little chance they would survive until morning. They would freeze to death.

"I'd better go back to Hank Shale's place and get a searching party to come up and look for Joe," he thought.

"I should head back to Hank Shale's place and get a search party to come up and look for Joe," he thought.

This seemed the only sensible solution. But when he turned and tried to find the trail down the mountain again he found that it eluded him. There was not the vestige of a trail, not the sign of a path.

This felt like the only reasonable solution. But when he turned around and tried to locate the trail down the mountain again, he realized it was slipping away from him. There wasn't a trace of a trail, not a hint of a path.

"And I'm lost too!" he muttered.

"And I'm lost too!" he mumbled.

The wind shrieked down from the rocks. The snow swirled furiously about him. The blizzard raged. The roaring of the storm drummed in his ears as he stumbled and floundered about among the rocks and snow.

The wind howled down from the rocks. The snow swirled wildly around him. The blizzard was intense. The sound of the storm pounded in his ears as he tripped and struggled through the rocks and snow.

The Hardy boys were lost, separated, in the storm.

The Hardy boys were lost, separated in the storm.


CHAPTER XIX

The Lone Tree

The Lone Tree

Suddenly, Frank Hardy had an inspiration.

Suddenly, Frank Hardy had a great idea.

In the shelter of some rocks he cleared away the snow, then began to search about for wood in order to build a fire. If he were lost the best plan was to build a fire which would serve the double purpose of keeping him warm and possibly guiding Joe toward him as well.

In the cover of some rocks, he cleared away the snow and started looking for wood to build a fire. If he was lost, the best strategy was to make a fire that would keep him warm and might also help Joe find him.

He found some small shrubs and stunted trees and managed to break off enough branches to serve as the basis of a fair-sized blaze. He had matches in a waterproof box in his pocket, and after several unsuccessful attempts he finally managed to get a fire going. The wood was damp, but the small twigs caught the blaze and within a few minutes the flames were leaping higher and higher and casting warmth and radiance.

He found some small bushes and short trees and managed to snap off enough branches to create a decent-sized fire. He had matches in a waterproof box in his pocket, and after several failed attempts, he finally got a fire going. The wood was wet, but the small twigs caught the flames, and within a few minutes, the fire was roaring higher and higher, giving off warmth and light.

Frank crouched beneath the rocks and warmed himself by the fire. Once in a while he got up and went away to search for more wood to cast on the blaze. Occasionally he peered through the screen of snow in the hope of seeing some sign of Joe. At intervals, he shouted until he was hoarse in the hope of attracting his brother's attention.

Frank crouched under the rocks and warmed himself by the fire. Every so often, he would get up and head out to look for more wood to add to the flames. Occasionally, he peeked through the snow, hoping to catch a glimpse of Joe. From time to time, he shouted until his voice was hoarse, trying to get his brother's attention.

The flames leaped up in the wind and as he piled more wood on the blaze the fire grew brighter. It was in a sheltered spot where the gusts of snow could not quench the flames.

The flames danced in the wind, and as he added more wood to the fire, it became even brighter. It was in a protected area where the swirling snow couldn't put out the flames.

At last he thought he heard a faint shout.

At last, he thought he heard a quiet shout.

Frank sprang to his feet. He gazed through the shifting veil of snow that swirled about his shelter, but he could see nothing. Then he called out:

Frank jumped to his feet. He looked through the swirling snow that surrounded his shelter, but he couldn't see anything. Then he shouted:

"Joe!"

"Joe!"

The fire roared. The wind shrieked. Snow slashed against the rocks above him.

The fire blazed. The wind howled. Snow whipped against the rocks above him.

Then, out of the inferno of wind and snow he heard the shout again, and a moment later he caught sight of a dim figure plunging toward him. He ran forward.

Then, through the chaos of wind and snow, he heard the shout again, and a moment later he spotted a faint figure rushing toward him. He ran forward.

It was Joe. He was almost exhausted and he was blue with cold. He staggered over toward the blaze and collapsed in a heap beside the fire.

It was Joe. He was nearly worn out and freezing cold. He stumbled over to the fire and collapsed in a pile next to the flames.

"Thank goodness I saw the flames!" he gasped. "I was almost all in. I couldn't have gone another step."

"Thank goodness I saw the flames!" he gasped. "I was just about done. I couldn’t have taken another step."

"I thought I'd never find you. I hunted all over."

"I never thought I'd find you. I searched everywhere."

"I got lost. I couldn't find the trail."

"I got lost. I couldn't find the path."

"We're both lost now. I got off the trail myself when I was looking for you."

"We're both lost now. I ended up off the trail while I was searching for you."

"I don't much care where we are so long as we're together again and we have a fire."

"I don't really care where we are as long as we're together again and we have a fire."

Joe extended his trembling hands to the blaze. In a short while he ceased shivering, and as the warmth pervaded his chilled body his spirits rose.

Joe reached out his trembling hands to the fire. After a little while, he stopped shaking, and as the warmth spread through his cold body, his spirits lifted.

"That fire was a lucky thought," remarked Frank. "I was cold and it just occurred to me that you might see a fire through the storm even if you couldn't see me."

"That fire was a lucky idea," Frank said. "I was feeling cold, and it just crossed my mind that you might spot a fire through the storm even if you couldn't see me."

"I just caught a faint glimpse of it—just like a little pink patch shining through the snow. I was just about to give up and lie down on the rocks when I saw it."

"I just caught a faint glimpse of it—like a small pink spot shining through the snow. I was just about to give up and lie down on the rocks when I saw it."

"You'd have died of exposure."

"You would have died of exposure."

For a while the two lads were silent as they thought of how narrowly the blizzard had been cheated of its victim. Then, when Joe had become warmed by the fire, they began to consider their course of action. Frank looked out at the storm.

For a while, the two guys were quiet as they reflected on how close the blizzard had come to claiming its victim. Then, after Joe warmed up by the fire, they started to think about what to do next. Frank glanced out at the storm.

"The wind seems to be dying down a bit," he said. "I can see farther down the mountain now than I could a while ago."

"The wind seems to be easing up a bit," he said. "I can see further down the mountain now than I could earlier."

"Think we ought to start home?"

"Do you think we should start heading home?"

"Do you feel well enough now?"

"Are you feeling okay now?"

Joe got to his feet.

Joe stood up.

"Sure. I feel fine now. There's no use staying up here until nightfall. This storm may last a couple of days."

"Sure. I'm feeling good now. There's no point in staying up here until it gets dark. This storm might last a couple of days."

"All right. Let's go."

"Okay. Let's go."

They stamped out the fire and resumed their journey down the mountain. They stayed close together this time, taking no chances on again being separated. As Frank had noticed, the wind had indeed lost much of its fury, although it still howled and blustered on the mountain slope, and the snow still fell steadily in a drifting cloud. The trail was almost obscured by the snowdrifts but Frank was able to find and follow it and they finally reached the place where they had turned off toward the abandoned mine workings several days before.

They put out the fire and continued their trek down the mountain. This time, they stayed close together, not wanting to risk getting separated again. As Frank had observed, the wind had definitely calmed down a lot, even though it still howled and whipped around the mountain slope, and the snow continued to fall steadily in a swirling cloud. The trail was nearly buried under the snowdrifts, but Frank managed to locate and follow it, and they eventually arrived at the point where they had veered off toward the abandoned mine a few days earlier.

Here they hesitated.

They hesitated here.

"What do you think?" Frank asked.

"What do you think?" Frank asked.

"Now that we're so close to the mine I think we may as well go on with our search."

"Now that we’re almost at the mine, I think we might as well continue with our search."

"I was hoping you'd say that. It shouldn't take us more than an hour or so and it isn't dark yet. Besides, we have our flashlights."

"I was hoping you’d say that. It shouldn’t take us more than an hour or so and it isn’t dark yet. Besides, we have our flashlights."

"I haven't mine. But one's enough. Go ahead. It shouldn't be hard to find the Lone Tree from here."

"I don't have mine. But one is enough. Go ahead. It shouldn't be hard to find the Lone Tree from here."

Frank turned off the trail. He headed directly toward the old mine workings they had previously visited and from which he remembered having seen the lone pine tree. The snow was deeper than they had expected and they ploughed through drifts up to the waist. They went on, however, and in a short while reached the abandoned mine of their harrowing experience underground. Here they paused.

Frank left the trail and made his way straight to the old mine they had visited before, remembering the solitary pine tree he had seen there. The snow was deeper than they anticipated, and they trudged through drifts that reached their waists. Still, they pressed on and soon arrived at the abandoned mine where they had their terrifying experience underground. They stopped here.

"The lone tree was over to the right, I think," said Joe.

"The lone tree was over to the right, I think," said Joe.

They peered through the storm. They could see nothing but drifting snow and the dull masses of the rocks. A shift in the wind raised the curtain of storm for a moment and then, like a gloomy sentinel, they saw the tall pine tree, solitary against the bleak background of grey.

They looked through the storm. All they could see was swirling snow and the dull shapes of the rocks. A change in the wind briefly lifted the curtain of the storm, and then, like a sad guardian, they noticed the tall pine tree, standing alone against the dreary grey backdrop.

"That's it!"

"That's all!"

Now that their goal was definitely in sight they felt invigorated, and they hastened on through the snow toward the tree with new vitality. Forgotten for the moment was their weariness and exhaustion, the cold and the snow, in the lure of the gold that they felt sure lay somewhere in the neighborhood of that lonely tree.

Now that their goal was clearly in sight, they felt reenergized and quickly made their way through the snow toward the tree with fresh energy. For the moment, they forgot their weariness and exhaustion, the cold and the snow, drawn in by the promise of gold that they believed was hidden somewhere near that lonely tree.

Stumbling and plunging through the snow, they reached their goal at last. The tree creaked and swayed in the wind, and as they stood beneath it they saw that they were standing on the verge of a deep pit that seemed to have been scooped out of the earth by giant hands. There were a few ramshackle ruins of old mine buildings near by. The roofs had long since fallen in and the buildings sagged drunkenly. At the far side of the bottom of the pit, clearly discernible against the snow, they saw the wide mouth of a cave.

Stumbling and tripping through the snow, they finally reached their destination. The tree creaked and swayed in the wind, and as they stood beneath it, they realized they were on the edge of a deep pit that looked like it had been dug out of the earth by giant hands. A few rundown remains of old mine buildings were nearby. The roofs had long since caved in, and the buildings leaned at odd angles. At the far side of the pit's bottom, clearly visible against the snow, they spotted the wide entrance of a cave.

"That must be the shaft opening," said Frank. "We're on the track now."

"That must be the shaft opening," Frank said. "We’re on the right path now."

The boys descended into the pit. The going was precarious, for the rocks were slippery and the snow concealed crevices and holes, so that they were obliged to proceed cautiously. But at length they reached the bottom and made their way across to the mouth of the cave.

The boys climbed down into the pit. It was tricky because the rocks were slippery and the snow hid crevices and holes, so they had to be careful. But eventually, they got to the bottom and made their way over to the entrance of the cave.

Frank produced his flashlight as he prepared to enter.

Frank pulled out his flashlight as he got ready to go in.

"Stick close behind," he advised his brother. "We don't know what we're liable to run into here."

"Stay close behind," he warned his brother. "We have no idea what we might encounter here."

The snow flung itself upon them and the wind shrieked with renewed fury as they left the unsheltered pit and entered the half darkness of the cave mouth. It was as though they were entering a new world. They had become so accustomed to the roaring of the gale and the sweep of the storm that the interior of the passage seemed strangely peaceful and still.

The snow tossed itself at them, and the wind howled with fresh intensity as they left the open pit and stepped into the dim light of the cave entrance. It felt like they were stepping into a different world. They had gotten so used to the howling wind and the raging storm that the inside of the passage felt oddly calm and quiet.

The flashlight sliced a brilliant gleam of light from the blackness ahead.

The flashlight cut through the darkness ahead with a bright beam of light.

Step by step they advanced across the hard rock. The dampness and cold became more pronounced. As they went on the passage widened and in a few minutes they found themselves in a huge chamber in the earth, a chamber that extended far on into darkness, and they could not see the opposite walls.

Step by step, they moved across the hard rock. The dampness and cold became more intense. As they continued, the passage opened up, and in a few minutes, they entered a massive chamber underground, a chamber that stretched deep into the darkness, and they couldn’t see the walls on the other side.

A curious rustling sound attracted their attention as soon as they entered the place, and Frank stood still.

A curious rustling noise caught their attention as soon as they entered the place, and Frank froze.

"What was that?"

"What was that?"

They remained motionless and silent. Away off in the darkness of this subterranean chamber they could hear a scuffling and rustling, and sounds that the boys judged were caused by pattering feet. Frank directed the beam of the flashlight toward them, but the light fell short and they could see nothing.

They stood still and quiet. Far off in the darkness of this underground room, they could hear some shuffling and rustling sounds, which the boys assumed were made by moving feet. Frank pointed the flashlight in that direction, but the light didn’t reach far enough, and they couldn’t see anything.

They advanced several paces. The rustling sounds became multiplied. Then, suddenly, Frank caught sight of two gleaming pinpoints of light glowing from the blackness.

They moved forward a few steps. The rustling sounds increased. Then, out of nowhere, Frank spotted two shining spots of light glowing in the darkness.

"What's that light?" asked Joe.

"What's that light?" Joe asked.

"I don't know. I'm going closer."

"I don't know. I'm going in closer."

Frank stepped forward again. As he did so, instead of two pinpoints of light, he saw two more, then two more, until at least a dozen of those strange glowing green spots shone from the darkness, reflected in the glow from the flashlight.

Frank stepped forward again. As he did, instead of just two pinpricks of light, he saw two more, then two more, until at least a dozen of those strange glowing green spots lit up from the darkness, reflected in the beam from the flashlight.

"Animals," he said quietly to Joe.

"Animals," he said softly to Joe.

At the same instant he heard a low, menacing snarl.

At that moment, he heard a low, threatening growl.

The glowing greenish lights began to move rapidly to and fro. Into the radiance of the flashlight shot a lean, grey form that disappeared as swiftly as it came.

The glowing greenish lights started to move quickly back and forth. Suddenly, a thin, gray shape darted into the beam of the flashlight and vanished just as fast as it appeared.

A prolonged and wicked snarling rose from the gloom. Frank glanced to one side and saw that two of the greenish lights had moved until they were circling behind him. He leaped back.

A long, menacing growl echoed from the darkness. Frank turned to the side and noticed that two of the greenish lights had shifted and were now circling behind him. He jumped back.

"We'd better get out of here!" he said. "Those are wolves."

"We should get out of here!" he said. "Those are wolves."

But when the boys turned to retrace their steps they were confronted by a lean form that barred their way to the cave entrance, and in the glow of the flashlight they saw two greenish eyes that glowed fiendishly and two rows of sharp white teeth bared in defiance.

But when the boys turned to head back, they were faced with a thin figure blocking their path to the cave entrance, and in the beam of the flashlight, they saw two glowing green eyes that shone menacingly and two rows of sharp white teeth bared in challenge.


CHAPTER XX

Down the Shaft

Down the Shaft

Frank Hardy swung the flashlight, and the wolf before them sprang back, snarling ferociously, into the darkness. The pattering of feet at the back of the huge cavern became more insistent. The boys were conscious of those greenish eyes all about them. The wolves were circling around the cave.

Frank Hardy swung the flashlight, and the wolf in front of them jumped back, snarling aggressively, into the darkness. The sound of footsteps at the back of the enormous cavern grew more urgent. The boys were aware of those greenish eyes all around them. The wolves were circling the cave.

Another wolf joined the animal that barred the entrance. By some animal cunning, they seemed to realize that by so doing they could entrap their prey. The Hardy boys knew that they had wandered into a veritable den of timber wolves who had found in this abandoned mine an ideal refuge and shelter, who had probably made the place their own for years.

Another wolf joined the animal that was blocking the entrance. Somehow, they seemed to understand that this would allow them to trap their prey. The Hardy boys realized that they had stumbled into a real den of timber wolves who had discovered this abandoned mine as a perfect refuge and shelter, probably claiming it as their own for years.

The wolves drew closer. The circle was narrowing. The animals were beginning to pace about the cave in long strides, drawing in toward the boys as the circumference of the circle grew smaller.

The wolves moved in closer. The circle was getting smaller. The animals were starting to walk around the cave in long strides, closing in on the boys as the boundary of the circle shrank.

"Keep the flashlight on," said Joe. "They're afraid of the light."

"Keep the flashlight on," Joe said. "They're scared of the light."

Frank kept turning slowly about, keeping the glare of the flash full on the circling wolves, and every time its radiance illuminated a gaunt grey form the animal would leap back, snarling, into the shadows.

Frank kept turning slowly around, keeping the flash's glare focused on the circling wolves, and every time its light revealed a gaunt grey figure, the animal would leap back, snarling, into the darkness.

But as quickly as the light was turned away from one side, the wolves on the other side of the circle would grow bolder and come closer. It was inevitable that in a few minutes the lads would be torn to pieces.

But as soon as the light was turned away from one side, the wolves on the other side of the circle would get braver and move in closer. It was certain that in just a few minutes the guys would be ripped apart.

Suddenly Frank thought of the revolver they had seized from Slim Briggs. It was still in his pocket and he had forgotten all about it until this time. With his free hand he reached for the weapon.

Suddenly, Frank remembered the revolver they had taken from Slim Briggs. It was still in his pocket, and he had completely forgotten about it until now. With his free hand, he reached for the gun.

Slowly he withdrew it. Then, turning the flashlight directly on one of the snarling beasts, he took aim and fired.

Slowly, he pulled it back. Then, aiming the flashlight directly at one of the snarling creatures, he took aim and shot.

The animal dropped in his tracks with a yelp of pain, and instantly the ranks of the wolves were broken as they fled howling to the darkest corners of the cavern. The stricken wolf writhed and snarled wretchedly for a moment, then lay still.

The animal collapsed with a yelp of pain, and immediately the ranks of the wolves broke as they raced away, howling into the darkest corners of the cave. The injured wolf thrashed and snarled in agony for a moment, then lay still.

The boys edged back toward the entrance, but before they could reach it a grey form shot across the circle of light and barred the way with a snarl of defiance. Again they were trapped. Frank fired at the animal. The shot went wide and the brute slunk back, but still remained in the passageway. Two or three of the other animals came rushing out of the darkness and pounced on the body of the dead wolf, tearing at the flesh with savage jaws. For a while the cave echoed with growls and snarls as the animals set about their hideous meal, and then the revolver crashed forth again and another wolf toppled over dead.

The boys moved back toward the entrance, but before they could get there, a gray figure shot into the circle of light and blocked their way with a snarl of defiance. Once again, they were trapped. Frank fired at the animal. The shot missed, and the creature backed off but still stayed in the passageway. Two or three other animals charged out of the darkness and jumped onto the dead wolf, tearing at its flesh with savage jaws. For a moment, the cave was filled with growls and snarls as the animals feasted on their gruesome meal, and then the revolver fired again and another wolf fell dead.

"Three shells left," said Frank.

"Three shells left," Frank said.

"Save them. We'll take a chance on getting out."

"Save them. We’ll take a risk on getting out."

But the chance appeared to be a slim one. More wolves had joined their leader at the entrance, and it seemed impossible that the boys could ever make their escape that way.

But the chance seemed very slim. More wolves had gathered around their leader at the entrance, and it looked impossible for the boys to escape that way.

The wolves began to advance. The leader came forward, showing his teeth. His eyes glowed like spots of green flame.

The wolves started to move closer. The leader stepped up, baring his teeth. His eyes shone like green flames.

Step by step, the boys retreated.

Step by step, the boys fell back.

The animals appeared to have overcome their fear of the flashlight. They no longer slunk into the shadows when its fierce glare was turned on them. Instead, they came forward boldly, with dripping, gleaming jaws.

The animals seemed to have gotten over their fear of the flashlight. They no longer hid in the shadows when its bright beam was directed at them. Instead, they stepped forward confidently, with dripping, shiny jaws.

"I'm afraid we're trapped," declared Frank.

"I'm afraid we're stuck," Frank said.

"We'll die fighting, anyway. I wish I had a gun."

"We'll die fighting, no matter what. I wish I had a gun."

"Wouldn't be much use against this pack."

"Wouldn't be much help against this group."

"Turn your flash and see if there isn't any other way out of this place except the way we came in."

"Turn on your flashlight and see if there's any other way out of here besides the way we came in."

Frank turned the light swiftly about toward the walls back of them and in the radiant gleam the boys saw a narrow passage, like a dark splotch against the rock, just a few feet away.

Frank quickly turned the light towards the walls behind them, and in its bright glow, the boys noticed a narrow passage, appearing as a dark stain against the rock, just a few feet away.

"That looks like our only chance."

"That seems like our only shot."

"We'll try it, anyway. It seems to lead back into the wall quite a distance."

"We'll give it a shot, anyway. It looks like it goes back into the wall quite a way."

"It may be all right—as long as we don't run into another wolf den."

"It should be fine—as long as we don’t come across another wolf den."

"Those brutes will follow us."

"Those brutes will track us."

"The whole pack can't get into that narrow tunnel, at any rate. We'll have a better chance of fighting them off." Frank turned the light swiftly on the dark passage again. "You try it first. They may try to rush us when they see us getting away."

"The whole group can't fit into that narrow tunnel, anyway. We’ll have a better chance of holding them off." Frank quickly shone the light back down the dark passage. "You go first. They might try to rush us when they see us escaping."

They backed up as close to the opening in the rocks as they could. The wolves were very near now. Three of them had thrust their cruel heads directly into the circle of light from the flash. Their vicious snarling echoed throughout the cave. Frank sensed that they were preparing to spring.

They backed up as close to the opening in the rocks as they could. The wolves were really close now. Three of them had pushed their nasty heads right into the circle of light from the flash. Their fierce snarling echoed throughout the cave. Frank felt that they were getting ready to pounce.

"Quick!" he urged his brother.

"Quick!" he urged his bro.

Joe leaped and scrambled into the opening.

Joe jumped and rushed into the opening.

At the same instant the foremost wolf crouched for a spring. There was not a second to lose. Frank leveled the revolver and fired.

At that very moment, the leading wolf crouched to jump. There was no time to waste. Frank aimed the revolver and shot.

His aim was true. Halfway in the air the animal gave a convulsive twist of its body and crashed on to the rocks. It writhed in its death agony, snarling ferociously and snapping at everything within reach, until it finally lay still.

His aim was spot on. Mid-air, the animal convulsed and fell hard onto the rocks. It thrashed in its death throes, growling fiercely and snapping at everything around it, until it eventually lay still.

The respite was just what the boys needed. The other wolves slunk back, discouraged by the loss of their leader. Frank knew, however, that it would be but for a moment. He backed into the passage with Joe.

The break was exactly what the boys needed. The other wolves faded back, discouraged by the loss of their leader. Frank knew, though, that it would only be temporary. He stepped back into the passage with Joe.

The tunnel was narrow, but high enough to permit them to move about without crouching. They were unable to light their way, as Frank needed the flashlight turned before him in order to frighten back the wolves. For a moment the animals seemed to hesitate, as though fearing a trap and then the foremost wolf cautiously entered the tunnel in pursuit of its prey.

The tunnel was narrow, but tall enough for them to walk through without bending down. They couldn't light their way because Frank had to keep the flashlight pointed ahead of him to scare off the wolves. For a moment, the animals hesitated, seeming to fear a trap, and then the lead wolf carefully stepped into the tunnel in pursuit of its prey.

The boys backed slowly down the tunnel, which descended on a slope. They did not know where it led, they could not see, but they knew they must keep backing away from the wolves.

The boys slowly backed down the tunnel that sloped downward. They didn’t know where it led, and they couldn’t see, but they knew they had to keep moving away from the wolves.

"We're up against it if this is a blind alley," declared Joe, in a low voice.

"We're in trouble if this is a dead end," Joe said quietly.

"We're up against it if we stop and try to fight it out."

"We're in trouble if we stop and try to fight it."

Step by step they moved backward, and step by step the foremost wolf pursued them.

Step by step, they moved back, and step by step, the leading wolf chased them.

The animal was more cowardly than the leader that had been killed. He did not advance boldly, but slunk along, pressing to the side of the tunnel as though trying to evade the dazzling gleam of light that shone in his eyes. Now and then he snarled viciously, showing his teeth.

The animal was more cowardly than the leader who had been killed. He didn’t move forward confidently but crept along, sticking to the side of the tunnel as if trying to avoid the bright light that hurt his eyes. Every now and then, he snarled fiercely, baring his teeth.

"Are any of the wolves following him?" asked Joe, from the darkness.

"Are any of the wolves following him?" Joe asked from the shadows.

"I can't see any. This brute seems to be alone."

"I don't see any. This guy looks like he's on his own."

"How about taking a shot at him?"

"How about taking a chance on him?"

"What's the use? Even if I did kill him, we'd only run into the rest of them when we went out into the cave again. I'm not going to use this gun again unless I absolutely have to."

"What's the point? Even if I killed him, we'd just run into the others when we go back into the cave. I'm not using this gun again unless I really have to."

The brothers continued their weird journey. The tunnel was damp and chilly. The floor was rocky and uneven, and Frank was in constant dread lest he trip and fall. It would be all up with them then. The wolf would not lose a second in taking advantage of such an opportunity. So, stepping backward, they retreated farther and farther down the passage, watching the grey form that constantly followed, never gaining on them, but never falling back.

The brothers kept going on their strange journey. The tunnel was damp and cold. The floor was rocky and uneven, and Frank was always worried he might trip and fall. That would be the end for them. The wolf wouldn’t hesitate to seize that chance. So, stepping back, they moved further down the passage, keeping an eye on the gray shape that followed them, never getting closer but never falling behind.

"I wonder how long this tunnel is?" Frank muttered.

"I wonder how long this tunnel is?" Frank said.

"Can't last forever," said Joe, with an attempt at cheerfulness. "I think I feel a draft of cold air at my back."

"Can’t last forever," said Joe, trying to sound cheerful. "I think I feel a chill in the air at my back."

"It doesn't lead outside, that's certain. If it did it would be sloping upward."

"It definitely doesn't lead outside. If it did, it would be going uphill."

There was a low snarl from the wolf. It advanced farther into the circle of light. The brute had evidently decided that the light was not particularly dangerous, and was growing bolder.

There was a low snarl from the wolf. It moved further into the circle of light. The beast had clearly decided that the light wasn’t too dangerous and was becoming bolder.

Frank tightened his grip on the revolver. The animal was preparing for a rush.

Frank tightened his grip on the gun. The animal was getting ready to charge.

The gaunt grey form gathered itself together and came directly at him.

The thin gray figure pulled itself together and came straight at him.

Frank pressed the trigger.

Frank pulled the trigger.

The revolver crashed forth, awakening thunderous echoes in the narrow tunnel. The wolf gave vent to a howl of pain and fury, but although its onward course was checked for a moment and it swerved to one side it did not fall back. The bullet had not found a vital spot. Maddened by pain, the animal came on again.

The revolver fired, sending loud echoes through the narrow tunnel. The wolf let out a howl of pain and anger, but even though it briefly halted and swerved to the side, it didn't retreat. The bullet hadn’t hit a vital area. Driven by pain, the animal charged forward again.

The boys scrambled back. The wolf leaped. Frank flung himself to one side and the great body brushed against him. He struck out with the revolver and felt the weapon strike against flesh. Again he pulled the trigger, with the barrel of the weapon directly against the animal's hide, and then he sprang farther back into the tunnel.

The boys hurried back. The wolf jumped. Frank dove to one side, and the massive body grazed against him. He swung the revolver and felt it hit the animal's skin. He pulled the trigger again, with the gun's barrel pressed right against the wolf's fur, and then he jumped further back into the tunnel.

Behind him he heard a shout. It seemed curiously far away. He retreated another step.

Behind him, he heard someone shout. It felt strangely distant. He took another step back.

His foot did not find the solid rock. Instead, he stepped back into space. For an instant he wavered, clutching vainly at the air. Then he lost his balance, staggered backward, and then felt himself falling on downward into utter darkness.

His foot didn’t land on solid ground. Instead, he stepped back into empty space. For a moment, he hesitated, gripping uselessly at the air. Then he lost his balance, stumbled backward, and felt himself falling into complete darkness.


CHAPTER XXI

Underground

Underground

Frank Hardy could not have fallen more than ten or twelve feet, but he had the sensation of having dropped from an enormous height. The unexpectedness of it took his breath away, and when he finally crashed into a heap of earth and gravel with a jolt that jarred every bone in his body he could only lie there in the darkness and wonder that he was still alive.

Frank Hardy couldn’t have fallen more than ten or twelve feet, but it felt like he dropped from a great height. The surprise of it knocked the wind out of him, and when he finally landed in a pile of dirt and gravel with a jolt that rattled every bone in his body, he could only lie there in the darkness and marvel that he was still alive.

Then, to his relief, came a voice from close at hand.

Then, to his relief, a voice came from nearby.

"Are you all right, Frank?"

"Are you okay, Frank?"

"That you, Joe?"

"Is that you, Joe?"

"You didn't expect to find anybody else down here, did you?" asked Joe, with a chuckle.

"You didn't think you'd run into anyone else down here, did you?" Joe asked, laughing.

"I'm all right. No bones broken. How about you?"

"I'm fine. No injuries. How about you?"

"I'm shaken up a bit, but I'm all right. Thank goodness I didn't land on my head."

"I'm a bit shaken up, but I'm okay. Thank goodness I didn't land on my head."

"What on earth happened?"

"What just happened?"

"We must have stepped right back into the main shaft of the mine. That passage we were in was a drift that went right through to the cave. We're at the bottom of the shaft now, I guess."

"We must have just walked back into the main part of the mine. The passage we were in was a tunnel that led straight to the cave. We're at the bottom of the shaft now, I suppose."

Frank had still retained his grasp of the flashlight. Fortunately it had not been broken in the fall and when he switched it on the welcome glow of light again pervaded their prison.

Frank still held onto the flashlight. Luckily, it hadn’t broken in the fall, and when he turned it on, the welcome beam of light filled their prison once more.

High above them they could see a patch of snow-white sky, sharply outlined by the rectangular shaft-head. A crude ladder ascended the side of the shaft. They could see the black patch that marked the entrance to the drift from which they had fallen, and from it emanated growls and snarls of rage and pain.

High above them, they could see a clear patch of bright blue sky, sharply framed by the rectangular shaft-head. A rough ladder went up the side of the shaft. They could see the dark spot that marked the entrance to the drift they had fallen from, and from it came growls and snarls of anger and pain.

"That beast won't follow us any farther. I guess that was why the wolves were so doubtful about chasing us in there. They steer clear of that tunnel," ventured Frank.

"That beast won't follow us any further. I guess that's why the wolves were so hesitant to chase us in there. They stay away from that tunnel," Frank suggested.

"Lucky for us we hit the shaft when we did. That wolf would have been all over us in two more seconds. He'd have made mincemeat out of both of us. I thought sure we were done for, and then I stepped back—wow! I thought I was falling clean through the earth."

"Thank goodness we hit the shaft when we did. That wolf would’ve been on us in two more seconds. He would’ve torn us apart. I really thought we were done for, and then I stepped back—wow! I felt like I was falling straight through the earth."

"Me, too. I couldn't imagine what had happened. I thought the bottom of the tunnel had given way on us."

"Me, too. I couldn't believe what had happened. I thought the tunnel's floor had collapsed beneath us."

"Good thing the shaft isn't any deeper. We'd have saved our lives by escaping from the wolf and broken our necks by falling down the shaft."

"Good thing the shaft isn't any deeper. We could have saved our lives by escaping from the wolf but ended up breaking our necks by falling down the shaft."

"We're lucky. But now we're down here, what are we going to do about it?"

"We're lucky. But now that we're down here, what are we going to do about it?"

Joe pointed to the ladder.

Joe pointed at the ladder.

"We can get to the surface easily enough now."

"We can easily reach the surface now."

"But if this is the main shaft we ought to be able to find our way to the blue room mentioned on that map."

"But if this is the main shaft, we should be able to find our way to the blue room mentioned on that map."

"No use backing out now that we've come this far. I'd almost forgotten what we'd come for."

"No point in backing out now that we've come this far. I had almost forgotten what we were here for."

Frank got to his feet. He was not seriously injured by the fall, although he had wrenched one knee. But he was able to walk without much difficulty. He explored the bottom of the shaft with the flashlight. Almost directly across from them he found the entrance to the tunnel indicated on the map he had discovered in the outlaw's notebook.

Frank stood up. He wasn’t seriously hurt from the fall, though he had twisted one knee. But he could walk without too much trouble. He shone the flashlight around the bottom of the shaft. Almost directly across from them, he found the entrance to the tunnel marked on the map he had found in the outlaw's notebook.

"Here we are!"

"Here we go!"

To refresh his memory he drew the notebook from his pocket again and the boys studied the map once more.

To jog his memory, he pulled out the notebook from his pocket again, and the guys looked at the map one more time.

"This passage leads to the big chamber, by the looks of it. And when we get there we find two passages leading out of it. We follow this one," Frank indicated the tunnel marked X. "And from there we get to a smaller chamber. We follow a tunnel out of that until we get to what they call the blue room. And there we'll find the gold."

"This passage takes us to the main chamber, it seems. Once we arrive, we spot two passageways leading out. We should go down this one," Frank pointed to the tunnel marked X. "From there, we’ll reach a smaller chamber. We’ll take a tunnel from there until we arrive at what they call the blue room. That’s where we’ll find the gold."

"If the outlaws haven't beaten us to it."

"If the outlaws haven’t gotten to it first."

"Perhaps so. But perhaps they haven't."

"Maybe so. But maybe they haven't."

Frank advanced toward the tunnel, flashing the light before him. It was a large passage and had evidently been frequently used. He examined the damp floor and found footprints that were plainly of recent origin.

Frank moved toward the tunnel, shining the light ahead of him. It was a wide passage that clearly had been used often. He looked at the damp floor and saw footprints that were obviously recent.

"Some one has been here, and not so long ago either."

"Someone has been here, and not too long ago either."

"To-day?"

"Today?"

"It's hard to tell. Footprints would look fresh down here for weeks, as long as no one else stepped over them. What I mean is that there has been some one down here since the mine was abandoned. That's plain enough."

"It's hard to say. Footprints could look fresh down here for weeks, as long as no one else walked over them. What I'm saying is that someone has been down here since the mine was abandoned. That's pretty clear."

"Well, it means we're on the right track."

"Well, it means we're headed in the right direction."

With rapidly growing excitement, the two Hardy boys made their way on into the tunnel. Frank, having the flashlight, took the lead. This tunnel, the main drift of the mine leading into the working level, was not of great length, and within the minute they had reached the first chamber indicated on the map.

With quickly growing excitement, the two Hardy boys headed into the tunnel. Frank, holding the flashlight, took the lead. This tunnel, the main shaft of the mine leading to the working level, wasn’t very long, and within a minute they reached the first chamber shown on the map.

In the glow of the flashlight they saw that it was of considerable extent and was bolstered up by timbers that were now rotting away. The marks of pickaxes were discernible on the walls and an overturned wheelbarrow bore mute testimony to the work that had once gone on here underground in the search for gold.

In the beam of the flashlight, they noticed that it was quite large and supported by timbers that were now decaying. The marks from pickaxes were visible on the walls, and a tipped-over wheelbarrow silently testified to the work that had once taken place here underground in the quest for gold.

Frank turned the light this way and that. In one corner he found the entrance to a second corridor leading out of the working, but this was not the one he wanted. After a few minutes' search they discovered the tunnel indicated by the cross on the map.

Frank adjusted the light from side to side. In one corner, he found the entrance to a second corridor leading away from the workspace, but this wasn't the one he was looking for. After a few minutes of searching, they located the tunnel marked by the cross on the map.

"We're getting warmer," he said, as they advanced toward it.

"We're getting closer," he said, as they moved toward it.

The tunnel had heavy timbers at either side, to support the roof and to prevent a cave-in. They entered it and stumbled along across the uneven floor. Water dripped from the ceiling and from the rocky walls. The dampness and cold made them shiver.

The tunnel had sturdy wooden beams on both sides to support the ceiling and prevent a collapse. They stepped inside and stumbled over the uneven floor. Water dripped from the ceiling and the rocky walls. The dampness and chill made them shiver.

The tunnel led into a second and smaller chamber.

The tunnel opened up into a second, smaller room.

"Now for the last passageway. Then to the blue room!"

"Now for the final hallway. Then to the blue room!"

They explored the little chamber. But of a tunnel leading from it there was no sign. A sloping heap of gravel and boulders lay in one corner, a broken pickax lay on the floor, and a rusty shovel stood against the wall. There were many footmarks on the damp floor, but there was not the slightest trace of an exit.

They looked around the small room. However, there was no evidence of a tunnel leading from it. In one corner, a pile of gravel and rocks was sloped up, a broken pickaxe was on the floor, and a rusty shovel leaned against the wall. The damp floor was covered with many footprints, but there was not a single sign of an exit.

"That's funny," murmured Frank, as he turned the beam of the flashlight on the walls. "I'm sure we're in the right place."

"That's funny," Frank mumbled, shining the flashlight on the walls. "I’m pretty sure we’re in the right spot."

He looked at the map again. They had followed the directions exactly, and if the map was correct they should find a tunnel leading from the rocky chamber in which they stood.

He looked at the map again. They had followed the directions precisely, and if the map was accurate, they should find a tunnel leading from the rocky chamber where they stood.

"Listen!" said Joe suddenly.

"Hey!" Joe said suddenly.

They stood stock-still, not saying a word. The silence of the mine was profound.

They stood completely still, not saying anything. The silence of the mine was deep.

"What's the matter?" whispered Frank finally.

"What's wrong?" Frank finally whispered.

"I thought I heard a sound—like some one talking."

"I thought I heard a sound—like someone talking."

They listened again, but they could hear nothing save the occasional drip-drip of water from the walls.

They listened again, but all they could hear was the occasional drip of water from the walls.

"It must have been my imagination," said Joe, at last. "But I was sure I heard a voice."

"It must have been my imagination," Joe finally said. "But I was certain I heard a voice."

"This mine is full of echoes. It was probably only the wind whistling down the shaft."

"This mine is filled with echoes. It was probably just the wind whistling down the shaft."

"I guess that was it. But this place is so creepy a fellow imagines almost anything."

"I guess that was it. But this place is so creepy that someone could imagine almost anything."

"It would be a tough break for us if the outlaws marched in on us just now."

"It would be a real bummer for us if the outlaws came after us right now."

"I don't think there's much danger. They won't be roaming around in that storm outside."

"I don’t think there’s much danger. They won’t be out and about in that storm outside."

The boys resumed their search of the cave. They turned the flashlight high and low in the hope of finding the tunnel that had been so plainly marked on the plan, but without success.

The boys continued their search of the cave. They aimed the flashlight up and down, hoping to locate the tunnel that was clearly marked on the map, but they had no luck.

"We must have taken the wrong passage," Joe remarked.

"We must have taken the wrong way," Joe said.

"I'm positive we took the right one. I took special care—But say! Perhaps the tunnel has been covered up!"

"I'm sure we took the right one. I was really careful—But wait! Maybe the tunnel has been blocked off!"

"That's an idea. It may be hidden."

"That’s a thought. It might be concealed."

Frank turned the light on the heap of rocks and gravel in one corner of the cave. At the base of the pile he could see footprints, all of which led directly to or from the heap.

Frank turned on the light to shine on the pile of rocks and gravel in one corner of the cave. At the bottom of the pile, he could see footprints, all of which led directly to or from the heap.

"Maybe this is where it is," he said, and, handing Joe the flashlight, he picked up the shovel. He attacked the gravel vigorously, casting shovelfuls of it to one side. In a few moments he gave an exclamation of satisfaction. For, back of the gravel he had shoveled away, he saw a wooden door.

"Maybe this is where it is," he said, handing Joe the flashlight as he picked up the shovel. He started digging into the gravel aggressively, tossing shovelfuls to the side. A few moments later, he exclaimed in satisfaction. Because behind the gravel he had removed, he saw a wooden door.

"Now we're getting there!"

"Now we're making progress!"

The gravel flew, and in a short time the door was revealed, back of a heap of boulders that the boys lost no time in rolling to one side. To their disappointment they found a rusty padlock on the door, but Joe remembered the broken pickax they had seen in the chamber a short while before and he seized it. A few sharp blows and the padlock lay broken and shattered. He wrenched at the door and it came slowly open, with a protesting creak of hinges.

The gravel flew, and soon the door was uncovered, hidden behind a pile of boulders that the boys quickly pushed aside. To their disappointment, they found a rusty padlock on the door, but Joe remembered the broken pickax they had seen in the chamber a little while earlier and grabbed it. After a few hard hits, the padlock was broken and shattered. He pulled at the door, and it creaked open slowly, protesting against the movement of its hinges.

Casting the shovel to one side, Frank once more took the lead and they passed through the doorway. The tunnel at this point was very rough and narrow. They made their way cautiously forward. Frank noticed a change in the color of the earth and rock at this juncture.

Casting the shovel aside, Frank took the lead again, and they stepped through the doorway. The tunnel here was quite rough and narrow. They moved forward carefully. Frank noticed a change in the color of the dirt and rock at this point.

"It seems blue," he remarked to his brother. Some chemical constituent gave the underground passage that peculiar shade, discernible even in the dim light.

"It looks blue," he commented to his brother. Some chemical substance gave the underground passage that strange color, visible even in the low light.

The tunnel narrowed and the boys squeezed their way through the passage, stepping directly into another chamber dug out of the earth. Here the blueness of the walls was intensified, the wet blue earth giving off a weird glow.

The tunnel narrowed, and the boys pushed their way through the passage, stepping right into another chamber carved out of the ground. In this space, the blueness of the walls was even stronger, the damp blue earth radiating an unusual glow.

"No mistake about it this time!" declared Frank triumphantly. "We're in the blue room at last."

"No doubt about it this time!" Frank declared triumphantly. "We're in the blue room at last."

His words echoed and re-echoed in the confined space. The boys were trembling with excitement. The end of their search was at hand. Somewhere in that underground room lay the four bags of gold.

His words reverberated through the small space. The boys were shaking with excitement. The end of their search was near. Somewhere in that underground room were the four bags of gold.

But where?

But where at?

The floor of the chamber was unbroken. A few faint footprints could be seen, but there was nothing to indicate a secret hiding place. Frank again produced the map.

The floor of the room was smooth and untouched. A few faint footprints were visible, but there was no sign of a secret hiding spot. Frank pulled out the map again.

"Gold at circle," he said, reading from the instructions. "The map shows the circle to be in the far right hand corner." He went forward to the corner indicated. The earth here seemed unusually smooth and flat.

"Gold at the circle," he said, looking at the instructions. "The map shows the circle to be in the far right corner." He moved toward the indicated corner. The ground here felt unusually smooth and flat.

"I think it's buried here," declared Frank. "There's the mark of a shovel."

"I think it's buried here," Frank said. "There's a shovel mark."

"I'll get that shovel we had in the other room. Lend me the light for a second."

"I'll grab that shovel we had in the other room. Can you hand me the light for a sec?"

Frank handed his brother the flashlight, and Joe disappeared from the blue chamber. His footsteps echoed in the narrow passage.

Frank handed his brother the flashlight, and Joe vanished from the blue room. His footsteps echoed in the tight hallway.

As Frank Hardy waited in the dank darkness, he felt a curious exultation possess him. They were on the verge of solving the mystery of the hidden gold—if only the outlaws had not removed it from its hiding place. He waited in suspense for his brother's return.

As Frank Hardy waited in the musty darkness, he felt a strange excitement take over him. They were close to solving the mystery of the hidden gold—if only the outlaws hadn't taken it from its hiding place. He waited anxiously for his brother's return.


CHAPTER XXII

Black Pepper

Black Pepper

In a few minutes Frank Hardy saw the gleam of the light and heard his brother's footsteps as Joe returned. He was carrying the shovel that had served them to such good purpose in uncovering the secret door to the passageway of the blue room.

In a few minutes, Frank Hardy saw the light shining and heard his brother's footsteps as Joe came back. He was carrying the shovel that had worked so well for them in revealing the secret door to the passageway of the blue room.

"I'll dig," he volunteered, handing the flashlight to Frank.

"I'll dig," he said, passing the flashlight to Frank.

Then, with a will, he set to work.

Then, with determination, he got to work.

The earth was soft, which showed that it had been dug up before and replaced. Frank held the light, directing its beam on the place where Joe was digging, and as a hole rapidly appeared in the ground he watched eagerly for some sign of the treasure which they sought.

The ground was loose, indicating it had been previously dug up and filled in. Frank held the flashlight, shining its beam on the spot where Joe was digging, and as a hole quickly formed in the earth, he eagerly watched for any sign of the treasure they were searching for.

In his mind was always the hated probability that they might have been forestalled and that the outlaws might have already visited the place and removed the gold. But, in that case, he argued to himself, it was not likely that they would have taken such precautions to bank up the locked door of the passage. There would have been no need for it.

In his mind was always the dreaded possibility that they might have been beaten to it and that the outlaws could have already come by and taken the gold. But, he reasoned, if that were true, it was unlikely they would have bothered to barricade the locked door of the passage. There would have been no need for it.

"Nothing yet," panted Joe.

"Nothing yet," huffed Joe.

"It may be buried deep."

"It might be buried deep."

A far-off sound caught Frank's ear. He started violently, because his nerves were already tautened by suspense.

A distant sound caught Frank's attention. He jumped sharply, as his nerves were already on edge from the tension.

"Did you hear that?" he asked.

"Did you hear that?" he asked.

Joe rested on the shovel.

Joe leaned on the shovel.

"I heard something," he said doubtfully.

"I heard something," he said hesitantly.

They listened, but the sound was not repeated.

They listened, but the sound didn't come back.

"It might have been a fall of rock," said Frank. "It sounded like rocks striking against the walls of the shaft."

"It could have been a rock fall," Frank said. "It sounded like rocks hitting the walls of the shaft."

"It's just like my thinking I heard voices a while ago. This place is so silent and creepy it gets your nerves all unstrung."

"It's just like when I thought I heard voices a while back. This place is so quiet and eerie; it really gets on your nerves."

"Maybe."

"Maybe."

Joe resumed his shoveling.

Joe started shoveling again.

Another shovelful of earth and he bent forward.

Another shovelful of dirt and he leaned forward.

"Something here!" he exclaimed. "My shovel struck something solid."

"There's something here!" he shouted. "My shovel hit something hard."

Frank brought the flashlight closer. Just above the earth he could see the top of a canvas sack.

Frank brought the flashlight closer. Just above the ground, he could see the top of a canvas bag.

"It's the gold! Dig, Joe. Dig!"

"It's the gold! Dig, Joe. Dig!"

Joe Hardy needed no urging. He had seized the shovel again and the earth was flying furiously on all sides. Rapidly, he uncovered the top of the canvas sack, and then a second appeared in view. Frank bent down and seized one of the sacks, dragging it from the retaining earth. It came free. Joe flung aside his shovel and, in the illumination from the flashlight, Frank undid the heavy cord at the top of the sack and opened it.

Joe Hardy needed no encouragement. He grabbed the shovel again, and dirt was flying everywhere. Quickly, he uncovered the top of the canvas sack, and then a second one came into view. Frank bent down and grabbed one of the sacks, pulling it free from the packed earth. It came loose. Joe tossed aside his shovel, and with the flashlight's glow, Frank untied the heavy cord at the top of the sack and opened it.

He thrust his hand inside and withdrew it a moment later, clutching a handful of reddish brown objects that looked like pebbles.

He reached in and pulled out a moment later, holding a handful of reddish-brown objects that looked like pebbles.

"Nuggets!"

"Nuggets!"

The boys gazed at the gold nuggets in silent delight. They were of good size, and the youths realized that they must be very valuable. Frank thrust his hand into the sack again and this time brought forth a handful of reddish sand that they recognized as gold dust.

The boys stared at the gold nuggets in quiet happiness. They were a good size, and the guys understood that they must be really valuable. Frank reached into the sack again and this time pulled out a handful of reddish sand that they recognized as gold dust.

"Gold dust and nuggets! We've found it at last!"

"Gold dust and nuggets! We finally found it!"

"There are more sacks yet. Didn't dad say there were four?"

"There are more bags, right? Didn't Dad say there were four?"

Joe picked up his shovel again. After a few minutes' energetic digging he uncovered the rest of the sacks and in a short time all four were on the floor of the cave.

Joe grabbed his shovel again. After a few minutes of vigorous digging, he uncovered the remaining sacks, and soon all four were on the cave floor.

The Hardy boys examined each in turn, and found that each was identical with the first in that it contained gold dust and nuggets in large quantities. The sight of so much gold sent a thrill through them, just as it has sent a thrill through gold-seekers since the world began. Here was wealth, wealth in the raw, wealth for which men had fought and struggled, wealth that had been drawn from the depths of the earth.

The Hardy boys looked at each one in order and discovered that they were all the same as the first, containing large amounts of gold dust and nuggets. Seeing so much gold excited them, just like it has excited gold-seekers throughout history. Here was raw wealth, wealth that people had fought and struggled for, wealth that had been brought up from the depths of the earth.

"We've found it at last!" Frank declared, with a sigh of relief.

"We've finally found it!" Frank said, letting out a sigh of relief.

"Dad will be pleased."

"Dad will be happy."

"I don't think he ever really expected we'd find it."

"I don't think he ever actually expected us to find it."

"We've worked hard enough for it. Won't the outlaws be wild when they come here for it and find that it's gone!"

"We've put in enough effort for this. Just imagine how furious the outlaws will be when they come here to get it and discover it's missing!"

"Let them be wild. It isn't theirs."

"Let them be wild. It's not theirs."

"Four sacks of it," said Joe. "It must be worth thousands."

"Four bags of it," Joe said. "It has to be worth thousands."

"It's the gold that Jadbury Wilson mentioned. I'm sure of that. And before we hand it over to Bart Dawson we'll have an explanation from him."

"It's the gold that Jadbury Wilson talked about. I'm sure of it. And before we give it to Bart Dawson, we'll get an explanation from him."

"Somehow, I can't believe he's dishonest. There must be a mistake in it somewhere, Frank."

"Honestly, I can’t believe he’s lying. There has to be a mistake in there somewhere, Frank."

"You can't always tell by looks in this world. Although, to tell the truth, I find it hard to believe that Dawson made away with this, myself. But we'll make him come across with the whole story, and if he did steal it, we'll see that Wilson gets his share."

"You can't always judge by appearances in this world. Honestly, I find it hard to believe that Dawson got away with this. But we'll make him reveal the whole story, and if he did steal it, we'll make sure Wilson gets his share."

"That's the ticket. And now—to get out of this mine with it."

"That’s the ticket. Now—to escape this mine with it."

"It'll be easy enough. We can go up the shaft. That's the way the outlaws got in here, I guess. We took the wrong entrance getting in here. We got into one of the side workings of the mine instead of coming down the main way."

"It'll be simple enough. We can go up the shaft. That's probably how the outlaws got in here. We took the wrong entrance to get in here. We ended up in one of the side tunnels of the mine instead of taking the main route."

"As long as we don't run into any more wolves I don't care how we get out," said Joe. "The sooner we get out though, the better. It must be night by now."

"As long as we don't run into any more wolves, I don't care how we get out," Joe said. "The sooner we can leave, the better. It must be night by now."

Frank bent and picked up two of the sacks of gold.

Frank bent down and picked up two of the bags of gold.

"I'll carry two and you carry two. Boy, but they're heavy! I never knew gold weighed so much."

"I'll take two, and you take two. Wow, they're really heavy! I had no idea gold weighed this much."

"I shouldn't care if it weighed a ton. It won't seem like much, now that we've found it at last."

"I shouldn't care if it weighed a ton. It won't seem like much now that we've finally found it."

Frank hesitated.

Frank paused.

"It might be as well to dig a little deeper there. They might have divided the gold up. I'd hate to overlook a sack of it."

"It might be a good idea to look a little closer there. They might have split up the gold. I’d hate to miss out on a bag of it."

"I was just thinking the same thing." Joe picked up the shovel again. "I'll dig down a little bit farther, just for luck."

"I was just thinking the same thing." Joe grabbed the shovel again. "I'll dig down a bit more, just for good measure."

He attacked the hole in the earth again, and for a while he shoveled industriously, but it soon became apparent that they had found all of the gold that had been buried in that place.

He went after the hole in the ground again, and for a bit, he shoveled energetically, but it quickly became clear that they had uncovered all the gold that had been hidden there.

"I guess we got it all," he said, flinging the shovel to one side. "All the outlaws will find here will be a hole in the ground—a big one."

"I guess we have everything," he said, throwing the shovel aside. "All the outlaws will find here is a hole in the ground—a big one."

"I'd like to be listening in when they come to look for their treasure. They'll be as mad as hornets."

"I'd love to eavesdrop when they come searching for their treasure. They'll be as angry as bees."

Joe picked up his two sacks of gold.

Joe picked up his two bags of gold.

"Better let me carry one of yours," he suggested. "You have the flashlight to carry. It'll be awkward for you."

"Why don’t I carry one of yours?" he suggested. "You've got the flashlight to hold. That’ll be a bit tricky for you."

"I'd forgotten about the light," Frank agreed. "All right."

"I totally forgot about the light," Frank said. "Okay."

He passed over one of the sacks he had been carrying, and then bent down to pick up the flashlight that had been resting on the ground.

He dropped one of the bags he had been carrying and then leaned down to grab the flashlight that had been lying on the ground.

"And now," he said, "we'll leave the blue room. It isn't as blue as Black Pepper and his gang will be when they come to visit the place."

"And now," he said, "we'll leave the blue room. It’s not as blue as Black Pepper and his crew will be when they come to check out the place."

The boys looked at the hole in the ground and chuckled. They were just about to turn, ready to leave, when they heard a sound from the passage leading into the chamber.

The boys looked at the hole in the ground and laughed. They were just about to turn around, ready to leave, when they heard a noise coming from the passage that led into the chamber.

This time they knew it was no trick of the imagination. They could sense plainly that some one was standing there. Some one had crept up through the tunnel, unheard, and was even then standing silently in the darkness.

This time they realized it wasn't just their imagination. They could clearly feel that someone was there. Someone had quietly snuck up through the tunnel and was now standing silently in the darkness.

Frank flung the flashlight about. Its circle of radiance illuminated the dark entrance to the chamber clearly. There, in the very center of the opening, stood a tall, swarthy man with villainous features. He had a heavy black beard and his dark eyebrows were knitted with wrath. And, leveled directly at the two boys, he held in each hand a wicked-looking black revolver.

Frank swung the flashlight around. Its beam clearly lit up the dark entrance to the chamber. There, right in the middle of the opening, stood a tall, dark-skinned man with a sinister face. He had a thick black beard and his dark eyebrows were furrowed with anger. And, pointed straight at the two boys, he held a menacing-looking black revolver in each hand.

"Hands up!" he rasped curtly, in a voice that vibrated with anger.

"Hands up!" he shouted sharply, his voice charged with anger.

The Hardy boys knew without question that this man was none other than the notorious outlaw they had tried to circumvent—Black Pepper!

The Hardy boys knew for sure that this man was none other than the infamous outlaw they had tried to avoid—Black Pepper!


CHAPTER XXIII

The Capture

The Capture

The Hardy boys were stunned by surprise. With victory in their grasp they had turned to confront this menacing figure that seemed to have risen like a ghost from the darkness. Black Pepper had captured them red-handed.

The Hardy boys were completely caught off guard. Just when they thought they had won, they turned to face this threatening figure that seemed to have emerged like a ghost from the shadows. Black Pepper had caught them in the act.

"Drop that gold!" growled the outlaw. "Drop that gold and put up your hands!"

"Drop that gold!" growled the outlaw. "Drop that gold and raise your hands!"

They faced one another tensely. Suddenly Frank pointed to the tunnel directly behind Black Pepper.

They stared at each other, tense. Then Frank suddenly pointed to the tunnel right behind Black Pepper.

"Grab him!" he shouted.

"Get him!" he shouted.

Almost instinctively, the outlaw wheeled about to face the enemy whom he judged was behind him. Before he realized the trick that had been played on him and while his revolvers were turned away from the two lads, the Hardy boys sprang into action.

Almost instinctively, the outlaw turned to face the enemy he thought was behind him. Before he realized the trick that had been pulled on him and while his guns were pointed away from the two boys, the Hardy brothers sprang into action.

Joe flung one of the sacks of gold with all his force. It struck against the outlaw's arm and knocked one of the weapons clattering to the floor. At the same instant Frank flung the sack that he was carrying, and it struck Black Pepper in the chest.

Joe hurled one of the bags of gold with all his strength. It hit the outlaw's arm and sent one of the weapons clattering to the ground. At the same moment, Frank tossed the bag he was holding, and it hit Black Pepper in the chest.

The outlaw reeled backward. The Hardy boys leaped toward him.

The outlaw stumbled back. The Hardy boys rushed at him.

Frank was on him before he could raise his remaining weapon. Like a flash, he seized Black Pepper's arm, holding the revolver away from him. Then Joe joined the struggle and between the two of them they bore the outlaw to the ground by the sheer violence of their attack.

Frank was on him before he could lift his other weapon. In a flash, he grabbed Black Pepper's arm, keeping the revolver out of reach. Then Joe jumped in, and together they took the outlaw down hard with the sheer force of their attack.

Grimly, Black Pepper struggled. The flashlight had gone out, and the battle raged in complete darkness. It was difficult to tell friend from foe. The outlaw was strong and powerful and he wrestled desperately to get free.

Grimly, Black Pepper fought to break free. The flashlight had died, and the battle continued in total darkness. It was hard to distinguish between friends and enemies. The outlaw was strong and fierce, and he struggled fiercely to escape.

Frank clung grimly to the outlaw's arm, exerting all his strength to prevent Black Pepper from getting control of the revolver. The weapon exploded in the darkness, the shot sounding like a crash of thunder in that confined space.

Frank held tightly to the outlaw's arm, using all his strength to keep Black Pepper from taking control of the revolver. The gun went off in the darkness, the shot echoing like thunder in that small space.

Frank got his hands on the revolver and wrested sharply at it. Black Pepper's grasp relaxed. The revolver gave way and Frank wrenched it away from the outlaw. Quickly he reversed it and pressed the barrel against Black Pepper's body.

Frank grabbed the revolver and tugged at it forcefully. Black Pepper's grip loosened. The revolver budged and Frank yanked it away from the outlaw. He swiftly turned it around and pressed the barrel against Black Pepper's body.

"Put up your hands!" he snapped. "I have you covered."

"Put your hands up!" he snapped. "I've got you covered."

Black Pepper ceased his struggles and lay still.

Black Pepper stopped struggling and lay still.

"I give in," he said quickly. "I give in. Don't shoot."

"I give up," he said quickly. "I give up. Don't shoot."

"Get the flashlight, Joe."

"Grab the flashlight, Joe."

Joe relinquished his grasp on the outlaw and searched for the flashlight, which had rolled to a distant corner of the cave. He found it at last and switched it on. The light revealed Black Pepper lying on his back, his hands upraised. His eyes were wide with fear.

Joe let go of the outlaw and looked for the flashlight, which had rolled off to a far corner of the cave. He finally found it and turned it on. The light showed Black Pepper lying on his back, his hands raised. His eyes were wide with fear.

"Get up!" ordered Frank.

"Get up!" Frank ordered.

The outlaw scrambled to his feet, arms still high.

The outlaw jumped to his feet, arms still raised.

"Get the other gun, Joe."

"Grab the other gun, Joe."

Joe found the other revolver on the floor and picked it up.

Joe found the other revolver on the floor and picked it up.

"Fine! Now we'll take you back with us."

"Alright! Now we'll take you back with us."

"Let me go, boys," pleaded the desperado. "It was only a joke. I was only tryin' to scare you. Take the gold, if you want, but let me go."

"Let me go, guys," begged the outlaw. "It was just a joke. I was only trying to scare you. Take the gold if you want, but just let me go."

"You have a funny idea of a joke. Well, just as a joke, we'll take you down to Lucky Bottom and clap you into jail. That's the kind of a sense of humor we have. Pick up the gold, Joe, and go ahead of him. I'll come behind."

"You have a weird sense of humor. Just for fun, we’ll take you down to Lucky Bottom and throw you in jail. That’s the kind of humor we have. Pick up the gold, Joe, and go ahead of him. I’ll follow."

Armed with the flashlight and two sacks of gold, Joe went to the entrance of the blue room. Frank picked up the other two sacks and, still keeping Black Pepper covered with a revolver, urged him ahead.

Armed with the flashlight and two bags of gold, Joe headed to the entrance of the blue room. Frank grabbed the other two bags and, still keeping Black Pepper covered with a handgun, urged him to go in first.

"Forward, march!" he ordered.

"March forward!" he ordered.

Reluctantly, the outlaw strode ahead, following Joe, who was silhouetted against the circle of light cast by the flash.

Reluctantly, the outlaw walked ahead, following Joe, who stood out against the circle of light from the flash.

"My men will see that you pay up for this!" he growled savagely.

"My guys are going to make sure you pay for this!" he snarled fiercely.

"Your men will be scattered so far you'll never be able to find them when they hear you've been taken in," replied Frank. "If they don't, they'll land in jail with you. How did you happen to be down in the mine without them? Trying to make away with the gold in the storm?"

"Your guys will be so spread out that you'll never be able to find them when they find out you've been caught," Frank replied. "If they don't, they'll end up in jail with you. How did you end up down in the mine without them? Were you trying to run off with the gold during the storm?"

The shot told. Black Pepper looked around sharply.

The shot rang out. Black Pepper looked around quickly.

"I wasn't trying to double-cross them!" he shouted. "Don't tell them that! Don't say you found me down here. None of us was supposed to go in here alone."

"I wasn't trying to betray them!" he shouted. "Don't tell them that! Don't say you found me down here. None of us was supposed to come in here alone."

Frank chuckled.

Frank laughed.

"So that was your game, was it? You thought you'd sneak down here and grab the gold, then make your escape under cover of the blizzard. If we hadn't got here first, you would have done it, too. Your men will be liable to take revenge on us after that, won't they? Why, they'll want to see you hanged!"

"So that was your plan, huh? You thought you could sneak down here and grab the gold, then make your getaway during the blizzard. If we hadn't gotten here first, you would have pulled it off. Your men are definitely going to want revenge on us for this, right? They’ll be wanting to see you hanged!"

Black Pepper was silent. His bluff had failed, and he knew it. He knew that when the other outlaws heard he had been captured in the blue room they would realize that he had been trying to steal a march on them and make away with the gold without their knowledge.

Black Pepper was quiet. His bluff had backfired, and he was aware of it. He understood that when the other outlaws found out he had been caught in the blue room, they would see that he had been trying to get ahead of them and escape with the gold without them knowing.

Joe led the way down the passage into the next chamber, and from there they proceeded out into the main shaft.

Joe took the lead down the hallway into the next room, and from there they moved out into the main shaft.

"I guess we were right after all when he thought we heard noises," he called back to Frank. "It was our friend here making his way down into the mine."

"I guess we were right after all when he thought we heard noises," he called back to Frank. "It was our friend here making his way down into the mine."

"He came down quietly enough. I nearly jumped out of my shoes when I saw him standing there with those revolvers pointed at us. We'll say that much for you, Black Pepper—you took us completely by surprise."

"He came down quietly enough. I almost jumped out of my skin when I saw him standing there with those revolvers aimed at us. We’ll give you this much, Black Pepper—you completely caught us off guard."

The outlaw grunted, but it was not with satisfaction.

The outlaw grunted, but it wasn't out of satisfaction.

Joe began to ascend the ladder that led up the side of the shaft.

Joe started to climb the ladder that went up the side of the shaft.

"Up you go," declared Frank, prodding the desperado in the ribs with the barrel of the revolver. Black Pepper scrambled up the rungs with alacrity.

"Get up," Frank said, poking the desperado in the ribs with the barrel of the revolver. Black Pepper quickly scrambled up the rungs.

They made the tedious climb without trouble, and when Joe emerged at the top of the shaft he took up his position and covered Black Pepper with the revolver until the outlaw was again on the surface and until Frank had joined him. The blizzard had died down to a mild snowfall, although darkness had fallen.

They made the tiring climb easily, and when Joe reached the top of the shaft, he took his position and aimed the revolver at Black Pepper until the outlaw was back on the surface and until Frank had joined him. The blizzard had lessened to a light snowfall, even though it was now dark.

Far below, they could see the few twinkling lights of Lucky Bottom. A clearly defined trail led out toward the road. Joe took the lead once more.

Far below, they could see the few twinkling lights of Lucky Bottom. A clear trail extended toward the road. Joe took the lead again.

So the odd procession made its way through the snow, the outlaw shambling despondently and dispiritedly between his captors. The weight of the gold was considerable, but Frank and Joe scarcely noticed it, so exultant were they over their double victory. They had not only recovered the gold for its rightful owners, but they had captured one of the most notorious outlaws of the West in the bargain.

So the strange group trudged through the snow, the outlaw stumbling sadly and hopelessly between his captors. The gold was heavy, but Frank and Joe barely noticed it, so thrilled were they about their double win. They had not only returned the gold to its rightful owners, but they had also caught one of the most infamous outlaws in the West along the way.

When they reached Hank Shale's cabin they marched Black Pepper up to the door. Joe stepped inside and, still covering the outlaw, bade him enter.

When they got to Hank Shale's cabin, they marched Black Pepper up to the door. Joe walked inside and, still keeping the outlaw covered, told him to come in.

Frank saw his father sitting up in bed, wide-eyed with astonishment, and Hank Shale and Bart Dawson by the fire, their mouths agape. Bart Dawson had just been in the act of putting his pipe in his mouth as they entered, and he held it suspended, staring at the trio as they came into the cabin.

Frank saw his dad sitting up in bed, wide-eyed with shock, and Hank Shale and Bart Dawson by the fire, their mouths hanging open. Bart Dawson had just been about to put his pipe in his mouth when they walked in, and he held it in mid-air, staring at the three of them as they entered the cabin.

Joe flung down his sacks of gold on the table.

Joe dropped his bags of gold on the table.

"Here's the gold—part of it, anyway!"

"Here's the gold—at least some of it!"

"And here's the rest of it," said Frank as he closed the door and put down his two sacks. "And here," he said, indicating Black Pepper, "is the leader of the gang who stole it."

"And here's the rest of it," Frank said as he closed the door and set down his two bags. "And here," he said, pointing to Black Pepper, "is the leader of the gang that took it."

"Black Pepper!" ejaculated Hank Shale, starting up.

"Black Pepper!" Hank Shale exclaimed, sitting up suddenly.

The outlaw was silent. He eyed Frank's revolver warily, as though even yet considering his chances of escape. But the weapon did not waver and he saw that he was trapped.

The outlaw was quiet. He looked at Frank's revolver cautiously, as if he was still weighing his chances of getting away. But the gun stayed steady and he realized he was cornered.

"Got a rope?" asked Frank of Hank Shale. "He must be tired keeping his hands up. We'll tie his wrists and then march him down to the jail."

"Got a rope?" Frank asked Hank Shale. "He must be tired holding his hands up. We'll tie his wrists and then take him to the jail."

"I'll say I have a rope!" shouted Hank, springing up, and within a few minutes Black Pepper's arms were firmly bound behind his back.

"I'll say I have a rope!" Hank shouted, jumping up, and in just a few minutes, Black Pepper's arms were securely tied behind his back.

"But where on airth did ye find the gold?" demanded Bart Dawson, spluttering with excitement. "Tell us what happened! It's the very gold that was stolen!" He dug his hands into the sacks and sifted the gold dust and nuggets between his fingers. "It's all here—every bit of it! Tell us all about it, lads."

"But where on Earth did you find the gold?" Bart Dawson asked, bursting with excitement. "Tell us what happened! It's the very gold that was stolen!" He dug his hands into the sacks and sifted the gold dust and nuggets between his fingers. "It's all here—every single piece! Tell us everything, guys."

"Take him down to jail first," said Fenton Hardy quietly. "I'm as curious as any one to hear what happened, but the boys can tell us when they come back. The story will keep. But don't be long."

"Take him to jail first," Fenton Hardy said softly. "I'm just as curious as anyone to know what happened, but the boys can fill us in when they get back. The story will still be there. But don’t take too long."

"I'll go with ye!" declared Dawson, picking up his hat and scrambling into his mackinaw coat. "This is too good to miss. I never thought I'd see the day when Black Pepper would be shoved into the calaboose!"

"I'll go with you!" declared Dawson, grabbing his hat and diving into his raincoat. "This is too good to miss. I never thought I'd see the day when Black Pepper would be thrown in jail!"

So, with Bart Dawson chattering excitedly by their sides, the Hardy boys left the cabin, where Fenton Hardy and Hank Shale were indulging in vain conjectures as to how the gold had been recovered and how the outlaw had been captured.

So, with Bart Dawson chatting excitedly beside them, the Hardy boys left the cabin, where Fenton Hardy and Hank Shale were engaging in pointless speculation about how the gold had been retrieved and how the outlaw had been caught.

As they entered Lucky Bottom, although it was nightfall and people had long since retired indoors, the news quickly spread, by some mysterious system of telegraphy or mental telepathy, and by the time they reached the jail, husky miners and citizens were running down the street from every direction, anxious to witness the spectacle of Black Pepper being put behind the bars at last.

As they arrived in Lucky Bottom, even though it was getting dark and people had already gone inside, the word spread quickly, almost by some strange method of communication. By the time they got to the jail, sturdy miners and locals were rushing down the street from all directions, eager to see the spectacle of Black Pepper finally being locked up.

The sheriff was in his office and his jaw sagged with amazement when they entered.

The sheriff was in his office, and his jaw dropped in shock when they walked in.

"Here's Black Pepper for ye!" roared Bart Dawson. "Here's a prisoner for your jail, sheriff! Clap him in a good strong cell!"

"Here's Black Pepper for you!" shouted Bart Dawson. "Here's a prisoner for your jail, sheriff! Lock him up in a solid cell!"

"B—B—Black Pepper!" stammered the sheriff.

"B—B—Black Pepper!" stuttered the sheriff.

"This is him. And see that he don't get loose, neither. If he does, we'll string you up to a telygrapht pole."

"This is him. And make sure he doesn't get loose, okay? If he does, we'll hang you up to a telegraph pole."

"What's the charge?" asked the sheriff mechanically.

"What's the charge?" the sheriff asked, speaking automatically.

"There don't need to be no charge. You know as well as I do that there's been a reward of five hundred out for Black Pepper for the last three years. Put him in a cell, and no more of your foolish questions. If you must have a charge, put him down for stealin' four bags of gold that never belonged to him. Charge him with vagrancy and loiterin' and spittin' on the sidewalk. Charge him with mayhem and assault and battery and horse-stealin' and robbery and carryin' concealed weapons and parkin' his autymobile too close to a hydrant. Put him down for everythin' you've got on your book. He's been guilty of 'em all."

"There doesn't need to be any charge. You know as well as I do that there's been a bounty of five hundred on Black Pepper for the last three years. Put him in a cell, and stop with the silly questions. If you really need a charge, book him for stealing four bags of gold that never belonged to him. Charge him with vagrancy and loitering and spitting on the sidewalk. Charge him with assault and battery and horse theft and robbery and carrying concealed weapons and parking his car too close to a fire hydrant. Charge him with everything you've got in your records. He's guilty of all of it."

The sheriff wilted. He led Black Pepper to a cell, where Slim Briggs was sitting despondently. When Slim saw the leader of the gang being ushered in he shook his head in sympathy and groaned.

The sheriff sagged. He took Black Pepper to a cell, where Slim Briggs was sitting gloomily. When Slim saw the gang leader being brought in, he shook his head in sympathy and groaned.

The door clanged.

The door slammed.

"That fixes Black Pepper!" declared Bart Dawson, with satisfaction. "Now come on back to the cabin and tell us all about it. I'm just about dyin' of curiosity."

"That takes care of Black Pepper!" Bart Dawson said with satisfaction. "Now come back to the cabin and tell us all about it. I'm really curious!"

Dawson and the Hardy boys left the jail and had to fight their way through the crowd that surged about the doorway. Questions were hurled at them as they started up the street. Was it true that Black Pepper had been captured at last? Who caught him? What was he in for? How did it all happen, anyway?

Dawson and the Hardy boys left the jail and had to push their way through the crowd that was packed around the doorway. Questions were thrown at them as they started up the street. Was it true that Black Pepper had been caught at last? Who got him? What was he charged with? How did it all go down, anyway?

"Tell ye all to-morrow," promised Bart Dawson, leading the boys on up the hill. "I'm not very clear about it just yet, myself."

"Tell you all tomorrow," promised Bart Dawson, leading the boys up the hill. "I'm not really sure about it myself yet."

So the Hardy boys returned to Hank Shale's cabin on the hill, there to tell the tale of their hazardous adventures and the successful outcome of their search for the hidden gold.

So the Hardy boys went back to Hank Shale's cabin on the hill to share the story of their risky adventures and the successful outcome of their search for the hidden gold.


CHAPTER XXIV

Bart Dawson Explains

Bart Dawson Explains

Sitting beside the fire in Hank Shale's cabin, the Hardy boys told their story. They were interrupted frequently by ejaculations of "Ye don't say!" and, "Well I'll be switched!" from the two old miners, and occasionally their father smiled in approval.

Sitting by the fire in Hank Shale's cabin, the Hardy boys shared their story. They were often interrupted by exclamations of "You don’t say!" and "Well, I'll be darned!" from the two old miners, and every now and then their father smiled with approval.

When they had finished, Bart Dawson slapped his knee.

When they were done, Bart Dawson slapped his knee.

"I never heard the beat of it!" he declared. "Ye went up on that there mountain and got lost and attacked by wolves and fell down the shaft and got held up by Black Pepper, and yet here ye are, and there's the gold. I never heard the beat!"

"I never heard anything like it!" he said. "You went up that mountain, got lost, were attacked by wolves, fell down the shaft, and were saved by Black Pepper, and yet here you are, and there's the gold. I can't believe it!"

"Neither did I!" affirmed Hank Shale slowly.

"Me neither!" Hank Shale replied slowly.

"There's the gold," laughed Frank, indicating the four sacks on the table.

"There's the gold," laughed Frank, pointing to the four bags on the table.

"Coulson will be tickled to death," declared Bart Dawson. "He never expected either of us to see it again."

"Coulson will be thrilled," said Bart Dawson. "He never thought either of us would see it again."

"There's a question we wanted to ask you," put in Frank. "Are you sure there isn't anybody else but Mr. Coulson sharing the gold with you?"

"There's a question we wanted to ask you," Frank said. "Are you sure there isn't anyone else besides Mr. Coulson sharing the gold with you?"

Fenton Hardy looked up startled. He could not imagine what this was leading to. As for Bart Dawson, he looked blank.

Fenton Hardy looked up in surprise. He couldn't figure out where this was going. As for Bart Dawson, he appeared confused.

"Not that I know of," he said.

"Not that I know of," he said.

"Are you quite sure?"

"Are you really sure?"

"I'm certain sure. There's Coulson's brother did own a share of it, but he's dead, and there's Jadbury Wilson, my old pardner, but he's dead, too. That leaves only me and Coulson."

"I'm definitely sure. Coulson's brother owned a share of it, but he's dead, and then there's Jadbury Wilson, my old partner, but he's dead too. That just leaves me and Coulson."

"Are you sure Wilson is dead?"

"Are you sure Wilson is dead?"

"Last we heard of him he was. He went East, they say, and died out there. I sure wish he could be here to-night. Poor old Jad—he worked so hard for his share of that gold, and never got none of it."

"Last we heard of him, he was. He went east, they say, and died out there. I really wish he could be here tonight. Poor old Jad—he worked so hard for his share of that gold, and never got any of it."

"Jadbury Wilson isn't dead."

"Jadbury Wilson is not dead."

"What?" shouted Bart Dawson, leaping to his feet. "Say them words again, lad! Do ye know for sure? Is Jad Wilson still livin'?"

"What?" shouted Bart Dawson, jumping to his feet. "Say those words again, kid! Do you know for sure? Is Jad Wilson still alive?"

"He's staying at our house in Bayport right now," declared Joe.

"He's staying at our place in Bayport right now," Joe said.

Fenton Hardy looked more surprised than ever. The case was taking an angle he had never anticipated.

Fenton Hardy looked more surprised than ever. The case was taking a direction he had never expected.

"If I'm sure Jad Wilson is still alive I'll be the happiest man in the world!" declared Bart Dawson. "But how do ye know? Tell me about him."

"If I'm sure Jad Wilson is still alive, I'll be the happiest man in the world!" declared Bart Dawson. "But how do you know? Tell me about him."

The Hardy boys thereupon told of their meeting with Jadbury Wilson and of the story he had told of his gold-mining days in the West.

The Hardy boys then talked about their meeting with Jadbury Wilson and the story he shared about his gold-mining days in the West.

"So he thinks that you stole the gold from him and went away with it," concluded Frank.

"So he believes you took the gold from him and left with it," Frank finished.

"I don't blame him for thinkin' that!" said Dawson heartily. "I don't blame him a bit! When I come back to Lucky Bottom I made it my business to trace up my old pardners, but the only one I could find was Coulson, and he told me his brother and Jad Wilson was dead."

"I don't blame him for thinking that!" Dawson said enthusiastically. "Not at all! When I returned to Lucky Bottom, I made it a point to track down my old partners, but the only one I could find was Coulson, and he told me his brother and Jad Wilson were dead."

"But what had happened to the gold?"

"But what happened to the gold?"

"I'm comin' to that. When the outlaws attacked our camp, the others sent me out to hide the gold. And I hid it. I was just gettin' away when a stray bullet hit me, and I'll be hanged if I didn't go clean off my head. I didn't remember nothin'. I must have wandered away from Lucky Bottom altogether, for when I come to myself I was miles and miles away, up in northern Montana, and I couldn't remember one thing of my life up to that time. It had been wiped clean out of my memory. I had papers on me that had my name written on them, but I didn't know where I had come from or nothin'."

"I'm getting to that. When the outlaws attacked our camp, the others sent me to hide the gold. And I did hide it. I was just getting away when a stray bullet hit me, and I'll be damned if it didn't knock me out. I didn’t remember anything. I must have wandered away from Lucky Bottom completely, because when I came to, I was miles and miles away, up in northern Montana, and I couldn’t recall a single thing about my life up until that moment. It had all been wiped clean from my memory. I had papers on me that had my name on them, but I didn’t know where I had come from or anything."

"I have heard of such cases," said Fenton Hardy.

"I've heard of cases like that," said Fenton Hardy.

"I had clean lost my memory. I didn't even know I had ever been in Lucky Bottom. Everythin' was blank up to the time I come to myself. Then, a few months ago, a doctor told me he thought he could fix me up, and I had an operation and—click! I remembered everythin'. I remembered Lucky Bottom and our mine, and how I had hidden the gold. It all come back to me. So I came back to Lucky Bottom and dug up the gold again and tried to find my pardners, and Coulson and I was ready to split it up between us, seein' we thought his brother and Jad Wilson was dead, when the outlaws stole it on us. So that's how it happened."

"I had completely lost my memory. I didn’t even remember ever being in Lucky Bottom. Everything was a blank until the moment I regained consciousness. Then, a few months ago, a doctor said he thought he could help me, so I had an operation, and—bam! I remembered everything. I recalled Lucky Bottom, our mine, and how I had hidden the gold. It all came rushing back to me. So, I returned to Lucky Bottom, dug up the gold again, and tried to track down my partners. Coulson and I were ready to split it between us, thinking his brother and Jad Wilson were dead, when the outlaws stole it from us. That's how it all went down."

Frank and Joe had listened entranced.

Frank and Joe listened intently.

"Why, that explains everything!" Frank declared. "It clears it all up. We couldn't believe you had been crooked, although—" he stopped in confusion.

"Wow, that explains everything!" Frank said. "It clears it all up. We couldn't believe you had been dishonest, but—" he paused, feeling confused.

"Although it looked mighty like it, eh?" finished Bart Dawson, with a smile. "Well, I don't blame ye for bein' suspicious. And now, if you'll take me back East with ye, I'll meet my old pardner, Jad Wilson, again, and he'll get his share of the gold. It should be enough to keep him in comfort for all the rest of his life."

"Although it sure looked like it, right?" Bart Dawson finished with a smile. "Well, I can't blame you for being suspicious. Now, if you take me back East with you, I'll see my old partner, Jad Wilson, again, and he'll get his share of the gold. That should be enough to keep him comfortable for the rest of his life."

"He's been having a pretty tough time," said Frank. "He'll welcome it."

"He's been going through a rough patch," said Frank. "He'll appreciate it."

"And glad I'll be to see that he gets his share. As for you, Mr. Hardy," went on Dawson, turning to the detective. "I promised you a good fee if ye'd take this case for me and I promised you a reward if the gold was found. Two thousand dollars, I said, and two thousand dollars you'll get as soon as I can get these nuggets and the gold dust changed into real money."

"And I'll be happy to see that he gets his share. As for you, Mr. Hardy," Dawson continued, turning to the detective. "I promised you a good fee if you took this case for me, and I promised you a reward if the gold was found. Two thousand dollars, I said, and two thousand dollars you'll get as soon as I can turn these nuggets and the gold dust into real money."

"I won't take it all," said Fenton Hardy. "My boys did the real work."

"I won't take all the credit," Fenton Hardy said. "My sons did the real work."

"That's up to you. It was your case and you can do what you like with the money. But," Dawson declared with emphasis, "if ye don't divvy up with these two lads——!"

"That's your choice. It was your case, and you can do whatever you want with the money. But," Dawson said firmly, "if you don’t share with these two guys——!"

"Don't worry," laughed the detective. "I have no intention of letting them work for nothing. I want to share the reward with them."

"Don't worry," the detective laughed. "I don't plan on letting them work for free. I want to share the reward with them."

"Well, that's fine, then. And they get five hundred dollars for capturin' Black Pepper—don't forget that." Bart Dawson turned to the Hardy boys. "Ye ought to have a nice fat bank account when you go back East."

"Well, that's fine, then. And they get five hundred dollars for capturing Black Pepper—don't forget that." Bart Dawson turned to the Hardy boys. "You should have a nice fat bank account when you go back East."

"It begins to look that way," agreed Frank, with a pleased smile.

"It seems like that's the case," Frank agreed, smiling happily.

"You've done good work," said Fenton Hardy. "You've cleaned up this case in record time and, to tell the truth, I hardly expected you would be successful, because you were up against a mighty difficult undertaking and you didn't have very much to work on. You deserve everything that is coming to you in the way of reward. You've done me credit."

"You did great work," said Fenton Hardy. "You solved this case in record time and, to be honest, I didn't think you'd succeed because you were dealing with a really tough situation and you didn’t have much to go on. You deserve all the rewards coming your way. You’ve made me proud."

"Hearing you say that is reward enough," said Frank, and Joe nodded his head in agreement.

"Hearing you say that is enough of a reward," Frank said, and Joe nodded in agreement.

"Real detectives, both of 'em," said Hank Shale, puffing at his pipe.

"Real detectives, both of them," said Hank Shale, puffing on his pipe.

The End

The End


MYSTERY STORIES FOR BOYS

MYSTERY STORIES FOR KIDS

By FRANKLIN W. DIXON

By Franklin W. Dixon

THE HARDY BOYS: THE TOWER TREASURE
THE HARDY BOYS: THE HOUSE ON THE CLIFF
THE HARDY BOYS: THE SECRET OF THE OLD MILL
THE HARDY BOYS: THE MISSING CHUMS
THE HARDY BOYS: HUNTING FOR HIDDEN GOLD

THE HARDY BOYS: THE TOWER TREASURE
THE HARDY BOYS: THE HOUSE ON THE CLIFF
THE HARDY BOYS: THE SECRET OF THE OLD MILL
THE HARDY BOYS: THE MISSING CHUMS
THE HARDY BOYS: HUNTING FOR HIDDEN GOLD

(Other Volumes in Preparation)

(Other Volumes Coming Soon)

GROSSET AND DUNLAP, PUBLISHERS, NEW YORK

GROSSET AND DUNLAP, PUBLISHERS, NEW YORK


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!